P. 1
SmartPlant PID

SmartPlant PID

|Views: 2,437|Likes:
Published by Myaqaab

More info:

Published by: Myaqaab on Nov 14, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

08/16/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Customer Support and Documentation Comments
  • Customer Support and Documentation Comments
  • Introducing SmartPlant P&ID
  • SmartPlant P&ID Program Group
  • What's New in SmartPlant P&ID?
  • SmartPlant P&ID Help Command
  • Printable Guides Command
  • SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command
  • Help > SmartPlant P&ID on the Web
  • SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command
  • Help > SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum
  • About SmartPlant P&ID Command
  • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID
  • Navigating in the Software: An Overview
  • Working With the Design Window: An Overview
  • Show Command
  • Options Command
  • Previous Command
  • Save Settings Command
  • Zoom Area Command
  • Zoom In Command
  • Zoom Out Command
  • Fit Command
  • Pan Command
  • Display Command
  • Toolbars Command
  • New Command
  • Cascade Command
  • Tile Horizontally Command
  • Tile Vertically Command
  • Active Window List
  • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview
  • Engineering Data Editor Command
  • Stockpile Menu: An Overview
  • Edit Menu: An Overview
  • Claim Command
  • Release Claim Command
  • Claim Status Command
  • View Menu: An Overview
  • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview
  • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview
  • Catalog Explorer Command
  • Catalog Menu: An Overview
  • View Menu
  • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer)
  • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview
  • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview
  • Properties Window Command
  • Customizing the Software: An Overview
  • Customize Command
  • Custom Commands Command
  • Working with Drawings: An Overview
  • Open Command
  • Open Dialog Box
  • Open Plant Structure Dialog Box
  • Filter Dialog Box
  • Customize Current View Dialog Box
  • Open an Existing Drawing
  • Open a Drawing in a Different Database
  • Customize the Open Dialog Box
  • Recent Drawings
  • Access a Recently Open Drawing
  • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View
  • File Properties Command
  • File Properties Dialog Box
  • View Document Properties
  • Set Document Properties
  • Close Command
  • Close an Active Drawing
  • Exit Command
  • Close the Program
  • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview
  • New Template Command
  • Create a Drawing Template
  • Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border
  • Saving Drawings: An Overview
  • Save Command
  • Save As Command
  • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview
  • Recreate a Drawing
  • Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition
  • Using Filters: An Overview
  • Add Filter Command
  • Filter Tab Cut Command
  • Filter Tab Copy Command
  • Filter Tab Paste Command
  • Filter Tab Delete Command
  • Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command
  • Filter Tab Properties Command
  • Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview
  • Understanding Database Constraints
  • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview
  • Select Tool Command
  • Select Tool Ribbon
  • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool
  • Select an Item
  • Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool
  • Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool
  • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview
  • Show Grid Command
  • Snap Grid Command
  • Placing Equipment: An Overview
  • Place Equipment
  • Place Multiple Representations
  • Routing Lines: An Overview
  • Line Routing Ribbon
  • Route a Line
  • Start a Line in Free Space
  • Start a Line from a Connect Point
  • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line
  • Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line
  • Branch from an Existing Line
  • Branch to an Existing Line
  • Add a Manual Gap to a Line
  • Assign Heat Tracing
  • Break Run Command
  • Break a Pipe Run
  • Join Runs Command
  • Join Pipe Runs
  • Using Piping Components: An Overview
  • Place a Piping Component
  • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview
  • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview
  • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window)
  • Place an Inline Instrument
  • Place an Offline Instrument
  • Add Instruments to a Loop
  • Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window)
  • Remove an Instrument from a Loop
  • Labeling: An Overview
  • Placing Labels: An Overview
  • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview
  • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview
  • Calling Item Tag Validation
  • Using Annotations: An Overview
  • Place an Annotation
  • Place an Area Break
  • Place a Package
  • Place a Revision Cloud
  • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview
  • Undo Command
  • Move Command
  • Move To Drawing Command
  • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview
  • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview
  • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview
  • Copying Items: An Overview
  • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview
  • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview
  • Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview
  • Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box
  • Place an Item from the Stockpile
  • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing
  • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile
  • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet
  • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile
  • Gapping Lines: An Overview
  • AutoGap Command
  • Gap Now Command
  • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview
  • Update Symbology Command
  • Update Symbology
  • Update Line Settings
  • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview
  • Image Command
  • Object Command
  • Paste Special Command
  • Links Command
  • Working With Assemblies: An Overview
  • Save As Assembly Command
  • Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview
  • Claiming Items: An Overview
  • Show Claims Command
  • Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview
  • Compare and Refresh Command
  • Consistency Checking: An Overview
  • Show Inconsistencies Command
  • Show Inconsistencies
  • Properties Command
  • Consistency Check Dialog Box
  • Review an Inconsistency
  • Resolve an Inconsistency
  • Reapply Rules Command
  • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency
  • Importing Drawing Data: An Overview
  • Import Data File Command
  • Import Log Dialog Box
  • Import SmartSketch Command
  • Using the SmartPlant Migrator
  • Import a SmartSketch File
  • Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data
  • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data
  • Generating Reports: An Overview
  • Plant Reports Command
  • Plant Reports Dialog Box
  • Generate a Report
  • My Reports Command
  • My Reports Dialog Box
  • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview
  • Tabular Format Report
  • Fixed Format Report
  • Composite Format Report
  • Edit Command
  • Delete Command
  • SmartPlant Reports Toolbar
  • Printing Drawings: An Overview
  • Print Command
  • Print Dialog Box
  • Settings Dialog Box
  • Print a Drawing
  • Print a Selected Area
  • Set Print Options
  • Change Printer Properties
  • Print to a File
  • Page Setup Command
  • Page Setup Dialog Box
  • Set up a Page Layout
  • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview
  • Publishing to TEF: An Overview
  • Publish Command
  • Find Documents to Publish Command
  • Browser Command
  • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview
  • Retrieve Command
  • Correlating Items: An Overview
  • Correlate Command
  • Using the To Do List: An Overview
  • To Do List Command
  • Open the To Do List
  • To Do List Dialog Box
  • Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview
  • Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists
  • Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID
  • Setting Construction Status
  • Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation
  • Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID
  • Using Filters Versus Levels
  • Glossary
  • Index

SmartPlant P&ID

User’s Guide
June 2004 Version 4.1

DPID2-PE-200004E

Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, PDS, and MARIAN are registered trademarks Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Customer Support and Documentation Comments........................................................9 Introducing SmartPlant P&ID .......................................................................................10 SmartPlant P&ID Program Group ..............................................................................11 What's New in SmartPlant P&ID?..............................................................................12
SmartPlant P&ID Help Command.................................................................................... 12 Printable Guides Command .............................................................................................. 12 SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command ......................................................................... 12 SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command ........................................................................ 13 About SmartPlant P&ID Command.................................................................................. 13 Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID................................................... 13

Navigating in the Software: An Overview .....................................................................14 Working With the Design Window: An Overview ....................................................15
Show Command................................................................................................................ 17 Options Command ............................................................................................................ 17 Previous Command........................................................................................................... 22 Save Settings Command ................................................................................................... 22 Zoom Area Command....................................................................................................... 22 Zoom In Command ........................................................................................................... 23 Zoom Out Command ........................................................................................................ 24 Fit Command .................................................................................................................... 24 Pan Command................................................................................................................... 25 Display Command ............................................................................................................ 26 Toolbars Command........................................................................................................... 26 Properties Command......................................................................................................... 28 New Command ................................................................................................................. 34 Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 36 Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 36 Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 36 Active Window List.......................................................................................................... 36

Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview..............................................38
Engineering Data Editor Command.................................................................................. 39 Stockpile Menu: An Overview ......................................................................................... 41 Edit Menu: An Overview.................................................................................................. 43 Claim Command ............................................................................................................... 44 Release Claim Command.................................................................................................. 44 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................... 45 View Menu: An Overview................................................................................................ 45 Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview ......................... 59

Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview.......................................................................65
Catalog Explorer Command ............................................................................................. 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview ............................................................................................ 68 View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 77 Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) ............................................................................... 79

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 3

Table of Contents
Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview .................................................................. 82

Working With the Properties Window: An Overview ...............................................83
Properties Window Command .......................................................................................... 84

Customizing the Software: An Overview...................................................................91
Customize Command........................................................................................................ 92 Custom Commands Command ......................................................................................... 97

Working with Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................102 Open Command ........................................................................................................104
Open Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 104 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box ................................................................................... 105 Filter Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 106 Customize Current View Dialog Box ............................................................................. 107 Open an Existing Drawing.............................................................................................. 108 Open a Drawing in a Different Database ........................................................................ 109 Customize the Open Dialog Box .................................................................................... 110

Recent Drawings.......................................................................................................111
Access a Recently Open Drawing................................................................................... 111 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View..................................................................... 111

File Properties Command .........................................................................................112
File Properties Dialog Box.............................................................................................. 112 View Document Properties ............................................................................................. 115 Set Document Properties................................................................................................. 116

Close Command........................................................................................................117
Close an Active Drawing ................................................................................................ 117

Exit Command ..........................................................................................................118
Close the Program........................................................................................................... 118

Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview ............................................................119
New Template Command ............................................................................................... 120 Create a Drawing Template ............................................................................................ 121 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border..................................................................... 122

Saving Drawings: An Overview...............................................................................124
Save Command ............................................................................................................... 125 Save As Command.......................................................................................................... 125

Re-creating Drawings: An Overview .......................................................................127
Recreate a Drawing......................................................................................................... 129 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition ............................................................... 129

Using Filters: An Overview......................................................................................130
Add Filter Command ...................................................................................................... 131 Filter Tab Cut Command ................................................................................................ 138 Filter Tab Copy Command ............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Paste Command.............................................................................................. 139 Filter Tab Delete Command............................................................................................ 139 Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command............................................................. 140 Filter Tab Properties Command...................................................................................... 140

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview ................................................141 Understanding Database Constraints........................................................................143 Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview...................................................................144 4 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Select Tool Command..................................................................................................... 145 Select Tool Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 146 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ..................................................................................... 146 Select an Item.................................................................................................................. 147 Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool............................................. 148 Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ............................................... 149

Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview.....................................................................150
Show Grid Command ..................................................................................................... 150 Snap Grid Command....................................................................................................... 151

Placing Equipment: An Overview ............................................................................152
Place Equipment ............................................................................................................. 153 Place Multiple Representations....................................................................................... 154

Routing Lines: An Overview....................................................................................156
Line Routing Ribbon....................................................................................................... 157 Route a Line.................................................................................................................... 158 Start a Line in Free Space ............................................................................................... 159 Start a Line from a Connect Point................................................................................... 160 Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line .................................................................... 161 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line .............................................................................. 161 Branch from an Existing Line......................................................................................... 162 Branch to an Existing Line ............................................................................................. 162 Add a Manual Gap to a Line........................................................................................... 163 Assign Heat Tracing ....................................................................................................... 164

Break Run Command ...............................................................................................165
Break a Pipe Run ............................................................................................................ 165

Join Runs Command.................................................................................................166
Join Pipe Runs ................................................................................................................ 166

Using Piping Components: An Overview ................................................................167
Place a Piping Component .............................................................................................. 167 Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview ...................................................................... 169

Placing Instrumentation: An Overview ....................................................................174
Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window)................................................................... 175 Place an Inline Instrument .............................................................................................. 175 Place an Offline Instrument ............................................................................................ 177 Add Instruments to a Loop ............................................................................................. 178 Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) .............. 179 Remove an Instrument from a Loop ............................................................................... 180

Labeling: An Overview ............................................................................................181
Placing Labels: An Overview ......................................................................................... 182 Using the Types of Labels: An Overview....................................................................... 191 Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview .................................................. 201 Calling Item Tag Validation ........................................................................................... 208

Using Annotations: An Overview ............................................................................210
Place an Annotation ........................................................................................................ 211 Place an Area Break........................................................................................................ 212 Place a Package............................................................................................................... 213 Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................... 214

Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview ...............................................215
Undo Command .............................................................................................................. 216 Move Command ............................................................................................................. 217

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 5

Table of Contents
Move To Drawing Command ......................................................................................... 222 Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview.................................................... 225 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview....................................... 238 Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview........................................................................ 245 Copying Items: An Overview ......................................................................................... 253 Selecting Connected Items: An Overview ...................................................................... 254 Modifying Item Properties: An Overview ...................................................................... 258

Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview ................................................263
Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box........................................................................ 264 Place an Item from the Stockpile .................................................................................... 264 Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing......................................... 265 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile........................................................... 265 Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet..................................................................... 267 Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile................. 268

Gapping Lines: An Overview...................................................................................269
AutoGap Command ........................................................................................................ 269 Gap Now Command ....................................................................................................... 270

Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview.................................................271
Update Symbology Command........................................................................................ 271 Update Symbology ......................................................................................................... 272 Update Line Settings....................................................................................................... 272

Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview ......................................................273
Image Command............................................................................................................. 275 Object Command ............................................................................................................ 276 Paste Special Command.................................................................................................. 280 Links Command.............................................................................................................. 281

Working With Assemblies: An Overview................................................................284
Save As Assembly Command......................................................................................... 285

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview ....................................................288 Claiming Items: An Overview..................................................................................289
Claim Command ............................................................................................................. 291 Release Claim Command................................................................................................ 300 Claim Status Command .................................................................................................. 301 Show Claims Command ................................................................................................. 303

Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview ................................................304
Compare and Refresh Command .................................................................................... 305

Consistency Checking: An Overview ...........................................................................313 Show Inconsistencies Command ..............................................................................314
Show Inconsistencies ...................................................................................................... 314

Properties Command ................................................................................................315
Consistency Check Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 316 Review an Inconsistency................................................................................................. 317 Resolve an Inconsistency................................................................................................ 319

Reapply Rules Command .........................................................................................321
Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.................................................. 322

Importing Drawing Data: An Overview ......................................................................323 6 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Table of Contents Import Data File Command ......................................................................................324
Import Log Dialog Box................................................................................................... 324

Import SmartSketch Command ................................................................................325
Using the SmartPlant Migrator ....................................................................................... 325 Import a SmartSketch File .............................................................................................. 328

Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .......................................................................329
Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data .................................................................................. 329

Generating Reports: An Overview...............................................................................331 Plant Reports Command ...........................................................................................333
Plant Reports Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 333 Generate a Report ........................................................................................................... 334

My Reports Command..............................................................................................335
My Reports Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 335

Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview............................................337
Tabular Format Report.................................................................................................... 338 Fixed Format Report ....................................................................................................... 340 Composite Format Report............................................................................................... 341 New Command ............................................................................................................... 343 Edit Command ................................................................................................................ 345 Delete Command ............................................................................................................ 350 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar............................................................................................ 351

Printing Drawings: An Overview .................................................................................361 Print Command.........................................................................................................363
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 363 Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 364 Print a Drawing ............................................................................................................... 365 Print a Selected Area....................................................................................................... 366 Set Print Options ............................................................................................................. 367 Change Printer Properties ............................................................................................... 368 Print to a File................................................................................................................... 368

Page Setup Command...............................................................................................369
Page Setup Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 369 Set up a Page Layout....................................................................................................... 370

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview ......................................371 Publishing to TEF: An Overview .............................................................................373
Publish Command........................................................................................................... 375 Find Documents to Publish Command ........................................................................... 379 Browser Command ......................................................................................................... 381

Retrieving from TEF: An Overview.........................................................................382
Retrieve Command ......................................................................................................... 385

Correlating Items: An Overview ..............................................................................387
Correlate Command ........................................................................................................ 387

Using the To Do List: An Overview.........................................................................390
To Do List Command ..................................................................................................... 391 Open the To Do List ....................................................................................................... 391

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 7

Table of Contents
To Do List Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 392

Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview ............................................406 Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists....................................................................407 Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID ...............................................................408 Setting Construction Status.......................................................................................409 Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation ........................................................410 Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID ...........................412 Using Filters Versus Levels......................................................................................413 Glossary ..........................................................................................................................414 Index................................................................................................................................436

8 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Customer Support and Documentation Comments

Customer Support and Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/services/support.asp. Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph.com.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 9

more efficient design with less iteration. automatic checks. all of which allow users to share data with third-party software. and standards compliance. The open architecture of SmartPlant P&ID permits integration with other systems. and drag-and-drop capabilities. to provide integration with existing data and other systems. expensive CAD engine for P&ID creation. As a data-centric. SmartPlant P&ID does not require a traditional. SmartPlant P&ID features a comprehensive. SmartPlant P&ID significantly cuts design and modification time and increases accuracy with its exclusive data-centric approach and use of design rules. Data is entered directly into the database. allowing faster. With quick access to supporting engineering data. rule-based solution for the P&ID life cycle. or equipment and line lists. SmartPlant P&ID helps users improve design quality. userdefinable rule-based system that assists the engineer during the design phase of the plant and subsequent life cycle phases. rules are executed. such as Intergraph PDS. Intergraph INtools. All data from the P&ID is stored in the plant database and adheres to plant standards. The strong data import and export facilities of SmartPlant P&ID allow users to populate the system with relevant plant data. and feedback is immediate. SmartPlant P&ID is vastly different from graphic-driven P&ID solutions of today. Inc.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID creates intelligent P&IDs by populating the database with relevant plant data. and Aspen Zyqad. The graphical representation of the P&ID is a view or a report of the data. SmartPlant P&ID incorporates the latest Microsoft technologies. The rule-based and automation capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID also differentiate it from other P&ID systems. such as process data from process simulation databases based on Aspen Zyqad from Aspen Technologies. Running on Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000. data consistency. This method provides valuable information throughout the plant life cycle. The design rule-base confirms data consistency and compliance with plant and engineering standards. You can then use this information in the SmartPlant P&ID Stockpile to design the P&ID. 10 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . such as OLE automation.

The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. and so forth. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Program Group SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide. SmartPlant P&ID provides the design environment for SmartPlant. Insulation Specification Manager allows you to create and modify lookup tables for insulation specifications and thicknesses. or the SmartPlant P&ID Upgrade Guide. heat tracing. such as specifying user permissions. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. Options Manager also defines paths to SmartPlant files and directories. designing plant hierarchies. unified data structure that represents the plant model. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 11 . For more information about SmartPlant Engineering Manager. SmartPlant has several programs and utilities for running and managing your plant data. gapping. Drawing Manager allows you to create and delete P&IDs and drawing versions and print multiple drawings.and project-specific commands. By manipulating model views. Options Manager defines plant-wide graphic standards for symbology. SmartPlant Engineering Manager performs higher-level data management tasks. and formats. Rule Manager defines rules for placement and property copying on placement. including all plant components and their relationships. Drawing Manager allows you to perform Workshare. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table.

Inconsistency Report . The report is available in the Engineering Data Editor by selecting View > Plant Reports. and so forth.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID What's New in SmartPlant P&ID? This version of SmartPlant P&ID contains the following new functionality and changes. The user's guides contain the same information as the online Help.A tabular report. provides a list of all inconsistencies. dialog boxes. On this page. Printable Guides Command Help > Printable Guides Opens a page in your default browser that includes links to the user's guides in portable document format.xls. You can print it if necessary.Functionality changes provide a variety of display options using the Fit command. Inconsistencies Report. SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID on the Web Activates your web browser and opens the SmartPlant P&ID World Wide Web page. • Fit Command . • SmartPlant P&ID Help Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Help Opens the Help viewer where you can read topics about commands. procedures. learning tools. 12 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click a link. you can access registration and support information. and the guide opens in the appropriate application. and other items to help you use SmartPlant P&ID more efficiently.

This documentation consists of a programmer's guide and reference guides for placement automation and the logical model. click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 13 . online forums. Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID On your desktop.Introducing SmartPlant P&ID SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Command Help > SmartPlant P&ID Web Forum Opens your web browser to the Intergraph Process & Power Client Community web page. On this page you can learn about international and regional conferences. including the version number and the copyright. structured product feedback. legal. Follow the instructions and links on this web page to find your information. informal networking. Note • Programming with SmartPlant P&ID is the method by which you can use the Automation layer to customize the software to meet your own particular requirements. and licensing notices. About SmartPlant P&ID Command Help > About SmartPlant P&ID Displays information about your copy of the software. and more.

Your system administrator defines customized properties and their defaults for each item in Data Dictionary Manager. You can navigate through the nodes in a catalog by clicking the + or – icons by the selected node. you can see the traditional diagram of a plant containing equipment. Related Topics Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. and organizing data. the Catalog Explorer. and the Properties window. The Engineering Data Editor allows you to see the same information in a tabular format. page 67 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. editing properties.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Software: An Overview The drawing interface is divided into four distinct parts: the Design window. instrumentation. with the same capabilities for modifying the display. Design Window The Design window displays Drawing views and the Engineering Data Editor. Catalog Explorer The Catalog Explorer displays all available catalog items for you to use in drawings and plant models. Engineering Data Editor The Engineering Data Editor is a modification of the stockpile display. view and modify the properties associated with that item in the Properties window. you can double-click nodes in the tree view to open them. This view is exactly the same tabular view that you can display in the Design window. Each part provides specific features that you need to create drawings in the software. Properties Window When you select an item in a plant model. you can enter. and piping in a graphical representation. The Catalog Explorer contains a hierarchical representation of the selected catalog. Each of these views provides a way for you to enter information for the plant model into the database. The two views also provide a way for you to view information in the database in different ways. page 264 • 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In addition. In the Drawing view. and it can also display items in the plant and drawing stockpiles. the Engineering Data Editor.

or Modeler. The title bar identifies the drawing name. You can open as many windows as needed to support a design. A tab scroll provides a way to view tabs hidden from display by the horizontal scroll bar. You create your drawing In the Drawing view. you can cascade or tile views to more easily navigate among them. too. By using commands on the Window menu. using vertical and horizontal scroll bars as well as Zoom and Pan commands to change the center point for the Drawing view. You can define one or more Engineering Data Editors for a drawing. The Design window. displays the model information for a design in a Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view. much like a Properties window. and so forth. Filter tabs provide a quick and easy way to choose what appears in the Drawing view. You can add new tabs for additional filters as needed. too. In the Engineering Data Editor. Each window has its own independent set of properties defining view range. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 15 . you can specify filters and layouts to define the table information and even edit some item properties. display properties.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Design Window: An Overview The Design window itself consists of several parts.

A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. page 53 • Open a New Drawing View. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). This view displays the common idea of a model: a diagram containing items such as equipment. By manipulating model views. piping. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. page 138 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data. Caution • The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. due to power outage. page 108 • 16 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. however. page 35 • Open an Existing Drawing. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database and displays a message: One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. including all plant components and their relationships. Occasionally. but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. for example. the software can end in an abnormal way. When you re-open the drawing. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. and instrumentation. • SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central. (B) Engineering Data Editor . As a result. unified data structure that represents the plant model.A graphical representation of the plant model. For more information about the data model.A tabular view that presents the plant data in a tabular format.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • (A) Drawing view . the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. see Using the Properties Glossary: An Overview Related Topics Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

the Show command allows you to choose to display drawing elements. page 33 Options Command Tools > Options Changes settings that control recently used files. labels. Display as printed . see Related Topics. the status bar.Sets the number of entries for the recently used files list on the File menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Command Available on the Drawing View Shortcut menu. placement information. such as notes. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Update links automatically at open . and so forth. you can set the number of recently used files that appear on the File menu. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Recently used files list . page 91 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. and so forth. page 273 Options Dialog Box Sets options for the current drawing. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. and recently used files. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 17 . Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options on the main menu bar.Displays the drawing as it appears when you print it. page 21 General Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for updating links in the drawing and displaying the drawing. screen appearance. grids. page 21 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. export formats. For more information about linking.Updates links automatically when a drawing is opened. For example. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. Opens the Options dialog box.

page 21 • Embed a New Object. When you point at the command button on the toolbar. and handle colors in the drawing.Displays the status bar at the bottom of the main window. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.Sets all the colors listed above to the default display value. prompts that explain what to do at each step of the command appear in the status bar. The connect points in the drawing appear in this color. too. Handles . page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Also. page 21 • Options Command.Sets the highlight color.Sets the color of handles when an item is selected. Selected items . (for example. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object.Sets the default background color for all Drawing views in the active drawing. the line weight and color) for item types throughout a plant structure. Background . Use Defaults . page 278 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) Allows you to select options for the background. Related Topics • Break a Link. Note • To set the symbology. and messages about the operations the software is performing appear in the status bar. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show status bar . page 283 • Change a Link.Sets the color of selected items. use Options Manager. page 17 18 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . selection. Highlight . the description appears in the status bar at the bottom of the window. highlight.

Existing. but this option allows you to change the default on a drawing-by-drawing basis. Place partner OPC in Stockpile . If you are not placing an item but only selecting drawing items. and tolerances for locating items and moving around in the drawing. you drag the valve. For example. is placed. the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box appears after you place a new OPC. and Future.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets the default construction status for the active drawing. page 204 • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Indicates that when a new off-page connector. to move a valve. a pipe run can be a candidate item. the locate tolerance defines how close that the pointer must approach in order to select the item. page 21 • Options Command. the construction status can be set for individual drawing items by changing its value in the Properties window. called the locate zone. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. the partner OPC is automatically stored in the Stockpile. If you keep the pointer within the break-away tolerance from the line. and a valve can be an approaching item to that pipe run. Default construction status . Locate . If you clear this option. at which a candidate item is highlighted when another item approaches. For example.Specifies the range. Also. The construction status for an item appears in the Properties window when the item is selected. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 19 .Assigns the selected construction status to all placed items. OPC. The Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options. Break-away . The pipe is highlighted when the valve is within the locate tolerance. you can indicate the drawing in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in that drawing. the valve does not disconnect from the line.Sets the number of pixels at which an item disconnects from its parent item. Using this dialog box. The plant administrator sets the plant-wide default at setup. A candidate item is any item in the drawing that meets the placement rules of the approaching item. This list contains the following options: New.

page 204 • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile. This tab is part of the Options dialog box. The specified ratio defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. the drawings associated with that node appear in the Drawing list area. This setting causes the reference file to appear temporarily in the lower left of the drawing and determines a drawing scale that fits the reference file within the drawing. also known as an inserted object.Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. 20 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC Dialog Box Opens after you place a connector on a drawing. page 206 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector. Choose a stockpile from this view to associate your partner connector with.Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio.Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. much like a catalog item during placement mode. the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object. Note • The Fit to Sheet option in the Select Scale list determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet but allows you to specify where the file is inserted by clicking on the drawing sheet. Select Scale .Imports a reference file. page 204 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Sets options for inserting objects in the drawing. Scale reference files . When you select a node.Sets a scale option for importing a drawing. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector. page 202 • Store a Partner Connector. Coincident (1:1) . These settings take effect in your next drawing session. The Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box allows you to select the drawing stockpile into which the partner of the new connector is placed. unless you have selected the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option on the Placement tab of the Options dialog box. Drawing list . The reference file is at the end of the pointer. ready to be placed in the drawing. Plant Hierarchy . page 204 • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. which opens when you click Tools > Options on the main menu bar. at full scale (1:1). For a 2:1 ratio.

the scale of the foreign drawing is one and one half times its original size. page 282 • Embed a New Object. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 21 . page 282 • Customize the Software With the Options Command.Sets the scale for a drawing that you insert. or personal.Displays the currently selected folder and the available folders in the active drive. page 278 Browse Dialog Box Allows you to select a directory that contains your reports.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Scale . page 20 3. Select a different drive in order to see directories that reside on that drive in the Look in box. page 19 Files Tab (Options Dialog Box). when you type 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes.Opens the Browse dialog box. Click Tools > Options. click the tab containing the information that you want to customize. page 17 Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box). Select options on the dialog box to make the appropriate changes. page 21 • Options Command. Open this dialog box by clicking Tools > Options > Files Tab > Browse. Drives . On the Options dialog box. page 21 • Edit an Embedded Object.Lists the drives that are currently active on your computer. report templates are stored. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 283 • Change a Link. My Reports . page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 17 Customize the Software With the Options Command 1. For example.Specifies the folder where your user-defined. Browse . • • • • General Tab (Options Dialog Box). 2. Look in . page 18 Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box). which allows you to select a local or network folder to store your user-defined reports and report templates.

page 22 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Previous Command View > Previous Restores the previous view. press Esc. and the software does not remember more than one view. if you zoom in and then click View > Previous. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 22 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For example. page 15 Zoom Area Command View > Zoom Area Enlarges the display of an area in the active window by allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the drawing. the view changes to the view present before you zoomed in. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. page 15 Save Settings Command View > Save Settings Stores all display filters for the active Drawing view. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. To refresh the window. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. page 37 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Notes • To stop the repainting of items in the window. This action is convenient for large drawings. press F5. Related Topics • Save the Settings for the Active View. page 15 Restore a Drawing View Click View > Previous.

On the main toolbar. page 15 Zoom In on the Drawing 1. 2. use the pointer to fence the area that you want to zoom in on. To quit the command. press F5. To stop the repainting of items in the window. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 23 . Click the view at the center of the area you want to zoom in on. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. page 15 Zoom In Command View > Zoom In Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in the active window. • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. click Zoom In: . press Esc. press Esc or right-click in the drawing. click View > Previous. click View > Previous. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. click Zoom Area: . The selection then fills the view. 2. To quit the command. On the main toolbar. To refresh the window. 3. This action is convenient for large drawings. press F5. This action is convenient for large drawings. right-click or press Esc. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. press Esc. On the Drawing view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom In on an Area 1. To refresh the window. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To stop the repainting of items in the window.

right-click or press Esc. To quit the command. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. 2. the command fits only the selected items in the active view. This action is convenient for large drawings. press Esc. click View > Previous. the command zooms to the selected item. To stop the repainting of items in the window. page 15 24 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 15 • Zoom Out from an Area. if any items are selected in the drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Zoom Out Command View > Zoom Out Reduces the display of items around a specified point in the active window. To refresh the window. Related Topics • Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View. However. If only one item is selected in the drawing. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. Notes • • To go back to the previous view. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. click Zoom Out . page 24 Zoom Out from an Area 1. Click the Drawing view at the center of the area you want to zoom out from. On the main toolbar. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. press F5. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 Fit Command View > Fit Fits all items in the active view if no items are currently selected.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Fit All Items in the Active Drawing View On the main toolbar. press Esc. page 15 Pan Command View > Pan Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific point in a drawing to see other areas of the drawing by dragging the pointer across the view. To quit the command. Notes • • • You can click and drag the hand pointer to pan the view. On the main toolbar. click Pan: . too. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. press Esc or right-click in the Drawing view. page 25 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. To stop the repainting of items in the window. To refresh the window. press F5. page 15 • Pan a Drawing View 1. click View > Previous. Click in the view that you want to pan. Click in the view again to define how far you want to pan. Related Topics Pan a Drawing View. This action is convenient for large drawings. 2. 3. • • Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. This command is available only when a Drawing view is active. click Fit . page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 25 . To go back to the previous view.

too.Lists the available toolbars. page 41 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. hiding.Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected. page 91 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. Toolbars . page 28 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Customize . page 66 • Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Command View > Display Allows you to specify the windows you want to see in your design session: • • • Catalog Explorer Properties Window Engineering Data Editor Related Topics • Display the Engineering Data Editor. You can select the box next to the toolbar that you want to display. 26 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . New . hide. Reset . page 28 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons. Toolbar Name . page 15 Toolbars Dialog Box Sets options for displaying. which allows you to create new toolbars and display or hide selected toolbars. or changing toolbars. or change. You can change toolbar color schemes and button sizes.Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize dialog box. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Toolbars on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar.Adds color to the toolbar buttons. page 85 Toolbars Command View > Toolbars Opens the Toolbars dialog box. Color Buttons .Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box. Clearing this option causes toolbar buttons to appear in black and white.

4.Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. 3. 6. Click View > Toolbars. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. On the Toolbars dialog box. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 27 . Show ToolTips . Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the new toolbar. click New.Type the name of the new toolbar in the box. page 28 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. type the name of the new toolbar. Open this dialog box from the main menu bar by clicking View > Toolbars > New. 7.Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses over one of them. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. Click OK. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 95 New Toolbar Dialog Box Creates a new toolbar. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. On the New Toolbar dialog box. 5. page 95 Create a New Toolbar 1. 2. Toolbar Name . Click Tools > Customize.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Large Buttons . On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. You cannot choose a name for your new toolbar that is already used for another toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.

Drag the command button from the Buttons area to the toolbar. click Tools > Customize. click the category that contains the command that you want to add. page 91 Restore a Customized Toolbar to Its Default Settings 1. Related Topics • Restore a Drawing View. These tabs logically organize the properties into sets that you can use for manipulating special view qualities. page 15 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The set of property tabs that are available in the View Properties dialog box depends on the active view. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add a Button to a Toolbar 1. page 91 Remove a Button From a Toolbar 1. drag the button that you want to remove from the toolbar into the Buttons area. select the toolbar that you want to restore. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. On the Toolbars tab. 2. 3. 2. Click the Reset button. On the Toolbars tab. you cannot reset it. On the main menu bar. Click View > Toolbars. 3. page 314 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 22 • Save the Settings for the Active View. In the Toolbars dialog box. Note • If you create a new toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. page 91 Properties Command View > Properties Displays the View Properties dialog box. 2. which lets you define and control settings for the active view. page 37 • Show Inconsistencies.

you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology. You can name the new filter appropriately. page 138 View Properties Dialog Box Controls the display of information in the Drawing view. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Properties on the main menu bar. Note • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor.Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. Width . Scroll down the list to choose a color. Properties .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Properties from the shortcut menu. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. Browse . In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. Filter .Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view. Scroll down the list to choose a line width. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Alternate symbology . Filter Name . This dialog box allows you to edit a filter for your drawing. Color . This information is read-only. • Related Topics Properties Command. which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view. page 28 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 29 .Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. then View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it.

including the name. Related Topics • Properties Command.Turns the display of notes on or off. select this box. When you select the check box.Turns on the display of the options selected on the Claims tab. Claims .Displays the type of view. Drawing borders . description.Allows you to enter a description of the Drawing view. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. 30 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Includes other options for the selection of items in your drawing.Turns the display of inconsistency indicators on or off. Description . Show . Select . notes. and inconsistency indicators. View type . Labels . the display toggles on for that item. Notes can contain links to a file. and readout category. in any view. grids.Toggles the display of the drawing border on or off. page 29 Display Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of items in a Drawing view. Notes . Do not show labels for filtered items . For example. for example. type. View name . Items that you can display include labels.Makes inserted foreign data non-locatable in a drawing.Allows you to name the Drawing view. Grids .Turns the grid display on or off.Navigating in the Software: An Overview General Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Displays miscellaneous information about a Drawing view. This information is read-only.Prevents the display of labels in filtered views of the design. if you insert a file using Edit > Insert Object and do not want to accidentally select that file in the drawing. a Microsoft Word file. then the Do not show labels options is not available since all labels are no longer displayed regardless of the view tab that you are using.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. Prevent selection of inserted objects . If the display of labels is turned off here. The inserted file appears gray in the drawing. drawing borders. Inconsistency indicators .Toggles the display of all labels on or off.

page 33 • Properties Command. Spacing . page 28 • Show Grid Command. page 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 31 . The choice of grid style affects the option that is available in the Spacing or Density box and the availability of the Index options.Turns the grid display and grid snapping on or off.Turns the grid display on or off. which is the number of minor grid lines. Density . For a dynamic grid display the number of index lines varies depending on the zoom level. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. the grid lines for a dynamic grid change with the level of magnification. This option is available only with the Static grid style. medium.Specifies the grid index.Allows you to specify the space between the grid lines when you choose the Static grid style from the Style list.Specifies either Static or Dynamic grid style. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. When you select this option.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • You can access the View Properties dialog box by right-clicking in space in your drawing and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu. When you zoom in or out. Grid lines are not printed. solid grid lines. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. too. Show grid . View . or coarse levels when you choose the Dynamic grid style from the Style list. You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it.Allows you to specify fine. Related Topics • Properties Command. page 28 • View Properties Dialog Box. Snap grid . Index .Turns the snap-to-grid feature on or off. and so you cannot change the Index list when using the Dynamic grid style. page 29 Grid Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of the grid in the view. Style .

Status . Open the View Properties dialog box by clicking View > Properties. 32 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . severity of five or above appear. Invalid claims . Warnings are marked with a . For example. which signify the suitability of design work that you perform while creating the drawing. Show . Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support shared claiming of database items. Again. you can specify the severity level and control the warnings that you see. The software verifies in real-time if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules defined in Rule Manager.Specifies the display of invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view. You can specify the severity level.Turns the display of approved warnings on or off. Approved warnings . page 314 Claims Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Sets options for the display of items in the Drawing view according to their claim states.Turns the display of warnings on or off. Related Topics • Properties Command.Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view. Claim .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Inconsistency Indicators Tab (View Properties Dialog Box) Controls the display of inconsistency indicators.Displays the possible claim states for all items except invalidly claimed items. then these display options override all other options designated in the Claim area of this dialog box. Errors above severity . page 28 • Show Inconsistencies. which appears when you click View > Properties. if you specify a severity level of five.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are not claimed at all. Errors are marked with a Warnings above severity .Turns the display of errors on or off. Not claimed . Invalidly claimed items are items which differ from the Plant items and which you cannot modify and check into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. Choose the indicators and severities that you want to view in your drawing. Approved warnings are marked with . If you specify a special display for invalidly claimed items in the Drawing view.Displays the possible claim states and combination of claim states for drawing items. all errors with . This tab is part of the View Properties dialog box.

Tip • Claiming items is governed by projects. you can choose special display colors for drawing items according to their claim status. see Related Topics. 7. On the Grid tab.Specifies the special display of drawing items to which this project has the sole claim. select the General tab. you can choose the Show grid or Snap grid option. and you can enter a view name and description. then these display options will have no effect in the Drawing view. 4. page 301 • Change the Properties of a Drawing View 1. On the View Properties dialog box. If your Plant is configured so that it honors only exclusive claiming. if needed. Notes. Warnings. 6. On the Display tab. and the properties of the grid. select the Prevent selection of inserted objects option if you want to prohibit the selection of linked or embedded objects in the drawing. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 33 . Claimed only by this project . Click View > Properties. 5. For more information about claiming items. Related Topics Claim a Drawing Item. 3. Grids. For errors and warnings. The View type box is read-only. Density. Widths . and Inconsistency indicators options. Colors . Filter labels. Drawing borders. page 292 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item.Allows you to select a color for items with the corresponding claim state. You can select any of the Labels. For example. Also on the Display tab. On the Claims tab. Shared claims . and options specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Drawing Manager. if you specify 5. page 302 • Release a Claim. select the items that you want to display in the view. errors with severity level of 5 or greater are displayed. you can select from any of the Errors.Specifies the special display of drawing items when the active project shares a claim on with another project or the Plant. and Index options. and Approved warnings options.Allows you to select a line width for items with the corresponding claim state. On the Inconsistency Indicator tab. 2.Specifies the special display of drawing items that are claimed solely by other projects or the Plant. in the Style. you can specify the severity level of the displayed inconsistencies.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claimed only by others . project status.

page 289 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • Related Topics Open a New Drawing View. This command copies the contents of the active Drawing view into a new window and displays the contents as graphical items. The same drawing data simply displays in the different views. You can change the view features for the new Drawing window using the commands on the View menu. page 34 New Drawing Window Command Window > New > Drawing Creates a new Drawing view within the active drawing. page 15 • 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Creating a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing does not create a new copy or version of the drawing. page 91 • New Command Window > New Allows you to open a new Drawing or Engineering Data Editor window within the Design window. the graphical Drawing view is opened on top of the Engineering Data Editor when you select Window > New > Drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • If the active view is the Engineering Data Editor. then clicking View > Properties opens the Table Properties dialog box. Related Topics • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu). page 35 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics Claiming Items: An Overview. page 35 • New Drawing Window Command. The new view has the same filters as the previous Drawing view. Notes • If only the Engineering Data Editor view of a drawing is open.

For more information. • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. When you open a new Drawing view (for example. For more information on the Windows Task Manager. Related Topics New Drawing Window Command. Select it and click End Task. see SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. and then open the Windows Task Manager.Navigating in the Software: An Overview New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu) Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Opens the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window and allows you to view and edit model data for a drawing in a tabular format. which you can access from the Help > Printable Guides command. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 35 . 2. and so forth.pid:3. and subsequent new Drawing views are Pipeline. In Task Manager search for an extra draft.exe process.pid:2. If the software gives indications that a drawing is in use when it is not.pid) the new view is named Pipeline. Pipeline. Pipeline.pid:1. Edit the drawing as needed. • Notes • • You can have as many Drawing views open for a drawing as needed. Tip A new Drawing view is not the same as a new drawing. see Microsoft Windows Help. You create new drawings in Drawing Manager. Click Window > New > Drawing. page 34 • Open a New Drawing View 1. quit all SmartPlant applications.

page 15 • Zoom In on an Area. page 23 • Zoom Out from an Area. page 23 • Zoom In on the Drawing. page 15 36 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Cascade Command Window > Cascade Overlaps windows diagonally across in the Design window. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 111 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on the list. page 15 Tile Vertically Command Window > Tile Vertically Arranges windows to fit vertically in the Design window. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. All the windows appear at an even distance from each other on the screen. Related Topics • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. page 24 Tile Horizontally Command Window > Tile Horizontally Arranges windows to fit horizontally in the Design window. page 15 Active Window List Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window menu.

page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 37 . Notes • • This command saves all display filters for the active Drawing view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save the Settings for the Active View Click View > Save Settings or right-click a tab at the bottom of the active view and select Save Settings. Your settings are automatically saved upon quitting the software. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

that exist in the database. The menu buttons are found here: • • • Stockpile Edit View Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to expose the available commands. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. The EDE Toolbar At the top of the EDE is the EDE toolbar. of the type chosen in the list. for instance. You can also filter the display by using the buttons that correspond to different stockpiles and drawings: • • • • Active Drawing Active Drawing Stockpile Stockpile Other Drawings By default. Use Edit View to display the Table Properties dialog box. You can use the Display Settings command.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display the query results for the database. The EDE is automatically displayed in the lower left of the main window. 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Finally a summary box displays a comparison between the number of items in the view and the total number of items. If you want to list all items select Plant Item from the list. Customizing the EDE Commands on the Edit menu allow you to customize the display of the EDE further. to color code items according to the stockpile that they are currently in. which allows you to define the items that you want to see in the EDE. The list on the toolbar contains filters that query the database and display the corresponding items in the EDE. You can re-query and thereby refresh the EDE display by clicking the Refresh button . initially only the Active Drawing and Active Drawing Stockpile buttons are selected. and you can also open the EDE to appear in the Design window.

If your database query results in more than this number. you cannot edit that cell. too. Related Topics Display the Engineering Data Editor. Then you can view the properties in the Properties window and edit item properties there. • Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. If the cell is populated by a readonly property or a property that is only automatically generated by validation. page 38 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 39 . The contents of cells can be copied to other cells. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. click Related Topics. the Query Results dialog box opens. You can then choose to refine your query in order to generate fewer items or to enter report-only mode and run a report on your query results.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Editing Properties in the EDE You can edit some of the properties viewed in the table by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. page 41 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 54 • Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview. page 263 Engineering Data Editor Command View > Display > Engineering Data Editor Turns on or off the display of the Engineering Data Editor. For more information. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. If the property has a select list associated with it.537. if the cell contents are compatible. then you choose the value from the select list. Notes • The maximum number of items that can be displayed in the EDE is 65. The EDE is where you view items in the Stockpile or in a drawing stockpile. You can select a entire row by clicking the corresponding icon in the left-most column of the table.

Options .Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. for example. and so forth.Allows you to choose between refining your query or entering report-only mode. and Plant Reports.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Match any . Instrument Loop Item Tag. Save view. and a value. Examples of properties include Equipment Type.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Displays all new criteria to add to the current filter. This option is useful when creating a report for large data sets such as an entire plant database. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Query Results Dialog Box Displays options for continuing your work in the Engineering Data Editor when you have requested more information than can appear in the interface. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Continue with this query so that I can generate a plant or personal report Causes the Engineering Data Editor to enable only these commands: Edit view. Add . Relationships include. Maximum Allowed . <>.Allows you to use the Additional Filter Criteria list in this dialog box to refine your query in order to display an allowed number of items in the view. Property . Operator .Displays the currently allowed number of items in the Engineering Data Editor. Additional Filter Criteria .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Edit . =. My Reports. Match all .Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. You can either refine your query or run a report with your query results. equal to. an operator. 40 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . not equal to. Match any is the default matching method. Delete . you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.Displays the number of items that your query returned. To add to or modify the definition list. Rows Returned . Delete view. and Estimated Length. greater than.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. >. Refine Query Definition .Specifies the relationship between the property and its value.

*. page 59 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. as a wildcard character for a single character. or choose null. Tip • To close the Engineering Data Editor. in the Value box. %. Click the down-arrow next to the Stockpile menu to display the available commands. page 154 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor again. which can be free text. you must type a value. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. page 15 • Stockpile Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile Contains commands for moving and deleting items. page 38 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Value . page 251 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 41 . page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model. Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. or type a question mark. You can type a percent sign. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Do not use an asterisk. page 58 Display the Engineering Data Editor Click View > Display > Engineering Data Editor. page 265 • Place Multiple Representations. ?. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box.

The Move to Different Stockpile dialog box opens. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. page 251 Move to Different Stockpile Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Move to Different Stockpile Allows you to move a stockpile item from one stockpile to another. page 245 • Remove an Item from the Model. Multiple representations are available only for some types of equipment.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Place Multiple Representation Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Place Multiple Representation Allows you to place a second instance of an equipment item in a second drawing. For instance. page 38 42 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 154 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. You can even move items from one drawing stockpile to another. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. page 152 Delete Stockpile Item Command Engineering Data Editor > Stockpile > Delete Stockpile Item Removes the stockpile item from the plant model completely. This multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. you can move an item from the Stockpile into the stockpile for your active drawing if you know the item belongs in that drawing but are not yet ready to place the item. That is the item and its properties are deleted from the database and can no longer be placed in a drawing. page 265 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Similarly you can move an item in the Drawing Stockpile to the Stockpile so that it can be used in other drawings. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. regardless of symbol settings in Options Manager or Catalog Manager. page 38 • Place Multiple Representations.

page 44 • Select an Item. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 43 . page 43 • Paste Command. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Click the down-arrow next to the Edit menu button to display the available commands. Values placed on the Clipboard remain there until newer values are copied over them. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > Edit Allows you to copy and paste values from one cell to another cell in the Engineering Data Editor and to select all the items in the view in order to create a select set. page 43 • Review and Edit Item Properties. You can also release a claim at any time and you can determine the validity of a claim. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. You must have previously placed a value on the Clipboard in order to paste it. then the Paste command is not available. page 147 Copy Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Copy Places the value in the currently selected cell onto the Clipboard so that you can paste it somewhere else. page 87 Paste Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Paste Places the value from the Clipboard into the selected cell. page 289 • Copy Command. If the cell is read-only. This command does not remove the value from the selected table cell. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 87 • Select All Command. You can also invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project.

page 289 • Release a Claim. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. page 301 44 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics Modifying Item Properties: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Select All Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Select All Chooses all the items in the active Engineering Data Editor. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. page 144 • Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. You can create a select set using this command. The Claim dialog box opens. page 258 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 289 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. page 87 • Select an Item. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview.

page 61 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 45 . page 58 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. page 54 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Click the down-arrow next to the menu button to display the commands. and so forth. page 302 View Menu: An Overview Engineering Data Editor > View Displays the commands that help you customize and manipulate the layout and content of the Engineering Data Editor. release the claims to items. page 64 • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. page 56 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. page 57 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.

If you click Advanced on this dialog box. see Default Table Layouts. page 53 • Edit View Command. Filter . page 50. Advanced . Item type .Lists all the item types that you can select (for example. Brief and bulk properties appear in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. Copy Bulk Properties. where you can define and save filters or layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Edit View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Edit View Opens the Table Properties dialog box. too. For a list of default layouts.Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type. page 38 Table Properties Dialog Box Enables you to select the item types.Displays the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Layout . Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items are displayed. page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 46 • 46 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Specify brief and bulk properties in this dialog box. and you can further modify the layout and create custom filters for your Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View.Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type. filters. equipment or motors). and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. This dialog box appears when you right-click an existing table and select Edit View. the Advanced Table Properties dialog box opens. where you can access options to specify the tabular display. page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. You can specify the default filter and layout for a certain item type also.

Name .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Add . Examples of properties include revision number and name. and a value. remove. select. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 47 . You can change a filter to the default by selecting this box. Property . Delete . select.Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type selected on the Table Properties dialog box. This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Browse . Edit .Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Default . Base filter . as it is defined in Filter Manager. Match any .Opens the Select Filter dialog box. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. page 53 • Edit View Command. Match all . page 52 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. Definition . page 46 Filter Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Allows you to define. an operator. Match any is the default matching method.Displays the name of a saved filter. and save filters and layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. or edit filter criteria.Displays options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. and save a filter for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor.Displays the name of the filter.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. which allows you to select a base filter. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box.Includes areas to add.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box Allows you to define.

you must type a value. Layout names must be unique.Removes the named layout.Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item type on the Table Properties dialog box. Or. page 52 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Brief. For more information about saving views. >. Save . as a wildcard character for a single character.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. you can select any of the layouts in the list. ?. Bulk. Relationships include.Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout. greater than. Delete (Name) . equal to. Related Topics • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. and so forth. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. You can designate a layout as the default by checking this box and then clicking Save. in the Value box. and Brief/Bulk. not equal to.Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window. Copy Bulk Properties. %. or type a question mark. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters.Displays the name of a saved layout. In order for your choice in the Usage box to take effect. You can enter a new layout name and then click Save to save the layout for re-use. Value . page 54 Layout Tab (Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box) Define. page 51 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. for example. <>. The selected item type and display properties define what appears in the Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View 48 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you must exit and reenter the design software. and save a layout for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. =. Default . You can type a percent sign. *. Options include a blank value. Note • Saving a layout is not the same as saving a view in the Engineering Data Editor. Do not use an asterisk. or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. which can be free text. or choose null.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Operator . Name . select. Usage .

page 54 • New > Engineering Data Editor Command (Window Menu).Navigating in the Software: An Overview Definition . the Edit group allows you to edit the property. Type . and its type. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view. Sort Property .Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. You select one. Up . page 47 • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor.Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data Editor. This group contains two list views.Places a new entry above the currently selected entry and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. the Edit group allows you to edit the property and the caption.Removes the currently selected entry.Moves the currently selected entry down one line. Related Topics • Advanced Table Properties Dialog Box. Down .Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or Sort Property list views. you can specify the property. Property . Moving a row down either moves a display column to the right or moves a sort order down.Lists the columns that appear in the Engineering Data Editor. order and type. To edit an entry. page 35 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 49 . select it and modify the property in the Edit group. Order . depending on the row you have selected. Moving a row up either moves a display column to the left or moves a sort order up. Caption (Edit) . Add . Caption (Definition) .Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the Table Properties dialog box. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. In order to add to or modify either list.Lists the sort types Numeric and Alphanumeric. Delete (Definition) .Lists the sort orders Ascending and Descending.Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. If you select an entry in the Sort Property view. you can specify the property and its caption. Insert . Edit .Moves the currently selected entry up one line. The buttons to the right act upon the active list view. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. depending on the row you have selected. If you select an entry in the Display Property view. its order.Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in the Table Properties dialog box. You can select one. page 53 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. Display Property .Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout.

Navigating in the Software: An Overview Default Table Layouts The software includes several default layouts. You can use them to base your own layouts on by changing the layout name. SmartPlant Electrical • • • • • • • • • • • • Default Battery Bank List Default Bus List Default Cable List Default Circuit List Default Circuit Breaker List Default Control Stations List Default Document List Default Generator List Default Load List Motor List Default PDB List Default Reference Cable List Area Break Drawing Equipment Equipment Component Exchanger Mechanical Equipment Other Vessel Instrument Instrument Loop Item Note Nozzle OPC Package SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 50 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Different layouts are included with SmartPlant Electrical and SmartPlant P&ID. and saving under a new name. adding or deleting properties.

3. Notes • If you do not find a filter that you want under Filter.Navigating in the Software: An Overview • • • • • • • • Pipe Run Piping Component Plant Item Plant Item Group Other Representation Safety Class Signal Run System Related Topics • Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. select an item type from the Item Type list. Select a filter from the Filter list. right-click the table and select Edit View. On the Table Properties dialog box. Click Window > New > Table. 2. 4. you can define a filter on the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. If you do not find a layout that you want under Layout. The Table Properties dialog box opens. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. To modify an existing table. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 51 . Select a layout from the Layout list. you can define a layout on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Open the Advanced Table Properties dialog box by clicking Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. page 53 Define a New Engineering Data Editor View 1.

• 4. Click OK on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box and again on the Table Properties dialog box so that the software can populate your table.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View 1. 5. Tip The Property list displays properties that apply to your item type. you can save that definition: Save an Engineering Data Editor View. specify a name for the filter in the Base filter box. Click Delete if you want to delete the current row in the Definition box. 9. 2. repeat steps 4 and 5. 3. Tip • After you have defined a specific filter for your Engineering Data Editor. 8. page 56 52 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . To add more entries. Select a property. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. You can click Add to add another line to the Definition box. Click either Match all or Match any. and value in the Edit group. On the Filter tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Tip You can open the Table Properties dialog box by right-clicking the Engineering Data Editor and choosing Edit View from the shortcut menu. such as greater than and not equal to. if necessary. Click Browse if you want to search for a filter or create a new filter (either simple or compound) using the Select Filter dialog box. populate the Definition box with properties and values. 6. • 7. • Tip Check Default if you want this filter to be the default for the item type that you selected on the Table Properties dialog box. operator. the Value list displays the specific properties that you can filter for. the Operator list displays all the possible relationships. To further define a filter.

5. To add and define more sort properties. click Add to add an entry. order. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager environment. click Delete if you want to delete the layout. and type in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. Click Add to add a blank line to the Display Property list. To add and define more display properties. select a row in the Display Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. Tip You can right-click an existing Engineering Data Editor and select Edit View to open the Table Properties dialog box. you lose that information. page 91 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. repeat step 5. 6.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. page 38 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor 1. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 53 . populate the Definition box with display and sort properties. Tip • To change the sort order of the properties in the Engineering Data Editor. • 8. which you specify on the Table Properties dialog box. specify a name for the layout. repeat step 7. In the Sort Property list. 7. To further define a layout. 3. However. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • 4. Tip To change the display order of the columns in the Engineering Data Editor. Then select the property. Project Filters should not be created at a satellite site because when you synchronize reference data. Click Save if you want to save the layout in order to apply it to another Engineering Data Editor. • Tip Select Default if you want this layout to be the default table layout for the item type. select a row in the Sort Property box and click Move Up or Move Down. and then specify the property and caption in the Edit group at the bottom of the dialog box. 2. On the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box.

If you want to customize a filter or layout click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box. Move Up. layout and all. Review and edit the item type. page 56 • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. you can save it if you want to apply it to another view of the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Important • The Add. page 52 Define a New Layout for the Engineering Data Editor. filter. Click OK to display the modified view. To save the view layout. specify a name in the Name box and click Save on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. click the View menu and select Edit View. For more information. If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. In the Engineering Data Editor. Notes • After defining a layout. page 38 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Delete. You can also name and save the entire Engineering Data Editor. and layout on the Table Properties dialog box. see Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. page 38 Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View 1. and Move Down buttons apply to the active list view. which can be either Display Property or Sort Property. you should not store custom layouts for the Engineering Data Editor because when you synchronize reference data. Insert. page 53 4. For more information. see Save an Engineering Data Editor View. • Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. 2. you lose that information. 3.

page 56 Save View Dialog Box Allows you to specify a name for your custom Engineering Data Editor. is displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar with other saved views. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Save View in the EDE. page 38 • Save an Engineering Data Editor View. Name . Related Topics • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 55 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 55 . page 56 • Save View Command. page 54 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. This name.Provides space for you to type in the name of your custom view. which applies to the currently active EDE.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Save View Opens the Save View dialog box. which allows you to name and save the current Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Save an Engineering Data Editor View.

see Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. That is. After you customize the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). filter. For more information.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Save an Engineering Data Editor View 1. page 38 56 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and this action applies to any EDE that refers to those table properties. Tip • You can reactivate your saved view any time from the bottom of the filter list on the EDE toolbar. you can change a layout that applies not only to a standard view but also to a saved view. and layout. There are several ways to customize your EDE: Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. too. page 57. click View > Save View on the EDE toolbar. Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. You can change filters and layouts by using the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Notes • An EDE view is a combination of item type. Enter a name for your view in the Name box. and the new layout is reflected in both views of the EDE. page 64 • • • The EDE is where you can display stockpile items. You can delete a saved view. 2. page 54 Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.

Choose one and click OK to delete that view. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. It no longer appears in the filter list in the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Related Topics • Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View. • Note • The Engineering Data Editor is where stockpile items can be displayed. page 38 Delete View Dialog Box Lets you choose a saved custom Engineering Data Editor and delete it. page 57 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 57 Delete a Saved Engineering Data Editor View 1.Lists the saved views.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete View Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Delete View Allows you to delete a view if you have stored a custom Engineering Data Editor view. and you can choose the view that you want to delete from a list of saved views. page 57 • Delete View Command. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Delete View in the EDE. 2. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 57 . Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. These custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineer Data Editor toolbar under Saved Views. Tip Saved views are displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Select the view that you want to delete from the Name list in the Delete View dialog box. Name . page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Delete View dialog box opens. Click View > Delete View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar.

Related Topics Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Refresh Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Refresh Updates the display in the Engineering Data Editor. This command queries the database and builds a new view with new results. The Engineering Data Editor is not updated automatically: you must update it by using the Refresh command manually. The database can change all the time. page 58 • Update the Engineering Data Editor Click Refresh Note • on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 38 • Update the Engineering Data Editor. page 38 58 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.

page 51 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. for instance. Related Topics Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview You can change the content and layout of the Engineering Data Editor rather extensively. if necessary. Once you have defined and edited a view. page 54 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. You can clarify the cells that are read-only and the cells that allow you to enter new property information or modify existing information. By specifying the display settings. too. and you can create unique layouts with exactly the properties that you want to see. you can save it and also delete it later. page 61 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 59 . in exactly the order that you want to see them. page 64 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. You can control the scrolling of the Engineering Data Editor with the Freeze Panes command. you can define the font that Stockpile items appear in. You can create your own filters to narrowly define the contents of the view. Several methods to customize the look of the Engineering Data Editor exist. By using the AutoFilter feature. you can quickly limit the number of items that are displayed in the Engineering Data Editor.

arrows appear at the top of each column. is greater than. Select this command again to deactivate it. page 61 Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box Sets options for the behavior of the AutoFilter as it controls the display of items in the Engineering Data Editor. begins with.Allows you to add another comparison in the Boolean sense of or: this means any one of the criteria must be met. page 60 • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. For instance. Or . and so forth. you need to use the Edit View command and enter options on the Table Properties dialog box and the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Related Topics AutoFilter Command. To create more elaborate filters and displays. equals.Lists the available values currently stored in the column. does not equal. And . page 38 • Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. Comparison operator .Navigating in the Software: An Overview AutoFilter Command Engineering Data Editor > View > AutoFilter Allows you to filter the items displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. The Boolean or is less restrictive than the and. When you click AutoFilter. Click the arrow at the top of the column that contains the data that you want to filter on and choose the value from the list that appears. but you want to see only vertical drums. if the Engineering Data Editor displays Equipment: Vessels. use the AutoFilter command (click the arrow at the top of the Eq Subclass column and choose vertical drums).Lists the available comparisons: for example. Value .Allows you to add another comparison using the Boolean operator sense of and: this means all criteria must be met. Open this dialog box by clicking View > AutoFilter > Custom in the EDE. page 64 • 60 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Turn AutoFilter on by clicking View > AutoFilter on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. You can choose Blanks or NonBlanks from the list in order to display items that either have no value in the column or do have a value in the column. enter the operator and value that you want. choose that criterion from the list that is displayed. enter the operator and value that you want. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 38 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 61 . In the second comparison operator and value boxes. Do one of the following: • • To match one criterion. The Custom AutoFilter dialog box opens. To display rows that meet either one condition or another condition. Click the down-arrow at the top of the column you want to filter values for. To display rows that meet two conditions. 2. respectively. Enter the comparison operator and value that you want. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor 1. In the second comparison operator and value boxes. choose Custom from the list. enter the comparison operator and value that you want. • • • Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. Tip Click View > AutoFilter again to turn the AutoFilter feature off. and then click the Or button on the Custom AutoFilter dialog box. and then click the And button.

page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Freeze Panes Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Freeze Panes Allows you to scroll through the Engineering Data Editor while keeping the display of specified rows and columns constant. and you can specify the font that items in the Stockpile are listed in. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 64 • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. which allows you to specify various display options for the Engineering Data Editor. but you want to always see the item tag as you scroll to the right end of the rows to view the supplier. the first column can contain the item tag. You can accomplish this layout by using the Freeze Panes command. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor. page 38 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 38 Display Settings Command Engineering Data Editor > View > Display Settings Opens the Display Settings dialog box. For example. you can choose the size of icon that is displayed in the view. You can choose that read-only cells are filled with a special background color. For instance.

Sets the font for the items selected from the Item list.Causes the font to be bold for items selected from the Item list.Allows you to choose a background color for read-only table cells. or Other Drawings. . Item . these settings apply to item properties. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Display Settings in the EDE.Contains settings that apply to columns in the view. that is.Contains settings that apply to rows in the view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Settings Dialog Box Sets options for the display of icons and rows and columns in the Engineering Data Editor. page 62 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 63 . You can subsequently select another option from the Item list and define fonts and colors for those items and so on until you have specified the appearance for all locations in the Item list. page 64 • Display Settings Command. When you select one of these options. Stockpile.Lists the different locations of items: Active Drawing. Read-only properties . Italic Bold . these settings apply to individual items. Icon size in table . . Row . Font .Causes the font to be italicized for items selected from the Item list. Related Topics • Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor.Causes small icons to appear in the view. Column . Read/write properties . Small . Large .Allows you to choose a background color for the table cells that you can edit in the Engineering Data Editor.Allows you to specify large or small icons for the display in the far left column of the view.Allows you to specify either the font or background color. respectively. Active Drawing Stockpile. the remaining options in the Row area then pertain to that location.Causes large icons to appear in the view. that is. depending on Color whether you are specifying this property in the Row area or the Column area.

Click View > Display Settings on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 61 You can use the Freeze Panes feature. click the cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear. To do so. and the specify font. style. To freeze the left vertical pane. • 5. Click View > Freeze Panes on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. select the row below where you want the split to appear. see Use AutoFilter in the Engineering Data Editor. For more information. 2. To freeze both the upper and left panes. select the column to the right of where you want the split to appear. To freeze the top horizontal pane. And by clicking View > Edit View on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. 4. page 59 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. and color that you want these items to be displayed in. Choose an item type in the Item list. page 54 • • Related Topics • Customizing the Display of the Engineering Data Editor: An Overview. Tip You can specify this display information for each of the four types of items in the Item list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Display of the Engineering Data Editor 1. choose large or small icons. 2. you can totally redefine the content and layout of your Engineering Data Editor. follow these steps: 1. if you want. Specify a special background color for read-only properties. For more information. too. Notes • You can also customize the Engineering Data Editor by using the AutoFilter feature. On the Display Settings dialog box. too. page 38 64 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 3. Specify a special background color for read/write properties. see Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View.

you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close the nodes to see the contents. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. You also use the List view to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections. page 66 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. In the Tree view. page 75 • Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. you see the contents of the opened node.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview Catalog Explorer is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. page 72 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. you can search for items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections. Related Topics Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off. Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the tree and list views to suit your work session. You can browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks for important categories. You can create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts to places throughout the catalog. page 66 • Rename a Catalog Node. Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. the Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a plant. In the List view. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the tree view. Conceptually. page 65 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 65 . page 66 Catalog Explorer Command View > Display > Catalog Explorer Turns the display of Catalog Explorer on or off. page 80 • Create a Custom Catalog.

Select and place the item in the appropriate place in the drawing. Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. 4. 2. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. you can use the Configuration tool. they disappear from the stockpile. Place a One-Point Label. click the symbol that you want to place. 3. Or. you can drag the required item from Catalog Explorer into the Drawing view. page 65 Place an Item from Catalog Explorer 1. Tips • You can also right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Catalog from the shortcut menu. whereas. depending on the label. Click View > Display > Catalog Explorer. • Notes • The procedure for placing items from the Catalog Explorer list view is similar to that of placing items from a stockpile. page 186 Place a Two-Point Label. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. However. Tip Or. 2. In the Catalog Explorer list view. click View > Toolbars and select Catalog. when you place items from the stockpile. and then selecting Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. items placed from the Catalog Explorer list view remain in that view. to select the appropriate placement for the item. page 188 • • • 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Use Catalog Explorer to view the symbol catalog and its contents and manipulate catalog items. or PickQuick. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Click Esc to quit placement mode. You can place labels with one-point placement or two-point placement. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by clicking the item. Find the catalog node in the Tree view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Turn the Display of Catalog Explorer On or Off 1.

see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. Items remain in the stockpile until you place them in a drawing or delete them from the stockpile. page 265. page 184 • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. click "+" by the node containing the appropriate symbol library. From the shortcut menu. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 67 . Select the appropriate node in the symbol library in order to display catalog symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view. Tip Or you can double-click a node name in the Catalog Explorer tree view to expand the node. Notes • You can import a spreadsheet in a recognized format into a stockpile to populate it. page 238 • One-Point Label Placement. choose either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. too. For more information.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. page 65 Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer 1. • 3. 2. page 14 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. depending on the stockpile that you want to place the item in. For more information. page 267. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. page 146 • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. right-click the symbol that you want to add to the stockpile. • • Related Topics • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. page 150 • Two-Point Label Placement. 4. see Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. page 187 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. In the Catalog Explorer list view.

page 75 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. page 76 • Rename a Catalog Node.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Close the Catalog Explorer Window Right-click the main toolbar area. page 70 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Catalog Menu: An Overview Catalog Explorer > Catalog The Catalog menu in Catalog Explorer provides access to commands that allow you to manipulate list view items and tree view nodes in the Catalog Explorer. page 70 Find Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Find Displays the Find dialog box. The Find dialog box allows you to search the catalog for a specific item or group of items. Also. Tips • Or use the menu command Close when you right-click in the tree view of Catalog Explorer. page 65 68 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can search for catalog items. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. Note • The list of commands that are available on the Catalog menu depends on whether the Tree view or the List view is active. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. page 82 • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 68 • Rename a Catalog Item. Or toggle the display of Catalog Explorer back off by clicking the icon on the main toolbar: • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 82 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. and cancel the selection of the Catalog Explorer option.

Look In . You can drag catalog items from this area into a My Catalog set of items in the Catalog Explorer tree view. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Find in the Catalog Explorer.Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library. New Search .Specifies the class of item for which you want to search. "?". "%". Class .Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search.Enter the location from which you want to view symbol information. page 70 Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box Opens when you click Browse on the Catalog Explorer Find dialog box. allowing you to search any network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library to display in the Look In box. as a wildcard character for a single character. Look in . You can type an asterisk. You can type a percent sign. or type a question mark. Browse . or type a question mark. "?". page 70 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 69 . page 69 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer. Named . "*". as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. Related Topics Find Command. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. page 68 • Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer.Opens the Explore Elsewhere dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box Allows you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined search criteria. or select a drive from this list and use the tree that is displayed below to find the location you want.Ends the current search.Lists the items that met the defined search criteria. Find Now .Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search.Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library that you want to search. Related Topics • Explore Elsewhere Dialog Box. Stop . as a wildcard character for a single character. Results List .

• . 3. Click Find Now to start the search with the defined criteria. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the File menu button accesses a list of the associated commands. but you cannot place an item directly onto a design from this results window. On the Catalog Explorer Catalog menu Tip The Tree view must be the active view in Catalog Explorer for the Find command to be available on the File menu. page 82 • Delete a Catalog Item. 2. Related Topics Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. as a wildcard in either the Named or Class options to broaden the scope of your search. Clicking the File menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the File menu. *. page 69 • Catalog Menu: An Overview. Tip You can use the asterisk. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. You can select one or more items by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. • Note • Items found by the search appear at the bottom of the Find dialog box. you can save the set of current search results to use later by dragging them into a My Catalog folder or subfolder in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. page 74 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. On the Find dialog box. fill in the Name & Class options. page 65 • 70 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . click Find. Related Topics • Catalog Explorer Find Dialog Box. However.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Search for an Item in Catalog Explorer 1. page 68 New Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > New Creates a new item or adds a node under the selected node in the Catalog Explorer.

For example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Designing Symbol Toolbars Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most frequently. You create plant-level toolbars in Catalog Manager. open the My Catalog node. instrumentation. right-click the tree view and click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. to create symbol toolbars. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Right-click the Toolbars node under My Catalog. When you add all the new symbols you want to the new toolbar. or piping symbols. Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar in the tree view. In the Catalog Explorer tree view. find symbols you want to place on your new symbol toolbar. • • Related Topics • Designing Symbol Toolbars. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main window. your symbol toolbars can streamline your work considerably. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. for example. Symbol toolbars can be plant-level or user-level. Plant-level symbol toolbars are created in Catalog Explorer. 7. you create user-level toolbars in either Catalog Manager or SmartPlant P&ID. and under Vessels you can create Vertical and Horizontal. Notes • • You can dock the symbols toolbars on any side of the main window. With the most often used equipment. 2. You must have the proper permissions. you can create a Vessels node under Toolbars. 4. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 71 . Name the new toolbar. Tip • The new toolbar appears on the left side of the window. 5. keeping them conveniently located for easy access. 6. page 71 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar 1. whereas. A divider appears in the symbol toolbar between levels. 3. Click New on the shortcut menu. You can define up to two levels of toolbars. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars.

select it in the tree view and right-click. which opens when you click Find on the Catalog Explorer File menu. On the shortcut menu. 3. Type a name for the category. Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. • 5. 7. Select the items that you want to add to the custom catalog from the list view. You can drag selected items to a custom catalog from the Find dialog box. click Rename. Type a new name for the node. From the shortcut menu. page 68 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . New Category is selected so that you can rename it. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. other users cannot view the symbols when they open that drawing on another workstation. Right-click the tree view. Navigate through the tree view to display in the list view a group of items that you want to add to the custom catalog. Use the My Catalog folder only for shortcuts to symbols in the plant catalog. click New. page 65 Open Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Open Opens the Catalog Explorer window. Notes • To rename a node.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Create a Custom Catalog 1. Click the My Catalog node in the Catalog Explorer tree view. 6. • Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. If the symbols reside on your computer. 2. 4. Tip The software adds a subcategory called New Category to the My Catalog node. Caution • Do not move symbols to the My Catalog folder on your computer using Windows Explorer. Drag the selected items from the list view to the appropriate category or subcategory of the My Catalog portion of the tree view.

page 73 Clone a Catalog Item 1. The software places a copy of the selected item in the List view.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clone Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Clone Creates a copy of the selected catalog item. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. you may or may not be able to clone items from certain catalogs. 2. click Clone. When you create a new symbol. the software copies all of the graphics and associated properties for the original symbol to the new. You can then modify the properties of the cloned symbol. When you clone an existing symbol. Related Topics • Clone Command. Note • Cloning symbols differs from creating new symbols. you must define all of the graphics and properties for the new symbol. page 73 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 73 . Click the item you want to copy in the Catalog Explorer List view. cloned symbol. On Catalog Explorer File menu. Related Topics • Clone a Catalog Item.

• Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Note • You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that reside under a node before you can delete the node itself. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. page 75 • Delete a Catalog Node. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. you are able to delete nodes in certain catalogs. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected node. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Delete Removes the selected item from the Catalog Explorer list view or catalog node from the tree view. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. Click the custom catalog node that you want to delete in the Catalog Explorer Tree view. On the File menu . 2. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. click Delete. you are able to delete items from certain catalogs. Related Topics • Delete a Catalog Item. page 74 Delete a Catalog Node 1. page 65 74 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You must first delete all sub-nodes and catalog items that populate a node before you can delete the node itself.

page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Click the custom catalog node that you want to rename in the Catalog Explorer tree view. See your system administrator for information regarding your current privileges. 2. click the custom catalog item that you want to delete. click Delete. page 65 Rename a Catalog Node 1. page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 75 . which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. On the File menu .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete a Catalog Item 1. 2. Click OK on the confirmation box to delete the selected item. On the File menu . Important • Depending on your editing privileges. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. 3. Important • Depending on your editing permissions. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Type the new name for the custom catalog node. page 65 Rename Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Rename Allows you to type a new name for the item or node. 3. Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. In the Catalog Explorer List view. you can rename nodes in certain catalogs. click Rename. you can delete items from certain catalog.

page 65 • Close Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Close Closes the Catalog Explorer window. page 71 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. 2. Related Topics • Catalog Menu: An Overview. On the shortcut menu. 2. page 68 76 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any modifications to a toolbar. which are specified in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. click Rename. 3. page 65 Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Refresh Symbol Toolbar Activates plant. Related Topics • Activate Symbol Toolbars. In the Catalog Explorer list view. Right-click in the Catalog Explorer tree view. See your system administrator for information regarding your current editing privileges. Important • Depending on your editing privileges. page 68 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 76 • Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. On the File menu . Related Topics • Close the Catalog Explorer Window. click the custom catalog item that you want to rename.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Rename a Catalog Item 1. Related Topics Designing Symbol Toolbars. page 71 Activate Symbol Toolbars 1. click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. you can rename items in Catalog Explorer. Enter the new name for the catalog item. page 71 • Designing Symbol Toolbars.

Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 213 Send to Drawing Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Drawing Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Active Drawing Stockpile. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Send to Stockpile Command Catalog Explorer > Catalog > Send to Stockpile Sends the catalog item selected in the list view to the Stockpile. This command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing. page 78 Large Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Large Icons Displays larger icons and names horizontally in the list view and does not list details. page 178 • Place a Package. page 178 • Place a Package. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. page 213 View Menu Catalog Explorer > View The Catalog Explorer View menu provides commands that allow you to control the display format of catalog items within the Catalog Explorer list view. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 77 .

page 65 • View Menu. In Catalog Explorer click the down-arrow on the View menu 2. • • • Related Topics • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View 1. Large Icons . page 78 Details Command Catalog Explorer > View > Details Displays smaller icons with names and source information vertically in a single column in the list view.Displays the icon and name for an item in the list view in a simple list. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Small Icons Command Catalog Explorer > View > Small Icons Displays smaller icons with names horizontally in the list view and does not list file locations. Small Icons .Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a smaller format. Options include • . name. Details . page 78 List Command Catalog Explorer > View > List Displays smaller icons with names vertically using multiple columns in the list view and does not list details. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 78 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 77 78 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . List .Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a larger format. Choose the display of items in your list view. and file location for an item.Displays the icon.

For example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer) Catalog Explorer > Navigation The Navigation menu in Catalog Explorer provides commands that allow you to control the display and assignment of shortcut buttons within the Catalog Explorer. page 81 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 79 . but you are limited by the size of the Catalog Explorer window. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Consequently you save the time and effort of browsing the catalog node structure in the tree view in order to find the node that you want to open in the list view. you open the node for the piping and all the piping types appear in the list view. Also. If you want to make a shortcut to a particular symbol that you use a lot. All of the commands for managing your shortcut buttons are found on the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu. if your workflow requires you to route a lot of piping. you can use the symbol toolbar. shortcut buttons are shortcuts to catalog nodes only. you want to make a shortcut button to the Process Lines node. page 80 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. These buttons reside on the navigation bar between the tree and list view in the Catalog Explorer window. The software does not limit the number of shortcut buttons that you can create. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. Shortcut buttons provide shortcuts that bookmark a node in the active Tree view of Catalog Explorer. Then when you open Catalog Explorer and click this shortcut button.

click Add Button to create a shortcut button for the currently selected node. In the tree view. For example. page 91 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Note • Clicking the down-arrow of the Navigation menu button above accesses a list of the associated commands. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. 2. 3. if you frequently select nozzles. page 65 Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar 1. you can add a shortcut button to the nozzles node of the Catalog Explorer tree view by selecting Nozzles in the tree view and then choosing Add Button from the menu that appears when you click the downarrow of the Navigation menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Add Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Add Button Adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the active tree view node. You must also select the Show Buttons option in the menu in order for your shortcut button to appear between the tree view and list view windows of Catalog Explorer. page 82 • Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. On the Navigation menu. and show buttons. page 80 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 65 80 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Clicking on the Navigation menu button itself repeats the last command that you used from the menu. Note • You can right-click any shortcut button to display options to add. select the node that you want a shortcut to. page 91 • Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer. page 81 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Verify that shortcut buttons are set to appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views of Catalog Explorer by clicking the down-arrow on the Navigation menu and making sure that Show Buttons is selected. remove.

page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Remove Button Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Remove Button Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons in Catalog Explorer. Related Topics • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). page 65 Show Buttons Command Catalog Explorer > Navigation > Show Buttons Causes shortcut buttons to appear on the navigation bar between the tree view and the list view of Catalog Explorer. page 80 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. click Remove Button to delete the active shortcut button from the navigation bar. Tip • Or you can right-click any shortcut button and select Remove Button from its shortcut menu. page 65 Remove a Shortcut Button from the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu . page 65 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 81 .

2. The software assigns the selected command to the Catalog Explorer toolbar button. Related Topics • Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button. Note • You must first define a shortcut button in order to display it. page 79 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. page 65 82 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 80. On the menu. Related Topics • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. you can control the display of icons in the list view and define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined groups of catalog items. View. For example. and Navigation menus. page 82 Assign a Command to a Catalog Explorer Toolbar Button 1. Click the toolbar button itself. For more information. click an available command. click on the File menu button (not the down-arrow) and the Find command is carried out again. for example. page 65 Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons access the Catalog Explorer File. see Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. and that most recent command from the menu is carried out. Related Topics • Customizing Catalog Explorer: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Shortcut Buttons in Catalog Explorer On the Catalog Explorer Navigation menu Tip • . A check mark next to the menu item indicates that shortcut buttons appear in Catalog Explorer. The buttons appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views. the Find command on the File menu. Click the down-arrow portion of a Catalog Explorer toolbar button to open the associated menu. the icon located next to the menu button. page 80 • Navigation Menu (Catalog Explorer). 3. click Show Buttons. The commands on these menus allow you to customize the Catalog Explorer. After customization you can control the content and display of components in the Catalog Explorer window. page 82 • Using Catalog Explorer: An Overview. For example.

You can display item properties by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list. or all components are of the same type. The active items always determine the content of the Properties window. a ToolTip appears. You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy properties from one item to another. use Ctrl+C and Crtl+V. Edit > Paste. Notes • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. which itemizes all of the selected objects individually and as a select set. then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items in the set. as well as by selecting an item in the Design window. or assemblies. If you copy or paste values in the grid area. the value box is blank. This action can be particularly useful when correcting inconsistencies. If the selected items have different values for their common properties. giving the name of the button. An item and the properties that belong to it are associated when the item is created in Catalog Manager.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Working With the Properties Window: An Overview The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common properties of the current selection in the active Design window. Do not use the Edit > Copy. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. component types. then only the common properties appear. page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window toolbar. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. for instance. You can only have one Properties window open. or when you must apply changes to more than one item. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. or Edit > Cut to modify property values in this grid. You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list. all the properties of that type of component appear. page 90 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 83 . • • • Related Topics Copy Bulk Properties. If your select set contains components of different types. You can display and edit relationships that involve components. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. If more than one item is selected in the Design window. If only one component is selected.

Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. Show Brief Properties . To see the case data that appears for corresponding items. Copy Bulk Properties . temperatures. pipe runs or instruments. The applicable properties of an item are defined when it is created in Catalog Manager. too. according to relevance. see Paste Bulk Properties. pressures. For more information. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a zero.Displays a list of case conditions.Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no value. see Copy Bulk Properties. page 144 Properties Window Toolbar You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following Properties window toolbar buttons: Alphabetic .Displays those properties that have been previously specified as brief on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. You can review and edit the properties. Show Case Data . and so forth. Display Null .Copies the bulk properties of a selected item. look in Data Dictionary Manager. page 87 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk properties.Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected item or items. The properties are then available to paste onto other items. for example.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Properties Window Command View > Display > Properties Opens the Properties window and displays characteristics for a selected item or a select set. Categorized . which are displayed for equipment.Displays properties grouped by specific categories. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. For more information. Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties.Lists properties in alphabetical order. Note • You can display the Properties window by clicking View > Display > Properties Window. 84 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Paste Bulk Properties .

The item characteristics appear in the Properties window. Click View > Display > Properties Window. Tip • Another method for displaying the Properties window is to right-click the empty area in the main toolbar and then select Properties from the shortcut menu. page 89 • Show Brief Properties. and select Properties. page 83 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 85 . page 89 • Paste Bulk Properties. Or right-click an item. Use the Properties window to view and edit item properties. page 90 Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off 1. • Related Topics Properties Window Toolbar. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Note • The software includes a default set of bulk and brief properties. but you can change those properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. page 88 • Customize the Properties Window. page 86 • Display Null Values in the Properties Window. 2.

Display case data by clicking Show Case Data . • Tips • The properties that are subsequently displayed in the window belong to the chosen item or the select set. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. Open the Properties window. page 83 86 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . use the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window choose a single item or the select set of all listed items. see Turn the Display of the Properties Window On or Off. Click to display properties alphabetically. Display only brief properties by clicking Show Brief Properties 5. only properties that all items have in common appear. When you point to a button on the Properties window toolbar and pause over it. Display a null character in empty property cells by clicking Display Null Note • . Consequently. For the select set. page 85. a ToolTip displays the name of the corresponding command. and only common values are displayed for those properties. Display properties alphabetically or by categories by clicking the corresponding display mode button on the Properties window toolbar. If more than one item is selected in the Drawing view or in the Engineering Data Editor. only that either no value has been assigned or that the different items have different values for the property. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Whenever you have constructed a select set. 3. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. 2.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize the Properties Window 1. . 6. empty property values for a select set do not necessarily mean that no value has been assigned for any of the items in the set. • 4. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. Tip For more information on opening the Properties window. click to display properties by categories.

Use a single quote. • • Or you can click View > Toolbars and select Properties. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation. 3. page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 144 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. page 271 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 87 . In this way. Or you can click View > Display > Properties Window on the main menu bar. For formatted properties. Select the item or items whose properties you want to review. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Click Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. 2. • Tips • You can review and edit item properties in the Engineering Data Editor. Enter or edit information in the cell next to the appropriate property. Or you can right-click an item. you can enter a value without a format. or you can select an item by clicking the icon in the left-most column and then edit its properties in the Properties window. you can enter free text into a formatted property and no units of measurement are assigned. too. and select Properties from the shortcut menu. Tips • You can also display the Properties window by right-clicking the empty area of the main toolbar and then selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Review and Edit Item Properties 1. at the beginning of your entry. such as estimated length or maximum operating temperature. '.

2. Not all item types support the plant group property. 2. • Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Click Copy Bulk Properties Tip • . see Paste Bulk Properties. Then modify the plant group name in the Plant Group Name property box. 3. You can now paste these properties onto another item. select the plant group type in the Plant Group Type property box. page 258 • Copy Bulk Properties 1. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. Go to the last step if this is the case. your item can already be associated with the plant group type of unit. but you can change those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Associate an Item with a Plant Group 1. but you want simply to associate it with a different unit. For instance. In the Properties window. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 215 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. In the Design window or Engineering Data Editor. select the item whose bulk properties you want to copy. page 89. page 83 88 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. • Tip It is possible that you do not want to modify the plant group type. Tips • The default plant group is the node in the plant hierarchy immediately under which the drawing resides. For more information. Select the item that you want to associate with a different plant group.

and is not the same as a zero value. On the Properties window toolbar. Select the item or items that you want to paste bulk properties onto. see Copy Bulk Properties. page 15 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. 2. Related Topics • Properties Window Toolbar. page 84 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Right-click and select Properties. page 88. 2. Note • The software includes a default set of bulk properties. Click the null button Note • to display a null value in blank properties. but you can change bulk properties in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. Null means that the property is not defined. Select an item in your drawing. or is empty. For more information. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. You must first have copied the bulk properties of a different item in order to paste them onto your current selection. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 89 .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Display Null Values in the Properties Window 1. page 144 Paste Bulk Properties 1. 3. click Paste Bulk Properties Tip • . page 86 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview.

The software includes a default set of brief properties. page 84 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Once you display case data in the Properties window. pipe runs. Case data includes both process cases and control cases. but you can change that set on the Layout tab of the Advanced Table Properties dialog box. click the Show Brief Properties button Note • . page 86 • Show Brief Properties. To see the case data that appears for corresponding items.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Show Brief Properties On the Properties window toolbar. case data remains displayed for the current design session. or instruments. page 90 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 86 • Properties Window Toolbar. look in Data Dictionary Manager. you can select an item and click Edit > Properties. Notes • If the Properties window is not displayed. page 83 Show Case Data • On the Properties window toolbar. according to relevance. which are displayed for equipment. Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window. page 83 90 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . click the Show Case Data button Tip • . • Related Topics • Customize the Properties Window.

Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications. you could add the Previous View button to the main toolbar. Or. and properties. methods. you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. You then click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. Visual Basic. which provides a complete reference to the objects. You can view the type library with the type library browser of Visual Basic or the browser for an OLE-aware programming application. the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar. if you frequently use the View > Previous command. You can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware. Visual C++ Delphi. If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software. you can run the macros directly by clicking Tools > Custom Commands and selecting the macro. such as Microsoft® Visual Basic®. The software includes a type library. Several ways to customize the software are available: Customizing with Built-In Commands You can add commands to a menu or a menu command to a toolbar. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu. which contains all the objects. From there. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus and toolbars in the software. The Previous View button is listed on the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box. properties. Customizing with Macros Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software. Some macros also are delivered with the software. After you click OK.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing the Software: An Overview Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. you can start by clicking View > Toolbars. see a list by using the Tools > Custom Commands command. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID to access the SmartPlant P&ID Programming User's Guide. For example. but you can also create your own macros and add them to menus and toolbars in the same manner. and methods available with the product. you click Tools > Customize. and so forth. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 91 .

For more information about some of these options. creating shortcut buttons to access your most commonly used items. Some customization options include displaying small or large icons. page 91 92 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 71 Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 80 • Create a New Menu. which allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 138 Customize the Properties Window. and so forth. page 27 • Run a Macro. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. creating filter tabs. page 95 • Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. You can add commands to toolbars or menus. see these examples Add a Shortcut Button to the Catalog Explorer Navigation Bar. or you can create new toolbars and menus. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. page 101 Customize Command Tools > Customize Opens the Customize dialog box. page 80 Customize the Catalog Explorer List View. page 78 Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customizing Interface Elements You can customize many of the various ways of interfacing with the software. page 27 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. page 86 Define a User-Level Symbol Toolbar. Related Topics • Create a New Menu.

Macros .Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros. The Browse button appears only when you choose Macros in the Categories list. Or you can add a single command to the main menu bar. you can add commands to the new menu later. Menu Tree .Navigating in the Software: An Overview Customize Dialog Box Changes the display of toolbar buttons and menus according to your needs. When you select a folder and click OK. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box. you create a cascading menu.Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu. After you click this button. you can select a macro from the Macros list. This button is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want. Add Command . page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. When you select Macros in the Categories list. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu. double-click a menu name or click the "+" next to the SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 93 . Descriptions do not appear for macros.Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu bar. Browse . you can click the title of a command in the Commands list. page 95 • Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. Categories .Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command or macro from. If you add a menu to an existing menu. you can click Browse to change the folder for macros. This dialog box opens when you click Tools > Customize on the main menu bar. Commands . When you add a menu with this option.Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu. Description . To see all the commands on a menu. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu.Displays a description of the command that you selected before you add it to a menu. If you select a macro. Add Menu . Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. page 95 • Create a New Menu. the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected.Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. you can type the name that you want in the tree view and then enter it by clicking any other location on the dialog box.Places a command on a menu.

Reset All . Add Menu. Buttons .Lists the buttons available in the active category.Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree. page 28 • Add a Command to a Menu. page 95 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. Remove . page 96 • Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds or removes commands from toolbars.Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize. page 26 94 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . commands.Navigating in the Software: An Overview menu name. Choose one and the corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area. page 95 • Create a New Toolbar. If you do not set this option. page 27 • Remove a Command From a Menu. or Remove. Also. page 28 • Toolbars Dialog Box. Categories .Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings. You can drag a button from this area onto a toolbar. then the macros. you edit menu and command names in this view. Related Topics • Add a Button to a Toolbar. Related Topics Add a Command to a Menu.Describes the button selected in the Buttons area. or menus are added at the level that is currently open in the menu tree. page 96 • Create a New Toolbar. Place Into Selected Menu . Description . When you click Add Command. page 95 • Create a New Menu. page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. the changes show up on the menu tree.Overrides the default placement and places a command or macro on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree.

Buttons . Click Remove. In the Commands or Macros box. double-click a menu in the menu tree. Click Tools > Customize. Assign . page 27 • Remove a Button From a Toolbar. In the Categories list on the Menu tab. double-click the name of the existing menu that you want to add a command to. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 95 . select the command category that you want. 3. which allows you to look for an icon on your local computer or on the network.Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box. page 28 • Remove a Command From a Menu 1.Displays the available icons. page 28 • Create a New Toolbar.Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box. Tip The menu tree expands to show the commands on the existing menu. 2. 4. 2. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the main menu bar or the existing menu. otherwise. Related Topics Add a Button to a Toolbar. then the Macros box is displayed. Tip If you choose Macros from the Categories list. On the Menu tab. In the menu tree. Click Tools > Customize. • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. 3.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Custom Button Dialog Box Allows you to assign an toolbar button icon to a macro. Browse . • 4. the view contains the Commands box. click the name of the command that you want to add. This dialog box opens when you drag a macro from the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box to the toolbar. page 91 Add a Command to a Menu 1.

5. 2. Click Tools > Customize. page 91 Create a New Menu 1. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip The menu tree nodes expand to show the commands on the existing menus. 2. On the menu tree. • 6. click the Reset All button. 7. 4. On the Menu tab. Right-click the empty area of the main toolbar and click Customize on the shortcut menu in order to open the Customize dialog box. click the command category that you want. click the name of an existing menu. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. Tips • The new menu is added after the existing menu that you selected in step 3. clear the Place Into Selected Menu option. Click Add Command. Click the Add Menu button. page 91 Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings 1. Select the Place Into Selected Menu option. The software places the new command on the main menu bar after the existing menu that you select in the menu tree. 96 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Related Topics Customizing the Software: An Overview. Tip If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar. Notes • If you remove Customize from the Tools menu. 3. Click Tools > Customize. you can restore the command. In the Categories box on the Menu tab.

type the name of the menu. page 93 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. see Add a Command to a Menu. page 95. Related Topics • Customize Dialog Box. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. generally in the C:\Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program directory. thereby creating a cascading menu. Note • After you create a new menu. page 96 Custom Commands Command Tools > Custom Commands Opens the Custom Commands dialog box. page 101 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 97 . To enter the new menu. page 13 • Run a Macro.Navigating in the Software: An Overview If you want to add a menu to an existing menu. You can choose a macro and run it. For more information. select the Place Into Selected Menu option before you click the Add Menu button. click anywhere away from the name. you can add commands to it. page 91 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. page 91 • Restore All Built-In Menus to their Original Settings. Some macros are delivered with the software. 5. On the menu tree. You can also record your own macros and store them wherever you want to. • 6.

You can choose OPCs to repair or delete from the plant database. Fix . Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items.Fixes the reference to the mated OPC that you have selected in the OPC list. You use this utility to delete obsolete model items from the database.Cleans orphaned records from the plant database. page 100 Repair OPCs Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands to run DelOrpModItems. Clean DB . Delete .dll. Gaps . Model Items . see Related Topics.Opens the Repair OPCs dialog box.Deletes the non-repairable OPC pair that you have chosen in the OPC list. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility.Corrects gaps with the wrong representation in the database.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Clean Data Dialog Box This utility opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run the DelOrpModItems.dll and click OPCs. which allows you to fix or delete OPC pairs with incomplete reference information.Opens the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box. OPC Types . Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. OPCs . which allows you to delete obsolete model items. page 100 98 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Allows you to choose to list either the repairable or the non-repairable OPC pairs that have lost links to their partner OPCs either one-way or both ways. For more information. This dialog box is part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility.

then the OPCs are considered non-repairable. Exchanger. • • Clean orphaned records from the plant database. Find and repair off-page connectors (OPCs) that have lost their associations with the OPC that they were originally paired with. Equipment: Other. Mechanical. Nozzle. Delete . this dialog box can be used to accomplish the following tasks. but the mated OPC still has the identity of the first OPC. • • Item Type Names . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 99 . and OPC.dll and then click Model Items. you can select any or all of the items and choose to delete them. This need occurs only in rare instances.Removes the orphan items selected in the Item list from the plant database.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete Orphan Model Items Dialog Box Opens when you click Tool > Custom Commands and run DelOrpModItems. Update gaps in the representation record with the proper item type. then the OPC is considered repairable. Instrument. Signal Run. the utility updates the identity information for the first OPC. To repair the OPC. Pipe Run.Allows you to choose the type of orphaned model items that you want to display in the Item list. if both the OPC and its mated OPC have lost the identities of each other. You can choose the orphan model items that you want to delete from the plant database. If one OPC has lost the identity of its mated OPC. Area Break. You need to perform this operation if you have gapping problems in your drawings. Part of the Delete Orphan Model Items Utility. Find and delete any model item in the database that does not have a corresponding entry in the T_Representation table. Equipment Component. The utility works on an item type basis and repairs the following model item types: Vessel. However. Once the orphan model items for an item type are found. Piping Component. and you are given the option to delete them.

On the Clean Data dialog box. Click Gaps to find and repair gaps that do not have the correct representation in the database. and click Fix if it is a repairable pair or Delete if it is non-repairable. The buttons on the utility are arranged appropriately. refer to your database documentation. 3. • 2. Tip You can also click Delete All to select and delete all the items in the list view. T_Representation and T_ModelItem. For information on setting table permissions. Click Model Items. Click OPCs. • 8. 5. Open a drawing. 1. page 100 Delete Orphan Model Items Important • Verify that the plant user has full permissions to the tables. and click Tools > Custom Commands to open the Custom Commands dialog box. On the Repair OPCs dialog box.Selects and deletes all the orphan model items of the type specified in the Item Type Names list.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Delete All . 7. click Clean DB. Browse the drawing software program directory and open DelOrpModItems. • 4. Choose the OPC pair that you are interested in from the OPC list. It is very important that you perform the steps in the sequence that they are presented. choose the model item type from the Item Type Names list. select the model orphan items to delete and click Delete. In the list view. 6. choose either repairable or non-repairable from the OPC Type list. On the Delete Orphan Model Items dialog box. Tip You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. Tip Repairable OPC pairs retain one link out of two between the mates.dll. 100 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Delete Orphan Model Items. Non-repairable OPC pairs retain neither link. • 10. 9.

select the macro that you want to run. • Notes • The Delete Orphan Model Item Utility must be run from within the drawing environment. Log messages generated when orphaned records are deleted from the plant database are written to the DBCleanup.log file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable. Click Run. such as Visual Basic. • • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Note • You can create macros with any programming tool that supports OLE automation. Click Tools > Custom Commands.txt file in the directory assigned to the Temp environment variable.Navigating in the Software: An Overview Tip Follow the prompts on message boxes if you see any. 3. Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. The log file contains information about deleted items including the item type and sp_id. 11. Log messages are placed in SPDelOrpModItems. 2. page 127 Run a Macro 1. page 91 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 101 . On the Custom Commands dialog box. Click Close to return to the design software.

Drawings are graphical representations of plant models using standard symbols and conventions. 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .dwg and . and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. The only way to use a template is to have a plant administrator select a template at drawing creation in Drawing Manager. units of measurement. piping. the drawing is displayed in a Drawing view in the Design window. Using Templates as a Starting Point You use a template as a starting point for creating the drawing. A component is any piece of equipment. A plant model consists of components. Several standard templates are delivered with SmartPlant P&ID. You can save drawings in different formats.Working with Drawings: An Overview Working with Drawings: An Overview An administrator uses Drawing Manager to create a new drawing on a pre-formatted template. dimensions.cgm for CGM Metafile. The template that your plant administrator selects depends on the type of information that is wanted in the drawing. You cannot save a drawing as a template. or other item used to create a plant model. Your plant administrator can edit the property set of the template to include default values for some of the properties.dxf for AutoCAD®. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. and you can create new templates in SmartPlant P&ID. .pid for SmartPlant.dgn for MicroStation®. Any changes that you make to the drawing data are automatically saved in the database. In the Properties window. you enter appropriate values into the database for each property of the component. You select symbols from Catalog Explorer and then select the appropriate placement location in the drawing. instead of embedding it. and styles used to produce a new drawing. as well as the additional custom properties that you need to manage your drawings. including . Symbols represent components in Catalog Explorer and Engineering Data Editor. You can use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your drawing. A template is a file that provides tools such as text. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. When you create and open a drawing. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. . If you link a border file. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. geometry. formats. and . instrumentation. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. use Intergraph SmartSketch. and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your drawing.

The software keeps track of the drawings that you worked on last. You can also change databases by using this command so that you can open drawings in other plants. page 277 • Open an Existing Drawing. With the Properties command on the File menu. The Options command on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries displayed in that list. renaming a drawing file in Windows does not update the drawing table in the plant schema where the drawing name is stored. page 111 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 103 . You can change the size of a drawing by using the Page Setup command on the File menu. you can select it from that list. and Paste commands to move or copy information between the drawings or within one open drawing. You can use commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open drawings and views so that you can see them easily. These drawings appear at the bottom of the File menu. and you can change the name of a drawing in Drawing Manager. you can view. Each drawing can have more than one view. the author. The drawing information is stored in a database associated with the drawings in a plant.Working with Drawings: An Overview Opening Existing Drawings The Open command on the File menu opens existing drawings. However. These properties include drawing statistics. Note • Renaming a drawing file in Windows allows the drawing to be opened with all graphics pointing to the database. To open one of these drawings. page 116 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. Related Topics • Embed a New Object. such as drawing size and the date that a drawing was created and last modified. Drawing properties can include the title. Copy. Setting Up Properties for a Drawing An administrator sets up drawing properties such as units of measure in Options Manager and Format Manager. Working with Several Open Drawings Several drawings can remain open in the same session but only if they all belong to the same plant. too. and save properties for a drawing. page 125 • Set Document Properties. and keywords that identify important information. page 87 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. the software updates statistics automatically. page 108 • Review and Edit Item Properties. You can use the Cut. edit.

The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. page 102 • Open Dialog Box Displays the active plant hierarchy and lists its drawings. which names the corresponding command. The list view only displays one property for each drawing. An administrator creates the hierarchy of plants and projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.Displays in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. which allows you to specify the drawings that are displayed in the list or detailed view. For more information on the toolbar commands. You cannot open two drawings from different databases at the same time. This dialog box appears when you click File > Open on the main menu bar. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. Pause over a toolbar button in order to display a ToolTip. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing.Displays a detailed view in the right-hand window.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open Command File > Open Opens the Open dialog box. List . Related Topics Customize the Open Dialog Box. page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 108 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. which lists existing plants and their drawings.Opens the Open Plant Structure dialog box. see Filter .Displays the list view in the right-hand window. Include Subnodes .Deactivates any ad hoc filter you have applied to the list of drawings that appears in the list view of the Open dialog box.Opens the Filter dialog box. Details . which allows you to specify a different SmartPlant initialization file so that you can work in a different database. 104 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. Open Database . Cancel Filter . You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. and allows you to open a drawing and to choose the database that you access.

Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. which allows you to specify the information about each drawing that is displayed in the report or list view of the Open dialog box. You can select only one item from this list view at a time. page 111 Open Plant Structure Dialog Box Sets options for connecting to a site and plant structure and passes user access information to the application.Allows you to specify the application that you want to associate with this plant structure. page 108 • Open Command. page 72 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. Related Topics • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. Available plant structure .Opens the Customize Current View dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Open Database on the Open dialog box.Opens the Open Site Server dialog box. Plant structures that correspond to the initialization file that you choose are subsequently displayed in the list of available plant structures. The Open command also checks to make sure you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software.Lists those plant structures found on the network. page 108 • Open Command. page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing.Connects you to the selected database.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize View . Site Server . page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. Open . allowing you to select a SmartPlant initialization file from local and network directories. Application Type . page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 105 .

This button is available only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. you must type a value. Property . which can be free text.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. box. or type a question mark. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. Edit . =. Match any is the default matching method. Examples of properties include revision number and name.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. or choose null. <>. as a wildcard character for a single character. Definition . You can type a percent sign. %.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. an operator. Match all .Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. and a value. Relationships include. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters. and so forth. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. not equal to. greater than. equal to. ?. Do not use an asterisk. >. you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type.Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. page 108 • Open Command.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. for example. Operator . Delete . in the Value box. page 110 • Open an Existing Drawing. This dialog box opens when you click Filter Add . Match any . page 72 106 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry. Value . To add to or modify the definition list.Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. *.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Dialog Box Sets options for the display of drawings in the list or report view of the Open dialog on the Open dialog box.

Drawing properties . Move Up . page 108 • Open Command. Move Down .Lists the properties that are available to be displayed in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Selected properties .Moves the chosen items in the Selected properties list back into the Drawing properties list so that they are no longer available in the detailed view. page 72 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 107 .Displays the properties that are currently available for the detailed view in the Open dialog box. page 110 • Open a Drawing in a Different Database. which changes the order of the display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Remove .Moves the selected property up in order in the list.Moves the selected property down in order in the list.Moves the selected items in the Drawing properties list into the Selected properties list so that those properties are available in the detailed view of the Open dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize Current View Dialog Box Allows you to specify what drawing property or properties are displayed in the list view of the Open dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Customize View on the Open dialog box. which changes the order of display in the detailed view of the Open dialog box. Related Topics • Customize the Open Dialog Box. Add . page 109 • Open an Existing Drawing.

• Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 102 108 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Notes • You can open one of the last edited drawings by selecting it from the list of recently opened files at the bottom of the File menu on the main menu bar. Tip • If you do not see the drawing that you want to open. For more information. You need to have the correct permissions to open or save certain drawings. page 109. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. confirm that the plant hierarchy is correct. click Open . Your plant administrator has set the plant hierarchy and has identified user names and tasks for those plants and related drawings. You can change the database you are working in.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open an Existing Drawing 1. Double-click the drawing that you want to open. On the main toolbar. 2. User roles are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

• . On the Open Plant Structure dialog box. 4. click File > Open. Tip The Open command checks to make sure that you have the correct access privileges for the selected plant structure and passes your access information back to the software. On the Open dialog box. On the main menu bar.Working with Drawings: An Overview Open a Drawing in a Different Database 1. • Related Topics • Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview. select the correct SmartPlant . 6. click Site Server. Navigate to the correct drawing in the Open dialog box and double-click it. On the Open Site Server dialog box. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 109 . 5. click Open Database Tip The Open Database command is not available if you already have a drawing open because you cannot open drawings from different databases during the same P&ID session. 3.ini initialization file and click OK. Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open. page 141 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 2.

To display a detailed view in the right-hand window. page 102 110 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize the Open Dialog Box 1. . To apply a filter to the drawings displayed in the right-hand view of the Open dialog box. and you can change the order that drawing properties appear in. click Clear Filter . Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. 7. 4. the first item in the Selected Properties list is the descriptor that appears in the list view. click Customize View . click Include Subnodes again. 8. The detailed view displays all the properties specified in the Selected Properties list of the Customize Current View dialog box. you can see Drawing Manager Help for more information. 6. click Filter . You can specify that descriptor by clicking Customize View. To cancel a filter that you have already applied to the Open dialog box. Note • Because the Open dialog box is similar in nature to the Drawing Manager interface. 3. To further manipulate the properties that are available to view in the right-hand window. To display all the drawings and node names that reside in the currently selected node. To cancel the display of subnodes. Using the detailed view allows you to view and sort drawings by several attributes. click Include Subnodes . you can add and remove drawing properties from the display. click Details Tip • . click List Tip The list view displays only one property for each drawing. • Tip • On the Customize Current View dialog box. To display a list view in the right-hand window. define your ad hoc filter criteria. 5. On the Filter dialog box.

on the Window menu. Related Topics • Access a Recently Open Drawing. page 102 Access a Recently Open Drawing 1. select the view that you want to work in from the list. The file names are listed near the bottom of the File menu. Or. click its window. page 102 Switch to Another Open Drawing or View If you can see a portion of the drawing or view that you want to switch to. Select the drawing from the list of recently opened drawings. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by using the Tools > Options command. 2. Click File on the main menu bar. Related Topics • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recent Drawings File > Recent Drawings Opens one of the drawings that you worked on most recently. page 15 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 111 . page 111 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. if you cannot see any portion of the drawing or view. The view then appears on top of other open views.

and megabytes. Related Topics • Set Document Properties.Displays the directory containing the document. Type . page 115 General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays general information about the current document. page 102 File Properties Dialog Box Tracks information about the properties of a drawing.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. page 116 • View Document Properties. 112 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Accessed . The type is based on the application used to create the document.Working with Drawings: An Overview File Properties Command File > Properties Opens the File Properties dialog box. page 115 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Displays the type of document. Open this dialog box by clicking File > Properties on the main menu bar. kilobytes. MS-DOS Name . You can review and edit the drawing summary and statistics. Size .Displays the date and time that the document was last modified. Note • You must save the drawing before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. Modified . Location . Related Topics • File Properties Command. which displays general information about the current drawing. page 116 • View Document Properties.Displays the size of the document in bytes.Displays the date and time that the document was created or copied. Created .Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a Windows file naming system. page 112 • Set Document Properties.

You can edit these properties.Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search documents. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. if available. or print the document. Title . page 116 • View Document Properties.Specifies the current drawing template. Hidden . Note • If some of the above information is not available. Archive .Specifies comments about the current document.Working with Drawings: An Overview Attributes . Read-Only . save.Indicates that the document is read-only. the dialog box displays Unknown. page 112 • Set Document Properties. System . page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 113 . These settings are readonly.Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this document unless you change the view options in Windows Explorer. along with keywords and comments for the current document. unless the document is write-protected.Gives a general description of the current document. page 115 Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays the title and author. Author . Comments .Shows that the document is an archive document. with the exception of the template.Specifies the title of the current document. Template . You usually cannot see this document in the Windows. The software generates the author and template information when you create. Keywords .Displays the properties of the current document.Indicates that the document is a hidden document. page 112 • Set Document Properties. page 116 • View Document Properties. You cannot open a read-only file for writing.Displays the name of the person who created the document. Subject . You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.

Created . Currently Opened By . if the precision readout is . Angle Readout .Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a document.106 inches. page 115 Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into a property. page 112 • Set Document Properties.Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied. or angle values in a drawing.1056 inches long.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a document. Area Readout . For example. or print the document. Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box.Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a document.Displays the name of the person who has the document open. only the display of the numbers.Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the document. 114 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software automatically generates these properties when you create.Displays the name of the person who last saved the document. The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to appear. It represents the accuracy of the unit readout value. Modified . area. then the line value length is rounded up to 2. Accessed . save. page 116 • View Document Properties. Last Saved By . Creating Application . Length Readout .Displays the name of the application that created the document.123 and you draw a line that is 2.Displays the date and time the document was last modified.Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.Working with Drawings: An Overview Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) Displays detailed information about the current document. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. Saving Application .

and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. of the larger unit through Format Manager. that is. page 116 • View Document Properties. you must save the document to update the property information. That is. page 115 View Document Properties 1. Note • The File Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active document. • • Related Topics • File Properties Dialog Box. Tip • You must save the document before you can view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. page 112 • Set Document Properties. All delivered labels use plant default units. Change the Unit definition in the SmartText Editor dialog box in Catalog Manager to see a different unit of measure in a label. On the File Properties dialog box. click the tab that contains the information that you want. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. you can convert centimeters to meters and back and retain the originally entered value of centimeters with no round-off loss. Click File > Properties. 2. If the document has unsaved changes. increase decimal places. which are defined in the Options Manager. SmartPlant supports round-trip conversion of units without loss of precision. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 115 . Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.Working with Drawings: An Overview Notes • To avoid loss of precision in units when switching between small and large types of a particular unit. increase the precision.

On the File Properties dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Set Document Properties 1. You can also change the size for an existing drawing. page 370 • Related Topics • Working with Drawings: An Overview. such as summary information or keywords. For more information. set the options that you want. Click File > Properties. page 102 116 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Notes • Before you can set or view the document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the File Properties dialog box. 2. you must save the document . see Set up a Page Layout.

page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 117 . Note • Any changes are automatically saved upon closing. page 117 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. The software saves your changes automatically.Working with Drawings: An Overview Close Command File > Close Closes the active drawing. page 102 Close an Active Drawing Click File > Close. Related Topics • Close an Active Drawing. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview.

page 124 118 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 118 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Note • The software saves any changes since the last time you saved your changes.Working with Drawings: An Overview Exit Command File > Exit Closes the active drawing and the program. The software checks for unsaved changes when you close the software. page 102 Close the Program Click File > Exit. Related Topics • Close the Program. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. Any changes are automatically saved.

save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation.Working with Drawings: An Overview Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview The software includes several standard drawing templates. it is possible to customize a drawing template to meet your particular needs.pid E-Size.igr A0 Wide (1189mm x 841mm) A1border.igr B Wide (17in x 11in) C Wide (22in x 17in) E Wide (44in x 34in) D-Wide.igr D Wide (34in x 225in) SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 119 . The pre-defined size choices for a new template are extensive. If you create a new template. You can then embed your border file in the new templates you create in SmartPlant P&ID. If you create a new template.igr A4 Wide (297mm x 210mm) A5border. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. You create labels in Catalog Manager.pid C-Size.igr C-Wide. you can also create a new title block label that fits the title block of your template correctly and that contains the appropriate information.pid B-Size.pid A2-Size.igr A5 Wide (210mm x 148mm) Template file Border file Page size A-Size. The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager.pid A5-Size. however. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. This task is accomplished inside the design software by using commands on the File menu.pid A-Wide.igr E-Wide.igr A1 Wide (841mm x 594mm) A2border.igr A Wide (11in x 8.5in) B-Wide.pid Page size A0border. instead of embedding it. If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates.pid A3-Size.igr A2 Wide (594mm x 420mm) A3border.pid A1-Size.pid D-Size. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change.igr A3 Wide (420mm x 297mm) A4border.pid A4-Size. use Intergraph SmartSketch. Standard Template Size Information Template file Border file A0-Size. The software also includes a set of title block labels that fit the delivered drawing templates. If you link a border file. You usually create a new drawing based on one of these existing templates.

page 370 New Template Command File > New Template Creates a new blank template. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout. page 102 120 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 121 • Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border. For more information about creating new drawings. page 121 • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Caution • Templates created at the user level instead of the plant level are not available to other users or to Drawing Manager for creating subsequent drawings. You can specify properties for the new template and embed border files.Working with Drawings: An Overview Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. The path to the plant-level drawing templates is defined in Options Manager. page 278 • Set up a Page Layout. see Drawing Manager Help. page 122 • Embed a New Object. Related Topics • Create a Drawing Template. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. To create new drawings. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. page 125 • Set Document Properties. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template.

igr file. choose a standard size or define a custom size for this template. 4. 11. a . 3. Click OK. find the border file. • Notes • To create a new drawing using a plant template. Tip If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. Click File > Page Setup. 6. 8. In the Sheet size box on the Page Setup dialog box. and Area readout boxes in order to define default units of measurement. an administrator uses Drawing Manager. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. On the main toolbar. make sure that the Link option is selected. 14. in the Create from file box. • 13. For more information about connecting to a database. Click OK.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Drawing Template Important • Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. 1. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. 7. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. Click File > Save As and specify a name for your template on the Save As dialog box. 10. 12. click New Template 2. specify the unit in the Length. page 109. Angle. 5. use Intergraph SmartSketch. Type the path to the border file. Click File > Properties. Click Edit > Insert > Object. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. On the Units tab of the File Properties dialog box. Quit the design software. You can also add general identifying information on the Summary tab. 9. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 121 . Click OK. . and click Open. or click Browse. On the Insert Object dialog box.

Working with Drawings: An Overview • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. page 119 • Embed a New Object. If you link a border file. • Tip Be sure to select a template that matches not only the page size requirements for drawings but also the units of measurement. Open the design application. In Windows Explorer.igr file. see Open a Drawing in a Different Database. On the Insert Object dialog box. use Intergraph SmartSketch. • 4. 6. Type the path to the border file. Click Edit > Insert > Object. 1. instead of embedding it. a . make sure that the Link option is selected. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. you must verify that you are connected to the correct database and that you do not have any drawings open. For more information about connecting to a database. Tip • If you want to create custom border files for your drawing templates. metric or English. and click Open. 3. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. find the border file. 122 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. or click Browse. • Tip You can do this by opening the product from the Start menu or by closing all open documents in the design software if it is already running. page 109. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. for the plant. in the Create from file box. 5. Select the existing border file and click Delete while the pointer is in the Drawing view. page 102 Edit a Standard Drawing Template Border Important Before you can edit one of the standard templates included with SmartPlant software. but do not open a drawing. find the template you want to edit and drag it into the Design window. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.

9. For more information about editing other properties of a drawing template or creating a new template. • Notes • You can also embed your border file in the drawing template if you want to. Once you embed a border file into a template and a drawing is created using that template. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change.Working with Drawings: An Overview 7. changes are reflected automatically in your drawing. page 119 • Embed a New Object. and then subsequently change that border in SmartSketch. If you link a border file. Quit the design software. Save it in this default location in order for it to be available for drawing creation. Click OK. see Create a Drawing Template. instead of embedding it. Click File > Save. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 123 . page 121 • Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. 8. Tip The default storage location for templates is specified in Options Manager. page 277 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.

page 111 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software uses the name and folder location specified in Drawing Manager during drawing creation. As you work. You can use the Save As command to save drawings in . If you want to save the drawing in a format other than . These types of drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks. When you open an existing drawing. Assemblies are saved in a specific folder specified in Options Manager.cgm) format provides an efficient way to make information available on the Internet. You can retrieve assemblies from Catalog Explorer to place in a drawing. Saving Assemblies You can save a group of items in a drawing as an assembly. because changes to the drawing post to the database as you make them. Saving Drawings to . you can place the graphics on a Web page and view them with a browser. These changes are saved in the database automatically. page 125 • Switch to Another Open Drawing or View. the changes that you make to the drawing appear on your screen. Closing Drawings You can close a drawing without saving your work. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. page 126 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template. the software copies the drawing from the disk or network and displays it on the screen. it remains displayed on the screen. you probably feel more comfortable saving it at least once yourself.pid. After you have saved a drawing. However. You can save your drawing by clicking Save on the toolbar. You can use File > Close to close the drawing and clear it from your screen. or you can use File > Exit to close the drawing and quit the software. CGM is an efficient format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web because it uses little storage space. allowing quick access to information outside the drawing.cgm format. Then.Working with Drawings: An Overview Saving Drawings: An Overview Whenever you save a drawing using File > Save. and has the ability to zoom and achieve more detail. use the Save As command. renders quickly.cgm Format The Computer Graphics Metafile (.

Note When using AutoCAD. Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. Related Topics • Save a Drawing in a Different Format. your parametric symbols should not be scaled. page 124 Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template • Click Save Notes on the main toolbar. An administrator must click File > New Template to create a new template. You can type a name and choose a format and location for your template. page 124 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 125 . the Save As dialog box appears. Plant location and paths are set in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and Options Manager. The graphics will display incorrectly. You cannot open an existing drawing and then decide to save it as a template. the Save As dialog box opens.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save Command File > Save Stores the active drawing or template. page 102 Save As Command File > Save As Opens the Save As dialog box. • If you have not named a template before clicking Save. page 124 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. If you have not already named a template. • Related Topics • Saving Drawings: An Overview. You can save the active document to a new format. page 126 • Saving Drawings: An Overview.

• 7. run the ExportLayer.xls. a message appears that tells you if all items were assigned layers successfully or if any items lacked the appropriate layer specification. open ExportLayer. Related Topics • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template.Working with Drawings: An Overview Save a Drawing in a Different Format 1. page 125 • Saving Drawings: An Overview. When the Custom Commands dialog box opens. select the drive and folder for the new drawing. page 124 126 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . select the document format that you want to use. 8. In Microsoft Excel. Save ExportLayer. On the Save As dialog box. Assign level or layer numbers between 10 and 63 to ensure that graphics appear in the designated levels or layers. The location of this Microsoft Excel workbook is specified in Options Manager. Click File > Save As. Tip When the macro finishes running. In the design software click Tools > Custom Commands. 9. In the Save As Type box. In the File Name box. 6. you can name layers with any combination of alphanumeric characters. 5.dll macro. Tips • You can choose more filters for the Filter column of this worksheet from filters in Filter Manager. 2.xls. • 4. This macro is delivered in \Program Files\SmartPlant\P&ID Workstation\Program. 3. If you save your drawing to the AutoCAD format. You can edit the Microsoft Excel workbook again if you need to add filters and layers. type a new name for the drawing.

Recreate-DrawingName. the software reinitializes your drawing and displays the message Re-create drawing is complete. however. the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file (for example. The software displays a message box that states One or more items in this drawing are inconsistent with the database. When you re-open the drawing. when you click File > Save or when you quit the program). the software recognizes that the drawing file is different from the database.Working with Drawings: An Overview Re-creating Drawings: An Overview The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing. Also. the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the drawing. You can check this file for irregularities that occur during the re-create process. As a result. the software can end in an abnormal way (for example. After the re-create process is completed. During the re-create process. is created in your Temp folder. Caution • Do not interfere with the re-create process once started because the drawing can become unusable. due to power outage). but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the drawing. the status bar at the bottom of the main window keeps you informed about the particular elements currently reconciling with the database. Occasionally. a log file. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the database. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 127 .

Working with Drawings: An Overview If a section of the drawing could not re-create successfully an error condition appears on your drawing. This portion of the drawing must be updated manually. The heavy orange line segment is the error condition. and the symbology is a heavy orange line segment. Then re-route your runs and replace connections and components as required. Delete the heavy orange line segment and components connected directly to it. page 129 128 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Error conditions are always associated with a pipe or signal run. Related Topics • Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition.

Replace connectors and components that you deleted in step 1. open the drawing that you opened in step 1. 9. 10. Delete the item that you placed in step 2. In the list. 2. Tip Keep property breaks in mind as you re-route your lines. Right-click an empty space on your Windows taskbar. Click the Processes tab. Place an item in the drawing. Notes • Normally SmartPlant P&ID recreates drawings automatically when it detects a discrepancy between the drawing and the database. 3. 4.exe. see the Re-creating Drawings section in the SmartPlant P&ID Installation and Upgrade Guide. Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Open the drawing that you want to recreate. • Related Topics • Re-creating Drawings: An Overview. Delete the heavy orange lines that make up the error itself. In SmartPlant P&ID. 3. click draft. Save the drawing. click OK to recreate the drawing from the database. Click End Process. For more information about recreating drawings. 5. Delete all connectors and components that are directly connected to the error condition. 4. 6. page 127 Resolve a Re-create Drawing Error Condition 1. 7.Working with Drawings: An Overview Recreate a Drawing 1. • Note • Error conditions are not required items and therefore do not move to the stockpile when you delete them. 8. When the software prompts you that a recreate is necessary. and then click Task Manager. Re-route your pipe or signal run. 2. page 127 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 129 .

but the methods of creating these filters are the same as those for creating filters saved in Filter Manager. You can show all items added after a certain date or after a certain revision number. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. After applying the filter. You can apply filters to either Drawing views or the Engineering Data Editor. page 52 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. do not create Project Filters at a satellite site. you could filter all pumps in a Drawing view. You can use filters in Rule Manager to define how items interact within a view. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. You can then select all the pumps and edit their properties one-by-one or as a select set in the Properties window. You can create filters to control the display of hierarchy items in Drawing Manager. you see all pumps in the drawing as graphical symbols. However. you can use a filter to display an operational design. For example. or an under construction design. For example. Note • If you are using a workshare environment and you are at a satellite site. You can associate filters with the source or target properties in rules. And you can use filters to find and replace items.Working with Drawings: An Overview Using Filters: An Overview You can use filters in many ways throughout the software and its stand-alone applications and utilities. These filters are not saved to any folder in Filter Manager. That same filter applied to the Engineering Data Editor displays a list of pumps and their characteristics in a tabular format. page 357 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View. you can always create My Filters in the Filter Manager or Select Filter dialog box environment. you want to delete items of a certain type. where you can edit the properties of the pumps also. for example. You can use filters if. Filters can help you show different views of the same drawing and can make your workflow more efficient. You can use filters when you create report templates to display particular items on a report.

Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. page 15 Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. depending on your selection in the filter list. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. If you create a compound filter. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters.Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. page 230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 131 . select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. Using this dialog box. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. to choose item types for tables. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. which contains a subset of the commands in Filter Manager.Displays the New Filter dialog box.Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Command View > Add Filter Adds a filter tab to the drawings in the Design window. Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. Properties . • • New . which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter. This command displays the Select Filter dialog box.

Filter . Filter Name . Color . which allows you to choose or create a filter for your Drawing view.Contains information about the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. page 138 • Define a New Filter for an Engineering Data Editor View.Opens the Filter Properties dialog box. Scroll down the list to choose a line width.Allows you to specify the color of the filtered items. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Opens the Select Filter dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Properties . Simple filter .Working with Drawings: An Overview Add Filter Tab Dialog Box Opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view and select Add Filter from the shortcut menu. Scroll down the list to choose a color. You specify the name of the filter when you choose or create it. Compound filter . In order for the alternate symbology to take effect in your drawing.Contains information about how the software displays the filtered items in your Drawing view.Allows you to specify the line width for your filtered items.Displays the name of the filter that you want to use for your Drawing view. This information is read-only. You can name the new filter appropriately. You can modify the properties of the filter that you choose from the Select Filter dialog box.Combines two or more simple filters to return a collection of items based on the criteria of the combination of simple filters. page 138 New Filter Dialog Box Allows you to specify compound or simple filter when you create a new filter. Width . you must right-click the drawing filter tab and select Use Alternate Symbology. You can activate this dialog box by clicking New on the Select Filter dialog box. Browse . Alternate symbology . This dialog box allows you to specify a filter for your drawing.Returns a collection of items based on the filter definition and criteria of a single filter. page 52 132 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Add . and a value. an operator.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Match any is the default matching method. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. >. Operator . Each item type owns a set of properties.Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. not equal to.Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. including the name.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Properties Dialog Box Specifies properties of a filter. This button is active only when you select a criterion in the definition list. Filter for .Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria. Relationships include. Definition . Examples of item types are Equipment. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property. If you are defining the Engineering Data Editor. Match any . you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group. Match all . and PipeRun. Property . Specifies available properties in the Definition grid.Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter.Contains the top-level items from the data dictionary.Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. and examples of properties for these item types are Equipment Type. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit.A phrase or sentence about the filter. and Estimated Length. Delete . Instrument. Description . respectively. The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. for example. Filter names within a project must be unique.Specifies the filter name. Edit . Instr. Name . greater than. Examples of properties include revision number and name. the criteria that you enter on the Filter tab on the Advanced Table Properties dialog box are combined with the base filter that you select. <>. and so forth.Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter.Loop Item Tag. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 133 . equal to. description. =. and the other properties that you want to filter for. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. To add to or modify the definition list.

Year . or choose null. page 136 • 134 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or type a question mark. page 138 Calendar Dialog Box Use this dialog box to specify a date in Value on the Filter Properties dialog box. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter.Allows you to choose the correct year. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.Allows you to specify the date of the month. %. For example. which can be free text. *. you can view only pumps whose Revision Approval Timestamp is after a particular date.Working with Drawings: An Overview Value . Dates . Do not use an asterisk. in the Value box. as a wildcard character for a single character. Select the date you want and click OK. The option of choosing a date for Value is available only for those properties that are date formatted.Allows you to choose the correct month. which is specified in Data Dictionary Manager. You can type a percent sign. Month . If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box. ?. you must type a value.Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property column. as a wildcard character to find multiple characters.

The description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. The name can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. including the name.Working with Drawings: An Overview Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. This dialog box specifies properties of a compound filter. Match any is the default matching method.Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Filter Method . Name . Match any . and whether to match all or any of the simple filter criteria.Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter. This name appears as the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. Compound filters apply only to homogeneous item types. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 135 . The simple filters are added to the compound filter by dragging the simple filter or by creating new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter hierarchy.Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. Related Topics • Add Filter Command. Description . page 131 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Match all .Specifies the filter name. The description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface. description.Allows you to choose either Match all or Match any. Filter names within a plant must be unique.

you can specify a date for that property. 2. Tip • You can click Delete to remove a filter definition if it is currently selected. select Simple filter. select the filter property. On the New Filter dialog box. In the Edit area. Click the ellipses in the Value box in the Edit group and select a date on the calendar.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Simple Filter 1. Click Add to add a line for another filter definition. Tip When you point to the name of a filter in the tree view on the Select Filter dialog box. In the Definition area. operator. 3. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria pass. Click the Filter for drop-down list and specify the item type for the new filter. • Related Topics • Create a Compound Filter. Type a description in the Description box. and repeat step 6. On the Filter Properties dialog box. click either Match all or Match any. • Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass through the filter. type a name for the new filter. • 8. • Tip The type in the Filter for box determines the properties that are available in the Edit area. Open the Select Filter dialog box. page 137 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. and click OK. and click New. this filter description displays as a ToolTip. if needed. 5. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. page 130 136 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and corresponding value for the first filter criterion. 7. 4. 6. Notes • If you select a date-formatted property. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also.

Match Any is the default. You cannot mix Equipment: Mechanical with Equipment: Heat Transfer or any other item type. of course. • Note • When you point to the name of a compound filter in the tree view in Filter Manager.Working with Drawings: An Overview Create a Compound Filter 1. page 91 • Using Filters: An Overview. if you create a new filter under that compound filter. Match any means that items matching any one or more of the filtering criteria return. To add filter criteria to the compound filter. You set the filter description in the Description box in the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. Tip Match all means that only those items matching ALL of the filtering criteria specified are returned. which displays in the Filter for list on the Filter Properties dialog box. • Related Topics • Create a Simple Filter. For example. the filter description displays in a ToolTip. If you have the Select Filter dialog box open. Once one simple filter has been assigned to a compound filter. type a name for the new compound filter in the Name box. Select either Match all or Match any. Type a description in the Description box. page 130 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 137 . • 7. Open the Select Filter dialog box. select Compound filter. On the New Filter dialog box. This is. Tips • All of the filters that make up the new compound filter need to be of the same item type. Or you can select the compound filter and create a new simple filter under it. On the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. 2. the Filter for property is specified and you cannot change it. 5. and click New. Click OK. 4. drag one or more simple filters into the compound filter. page 136 • Customizing the Software: An Overview. 3. do not open Filter Manager and make changes to filters in that utility also. and click OK. all of the simple filters making up a compound filter can be of type Equipment: Mechanical. 6. because all of the simple filters under one compound filter must be of the same item type. if wanted.

From the shortcut menu. Right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of the Drawing view. select Add Filter. Tips • If you click Browse. You can create and then select that filter for the view.Working with Drawings: An Overview Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View 1. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. Click OK to apply the filter to the Drawing view. page 137. On the Add Filter Tab dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 83 Filter Tab Cut Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. page 138 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For more information. As long as the cut filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. the Cut command allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view and place it on the Clipboard. 3. page 136 or Create a Compound Filter. too. see Create a Simple Filter. you must right-click the filter tab area and select Use Alternate Symbology. type a filter name. • Notes • To define a new filter. You can choose alternate symbology on this dialog box. • Related Topics • Customizing the Software: An Overview. you can choose a filter from the Select Filter dialog box. 4. 2. page 91 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. In order for your alternate symbology to affect the Drawing view. click New on the Select Filter dialog box. You can see the properties of a filter by selecting it in the Select Filter dialog box and clicking Properties. Click OK.

The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 139 . page 138 Filter Tab Paste Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. the Copy command allows you to place a filter tab from the Drawing view onto the Clipboard. You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. You must have placed a filter tab on the Clipboard in order for this command to be available. page 138 Filter Tab Delete Command Allows you to remove a filter tab from the Drawing view. the Paste command allows you to place a filter tab from the Clipboard onto the Drawing view. As long as the copied filter tab remains on the Clipboard you can reapply the filter by using the Paste command on the shortcut menu. Note • You must select a filter tab in order for this command to be available. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view.Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Copy Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view.

Working with Drawings: An Overview Filter Tab Use Alternate Symbology Command Applies any alternate symbology you defined for a filter tab on the Add Filter or Properties dialog box. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. Note • The Filter Tab shortcut menu opens when you right-click the filter tab area at the bottom of a Drawing view. page 138 Filter Tab Properties Command Available on the Filter Tab shortcut menu. which allows you to edit the options for the selected drawing filter. page 138 140 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. this command opens the Properties dialog box. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

Also. These indicators appear in your drawing as soon as an inconsistency occurs in the design. The plant model is the computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 141 . Options Manager or Rules Manager. you can monitor any inconsistencies in your design by reviewing the inconsistency indicators. SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central.ini. One key feature of SmartPlant P&ID is using catalogs to create instances of components within the plant model. By manipulating model views. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes the plant model. You can print the drawing. you can generate reports to help you keep track of information in the drawing. or a report. Assemblies appear as symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view so that you can place them exactly as you place other symbols in your drawing. You can resolve inconsistencies using solutions from the Consistency Check dialog box. cannot establish a connection with the database on the server. you can easily perform the tasks required to create a detailed plant model. and instrumentation from Catalog Explorer or the stockpile into graphical representations of your plant model in the drawing. unified data structure that represents the plant model. you can annotate your drawing with labels as you design the drawing. Format Manager. The standard modeling environment lets you place items from the catalog into the appropriate model views. you can save the group of items as an assembly. you can add values for various properties of each item after you place it in your drawing. for example. After you finish the drawing. If you repeatedly place particular groups of items. too. In the Properties window. you can organize the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data.log is Error Problem:Common::GetDatabasePathAndServerLocS:\SmartPid\bin\ SmartPlant. for example Filter Manager. Note • When SmartPlant P&ID or any associated stand-alone application. and the error message in SPError.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview With SmartPlant® P&ID. you can generate order lists for the components in the drawing. Also. including all plant components and their relationships. a table. solve the error by making sure your internet options are set to allow internet access using a proxy server and also to bypass the proxy server for intranet addresses. You can place components such as equipment. As you work on your drawing. A view can be a schematic drawing. piping.

page 334 • Open a New Drawing View.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Create an Assembly. page 317 142 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 286 • Define a New Engineering Data Editor View. page 35 • Print a Drawing. page 365 • Review an Inconsistency. page 51 • Generate a Report.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Understanding Database Constraints The following database constraints improve the integrity of the data associated with your design. Foreign Key in conjunction with Not Null . Either of these objects can be null.Enforce all subclass and one-toone relationships. exists in the table referenced by the foreign key.Enforces group relationships. • Check . Another candidate for a Check constraint is the enforcement of certain values for one or more items. • • The constraints so far described serve to enforce relationship integrity. A Check constraint is defined to enforce this condition by using comparisons and exclusions. unless it is null. such as monitoring conditions on multiple items. but does not allow null values to persist. For example. invalid null or zeroes assigned to properties are tested against Check constraints. already exists in the database or is created during your transaction.Insures that the corresponding value. Since the relationship. such as the case to model item relationship. such as the pairing of OPCs. the constraints are satisfied without changing the scope of your transaction. • Foreign Key . the object and the foreign key it points to. but not both of them. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above.Used for more complex data integrity controls. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 143 . such as the plant item to plant group relationship. but does not allow null values to persist and requires that all values be unique. For example. Foreign Key with Not Null and Unique . History records can pertain to either a drawing or the model. This type of constraint is used to enforce logical relationships. This constraint is similar to the Foreign Key constraint described above.

assemblies. like Delete. Many manipulation commands. Or. As you pause on items in a drawing. Selecting Single Items To select an item. the following things happen: • The item changes to the selection color. When you select an individual item. 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can use the Select Tool on the main toolbar. and you can select item groups. When you click the Select Tool. selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing. or embedded or linked objects. you can click the Select Tool and then drag to fence items. You can construct a select set using the Engineering Data Editor in this way. Although you can select more than one item at a time. When an item is highlighted. you can click to select it. Copy. such as end points and center points. If you select multiple items in the Engineering Data Editor. Move. • • When you select multiple items or grouped items. the items change to the selection color. You can also select drawing items by first selecting them in the Engineering Data Editor. if they reside there. If the item is linked or embedded into the current drawing. can act upon all items in the select set. and so forth. the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone . click the Select Tool on the main toolbar. labels. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a selected item. Selecting Multiple Items and then You can select more than one item at a time by clicking Select Tool holding Shift or Ctrl as you click the items that you want to select. Handles allow you to directly modify the item. such as dragging a handle to change the shape of the item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview To select an item. The handles of the item appear if the item has handles. only one item can have handles at a time. You can use the Select Tool ribbon to choose if you want to select only items completely enclosed by the fence or any item that is partly enclosed by the fence. The corresponding items are selected in the Drawing view if they reside in the active drawing. valves. You can change the selection color with the Options command on the Tools menu. and Rotate. the items appear in the indicator at the end: highlight color. You can select pipe routes. these items are also selected in the active drawing. equipment.

you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. page 218 • Select an Item. page 218 • Select an Item. the Select Tool ribbon is displayed. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. and manipulate items. you select it in Catalog Explorer or the stockpile. Or. you can choose single items from that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 145 . After placement. you can click any empty point on the drawing. page 147 Select Tool Command Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select. You cannot select more than one item for placement in a drawing at a time. Selecting Items for Placement To place an item in a drawing. you can select another item or press Esc to quit placement mode. page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. Then you click to select the position in the drawing to place the item. A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color in the Drawing view. Related Topics • Move an Item With the Select Tool. Canceling the Selection of Items To cancel selection of an item or group of items. While the Select Tool is active.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Whenever you have constructed a select set. modify.

page 149 146 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . pause the pointer over an option and read the ToolTip.Specifies that symbols are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to individual elements in a symbol. page 147 • Select Tool Command.Specifies that individual elements. page 194 • Place an Item from Catalog Explorer. page 145 Configuration (PickQuick) Tool In addition to using the manipulation handles to orient an item after you place it. page 254 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. and allows you to select the proper orientation for the item. which make up symbols.Specifies that items both overlapped by the fence and inside the fence are selected. Inside . Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. if it is available for the selected item.Specifies that items inside the fence are selected. when you are placing them. page 66 • Place an Item from the Stockpile.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Tool Ribbon Appears when nothing is selected. page 264 • Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Related Topics • Place a Flow Arrow. After you select an item. page 248 • Move an Item With the Select Tool. such as check valves or flow arrows or other inline items. are recognized in the locate zone as opposed to the whole symbol. the Select Tool ribbon is replaced with a ribbon for editing the selected item. page 218 • Select an Item. Pausing after you drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing activates the Configuration tool. Overlapping . Bottom Up . you can use PickQuick to select the orientation of some items. Note • To find out the name of an option on the ribbon. Top Down .

they are selected in the Engineering Data Editor. hold Shift or Ctrl and click each item. click it. 3. page 148 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. You can build up a select set using this method. To select all items in a drawing. To select one of several overlapping items. Select another item without holding Shift or Ctrl. Do one of the following: • • • • . If they reside in the active drawing. page 144 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 147 . click the Select Tool: 2. selectable items are highlighted as you pass the pointer over them. drag to fence the objects. press Ctrl + A or click Edit > Select All. use PickQuick. To clear the selection of an item or items. Also.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item 1. Right-click in an empty portion of the drawing. • • • Related Topics Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. To select more than one item. On the main toolbar. do one of the following: • • • • Click in an empty portion of the drawing. Notes • When the Select Tool is active. Click Tools > Options to change the item highlight and selection colors and locate and break-away tolerances. to accomplish the same thing. To clear the selection of one item and leave other items selected. right-click a blank area in the drawing and click Select All on the shortcut menu. To select one item. click to select it. click the item while holding Shift or Ctrl. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. too. To select more than one item at once. you can select items in the Engineering Data Editor. or.

page 149 Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. For more information. When the pointer appears with ellipses. PickQuick also helps you place items when multiple possible placement configurations exist. When the item that you want to select is highlighted. 2. to highlight the corresponding items. On the PickQuick toolbar. The first item is highlighted. which appears near the pointer. 4. click. move the pointer over the numbered PickQuick buttons. page 144 148 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. 3. see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Pause the pointer over the item that you want to select. without clicking. Note • PickQuick helps you to select items that overlap each other. The second item is highlighted. click the corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar.

Pause until ellipses appear beside the pointer: . When the appropriate orientation is displayed. 4. Note • You can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing or press Esc to close the Configuration toolbar. Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool 1. Move the pointer over each toolbar button to preview the available orientations. 5. Click to display the Configuration toolbar near the pointer. page 146 • Navigating in the Software: An Overview. 3. click the corresponding button on the Configuration toolbar to place the item in that orientation. page 14 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 149 . 2. or you can close it by clicking X in the upper right corner of the toolbar. Drag the item to the appropriate position on the line or equipment.

You can use the grid if you want the items to line up at regular intervals in the drawing. Related Topics • Change the Properties of a Drawing View. You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. Note • You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. solid grid lines. You can specify the increment settings on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box. they do not appear when you print the drawing. or coarse levels. which opens when you click View > Properties. page 33 Show Grid Command View > Show Grid Displays a grid so that you can place items with precision. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. page 150 • Set Document Properties. The grid is not considered part of the drawing and does not print. To view grid lines at a finer level. Note • You do not have to display the grid in order to snap items to it.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview The grid and its grid lines allow you to place items in the drawing by aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. medium. page 116 • View Document Properties. When you click View > Snap grid. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine. set the style to dynamic and adjust the density. The grid is an set of imaginary lines in the drawing. You can view the grid by clicking View > Show grid. The grid lines for a dynamic grid move as you zoom in or out in a view. Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker. The grid lines appear at common major measurement increments. page 115 150 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

When you set the Snap grid option. Grid lines do not print. Note • You can change the grid display by setting options on the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Snap Grid Command View > Snap Grid Aligns items with the grid. page 115 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 151 . Related Topics • Placing Items on a Grid: An Overview. set the style to Dynamic and adjust the grid line width with the Density control. page 150 • Set Document Properties. page 116 • View Document Properties. To view grid lines at a finer level. items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. which opens when you click View > Properties. The grid is a set of lines in the drawing background that helps you align items.

Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. You also place equipment components in drawings. However.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Equipment: An Overview You can place various types of equipment in your drawing. As you place equipment components. When you place an equipment component. page 164 • Place Equipment. As a group. you or your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as needed for your plant. and reactors. such as nozzles and trays. you can only associate an equipment component with a single piece of equipment. the component is associated with the last selected or highlighted piece of equipment. page 154 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Equipment components are items associated with pieces of equipment. such as towers. For example. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside the piece of equipment. and nozzles can be flagged for placement outside the piece of equipment. boilers. However. Depending on the rules defined for the equipment or equipment component. the components move when you move the equipment. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. creating an equipment group. you can have limits to the possible placements for the equipment. The software includes a standard group of equipment and equipment component symbols. heat exchangers. page 153 • Place Multiple Representations.

Position the item and release to place it. If you want the nozzle opening facing to the right. Notes • After you place items. In other words. 4. you can mirror. In the Properties window. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 153 . • Tip • You can assign heat tracing to equipment. Flanged Nozzle-Internal. Or. and Pump Nozzle-Internal can all be placed internally (for example. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. enter values for the equipment properties in the appropriate rows in the table. the opening of the nozzle will be placed in the direction that you approach the tank during placement. in a tank). page 244 Move an Item Using the Move Button.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place Equipment 1. For internal placement of equipment. page 242 Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. page 219 • If the Properties window is not displayed. or move most items using their component handles. For more information. see Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. you can display it by selecting the item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. you can click the item in the Catalog Explorer list view and then click the appropriate point in the drawing to place the item. you drag the nozzle to the interior of a tank and place it. Nozzle-Internal. rotate. You can use the same steps for placing equipment. click the equipment that you want to place. 2. Press Esc to quit placement mode. see Assign Heat Tracing. Tip In addition. For more information. approach the tank from the right when placing the nozzle. 3. In the Catalog Explorer list view.

You can choose a filter from the list using the Engineering Data Editor. page 408 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Save your work and exit the drawing. you can do the following. Attach the nozzle to the equipment that you want it related to. While holding down the Alt key.Vessels). Select the nozzle. 1. drag the nozzle an arbitrary distance away from the equipment. Tip A multiple representation allows the depiction of an item from another drawing in a detailed or alternate view. Select a filter that best describes the type of item you want to represent (for example. 2. Display the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor. 154 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 152 • Place Multiple Representations 1. You can think of a multiple representation as a child item associated with the parent item that already exists in another drawing. 4. Open the drawing that is a target for your multiple representation (parent-child representations) of an item. Open a drawing and place an item of equipment. 3. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If you need to place a nozzle so that it is associated with equipment but not attached to it. Be sure the drawing used in step 1 is closed. page 215 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. 3. • Tips • You can find the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor by clicking the Other Drawings button . Related Topics Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. Equipment .

You are permitted only a single representation of an item in any one drawing. In the Engineering Data Editor. be aware that multiple representations are constrained because of claiming and moving drawings between projects and the Plant. right-click the icon at the far left of the parent item. 5. • 6. Select Place Multiple Representation from the shortcut menu. Notes • You can use the Replace command or the Find and Replace dialog box to replace a multiple representation symbol providing the definition attributes for the source (parent) and target (child) are identical. • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. page 152 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. 7. page 144 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 155 . If you are working in a project. Equipment SubClass. and Equipment Type. Click the location in the drawing where you need to place the multiple representation. The definition attributes are Equipment Class.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can also open a tabular view of your target drawing in the Design window by clicking Window > New > Engineering Data Editor.

156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can use these vertex handles to move. the two pipe runs are tested for compatibility. Lines consist of a series of line segments. Similarly. you can manipulate all lines by using the same basic procedures. Line Connectivity When a new pipe run is placed such that it connects to existing pipe runs at either end. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of an existing connector. the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually merged with the existing connector. the properties of the surviving pipe run are retained and the others are lost. Of course when two pipe runs with differing properties are joined into one. they are automatically joined together. The symbol placement command creates a new line when an inline component is placed directly up against an existing nozzle or other inline component. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that belongs to an existing pipe run. the new pipe run is automatically joined with the existing pipe run. If they pass the property criteria. If two pipe runs have different properties. You can add vertices to add segments to the line using the commands on the Line Routing ribbon. they are not automatically joined together.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Routing Lines: An Overview Whether you are routing pipe or signal lines. the Join Runs command is still available for this purpose. You can also use this menu to construct select sets of pipe runs. too. those pipe runs are automatically joined together if they have the same properties. then the pipe run must be broken. The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both placement and modification of connectors. Right-click a line and choose from several commands. After you select a type of line route from the Catalog Explorer list view. The zero length pipe run that gets created when one inline component is placed directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the existing pipe run. use the commands on the Line Routing ribbon to help construct or modify the line. reroute. The pipe run created in this way has a zero length connector that attaches the two symbols. the properties for pipe runs with zero length connectors need not match. if you must define two different properties for two parts of a single pipe run. represented by black squares or dots. You use this menu to break runs or join runs. or connect lines. The software also provides a shortcut menu associated with lines. at each segment vertex along the line route. If you want them joined together. Pipe runs that only have zero length connectors are aggressively joined up with the pipe runs they attach to. The software places handles. At the time that the connection is made. The Break Run command is still available for this purpose.

Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. Reducers are always located at the end of a pipe run and never in the middle. instead of the usual constraint of horizontal or vertical line routing. page 164 • Branch to an Existing Line. page 162 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. page 165 • Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. it remains there for the current design session unless you move it again.Allows you to route lines in any direction. page 220 • Start a Line in Free Space. Placing a pipe run that branches off of an existing pipe run does not cause them to be joined together.Causes the software to insert line segments instead of routing new lines or instead of moving existing lines. page 161 • Move a Line. Placing a new pipe run that connects to a reducer does not cause the pipe runs to be joined. Alter Segment . Related Topics Branch from an Existing Line. page 160 • Start a Line in Free Space. page 161 • Move a Line. You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main toolbar. but you can use it for any line routing. page 220 • Start a Line from a Connect Point. page 162 • Break a Pipe Run.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Pipe runs always consist of a linear sequence of members and never include any branches. page 159 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 157 . Insert Segment . This procedure is usually popular with signal and utility lines. page 159 Line Routing Ribbon Appears when you select a line element from the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an existing line in a drawing. Note • All of the above information about pipe runs also applies to signal runs.

5. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. 2. • Tip You can click an empty point in the drawing to start the line. too. When the line is complete.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Route a Line 1. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Tip • You can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times. In the Catalog Explorer list view select the line that you want to place. Click a connect point on an item in the drawing. right-click to confirm the placement. Click to place the vertex at the next point in the line. 3. Tips • This action displays the Line Routing ribbon and starts line placement mode. • 4. Continue clicking to place the vertices of the line in the drawing. page 156 158 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Tip Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 159 . • 3. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. click the connect point of the appropriate item to place the line. Click the location for each vertex of the line. including the termination point. 4. right-click to place the line. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Notes • You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. Tip • If you want to route the line to a connect point of an existing item.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line in Free Space 1. If the Properties window does not appear. 2. click the starting point for the line route. In the drawing. click the line that you want to place. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor. When you complete the line route.

Or. page 156 160 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . click the type of line that you want to place. If the Properties window is not displayed. 4. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. right-click to place the line. In the Catalog Explorer list view. click the connect point from which you want to start routing your line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Start a Line from a Connect Point 1. You can define values for the properties of a line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. In the drawing. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. Notes • To stop placing lines in the drawing. When you complete the line route. press Esc to quit line placement mode. 3. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. Click the location for each vertex of the line route. 2.

2. page 165. • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. 3. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 161 . Notes • The line remains selected until you click another item or command. For more information. see Break a Pipe Run. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. select the existing line that you want to insert a segment into. For more information. • . When the pointer turns into a double arrow to the appropriate location. page 156 Insert a Vertex into an Existing Line 1. see Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line. page 161. The resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. You can also break a line at a point. You can join two pipe runs that have different property values. click Insert Segment Tip Instead of clicking Insert Segment. Drag the selected line to the new position. You can change values for properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. If the Properties window is not displayed.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line 1. 3. In the drawing. 2. Notes • . Select the line that you want to add a vertex to. press Alt and drag the new vertex You can also insert line segments into an existing line. On the Line Routing ribbon. Press Esc to stop adding segments. Point near the center of the line where you want the new vertex. you can hold Shift while moving a line to insert segments.

If the Properties window is not displayed. You can extend a line to an existing line to create another branch point. press Esc to quit line placement mode. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. In the Catalog Explorer list view. 2. In the drawing. 3. you can display it by selecting the line and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. 2. Click to place each vertex of the line branch. In the drawing. click a point on an existing line route to begin placing the branch.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Branch from an Existing Line 1. Or. click the type of line that you want to place. 3. To complete the line route. When you complete the line. Or. Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. press Esc to quit line placement mode. click the starting point for the branch. To stop placing lines in the drawing. page 156 Branch to an Existing Line 1. 4. Notes • Press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. To stop placing lines in the drawing. or a connect point on an item in the drawing. • • • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. a point on an existing line. click the type of line that you want to place. right-click to place it. click a point on the existing line where you want to end the branch. you can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the last step above. • • 162 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can escape placement mode by right-clicking two more times after the final right-click in the last step above. Notes • The starting point for a branch can be a point in free space. 4. In the Catalog Explorer list view. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window.

If the Properties window is not displayed. Then on the same line. see Scale a Parametric Item. You can resize the gap by dragging the parametric handles. Note • Gaps are parametric symbols. click the position for one side of the gap. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 163 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. page 156 Add a Manual Gap to a Line 1. 2. page 239. Select the appropriate gap from the Catalog Explorer. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. 3. For more information on resizing parametric symbols. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. On the line. click the position for the other side of the gap.

page 152 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. Select list values are defined in Data Dictionary Manager. • • Related Topics Assign Heat Tracing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign Heat Tracing 1. page 156 • 164 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 164 • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. You choose the HT Medium and HT Requirement properties from select lists. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. or instrument that you want to specify heat tracing for. Select the equipment. HT Medium Temp. pipe run. In the Properties window. You choose the units for the HT Medium Temp property when you assign the temperature value. specify values for the HT Medium. page 258 • Placing Equipment: An Overview. and HT Requirement properties. Tips • If you have already specified insulation properties for the item. 2. Format Manager contains definitions for temperature units. If you assign heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties. then you cannot subsequently assign heat tracing properties. piping component.

click the line at the point you want the break it.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break Run Command Line Shortcut Menu > Break Run Enables you to break a pipe run at an arbitrary location. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 • Break a Pipe Run 1. If the Properties window is not displayed. then you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties. On the shortcut menu. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 165 . click the point where you want to break the run. 2. Related Topics Break a Pipe Run. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. Tip • The software breaks the selected pipe run into two separate runs at the selected point. In the drawing. right-click the pipe run that you want to break. • Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs. 3. In the drawing. click Break Runs. page 165 • Routing Lines: An Overview. Notes • You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking it and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window.

the resulting pipe run has the properties of the pipe run that you selected first. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. For information about breaking runs. see Break a Pipe Run. click the second pipe run to join the two runs. You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking the pipe run and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. page 166 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 165. In the drawing. 2. In the drawing. On the shortcut menu. After selecting this command from the Line shortcut menu. 3. click on the line that you want to join to the selected line. Notes • If you join two pipe runs with different properties. page 156 Join Pipe Runs 1. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Join Runs Command Line Shortcut Menu > Join Runs Enables you to join two lines together into one pipe run. right-click the first pipe run that you want to join. click Join Runs. If the Properties window does not appear. page 156 166 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Join Pipe Runs.

flanges. 2. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. the valve automatically orients itself vertically. page 164 • Place a Piping Component. In the Properties window. piping components automatically orient themselves when you drag them near an existing pipe segment. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 167 . Your plant administrator can modify the relationships between piping components and piping in Rule Manager. reducers. Generally. or PickQuick. Drag the item to the appropriate pipe run in the drawing. However. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols in Catalog Manager as needed. page 167 Place a Piping Component 1. Position the item and release. if you drag a horizontal valve to a vertical pipe. enter values for the properties of the piping component in the appropriate rows in the table. the software automatically creates a relationship between the pipe route and the component to create a pipe run. When you move the pipe run. piping components are connected with lines. 3. to review the possible placements for the component and select a final orientation for the item. the pipe route and the associated piping components both move. Piping components include valves. Tip • If the Properties window does not appear. you can use the Configuration tool.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Piping Components: An Overview Piping components are graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. you can display it by selecting the component and then selecting Edit > Properties. As you place piping components. 4. The software includes a standard group of piping component symbols. If several possible orientations exist for the piping component. Related Topics • Assign Heat Tracing. In the Catalog Explorer list view. For example. and strainers. click the piping component that you want to place. In drawings.

1. If you want to be able to place two inline components an arbitrary distance apart. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Then even if you drag the component away from the line. If you place a piping component when a pipe segment is not highlighted. you must drag one off of the segment to disconnect it and then move it back to get the connect points attached. or the pointer passes over runs while you are in placement mode. you can use the Configuration tool. Place the first component in the line. If the components are already close to each other but not connected at coincident connect points. While holding down the Alt key. the pipe run is highlighted. If the item that you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. page 167 168 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • If you want to move a piping component but preserve its connection to the pipe run. drag one component along the line away from the other leaving the desired distance between the two. you can use the Alt key as you drag the component. do the following. the line routes itself so as to preserve its connection to the component. 2. Place the second component into the line and connected to the connect point of the first component on the end that you want to attach to.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • As you drag piping components over a pipe run. the piping component is placed in free space if the placement rules allow the action. page 156 • Using Piping Components: An Overview. regardless of minimum distance settings in Options Manager. or PickQuick to select the appropriate placement for the item. You can see that the connect points are actually joined by the black rectangle in the Drawing view: • • 3.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview The Piping Specification utility works with PDS 3D or SmartPlant 3D to validate the piping materials class with the temperatures. The Service Limits validation requires at least one complete temperature-pressure pair from among design. see Options Manager Help. The database tables and library files in the 3D product provide source information for the validation and search. and diameters assigned to the pipe run and to search commodity codes and fabrication categories for piping components. this verification occurs each time that you modify either the Piping Materials Class or a temperature – pressure pair in the process case data of the pipe run. This warning appears in the design software by appending an error string to the name of the PMC.l. For more information about modifying the PipeSpec settings.dll.ForeignCalc program ID. pdpjsx. starts the Piping Specification utility and triggers the commodity code and fabrication category lookups when a nominal diameter is changed.us_pjstb. which is activated by assigned settings in Options Manager.l. The service limits validation and automatic commodity code lookup can be disabled simultaneously using a switch in Options Manager.dll files .dll. pdpjs. alternate design.t . see Data Dictionary Manager Help. PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec • • • • pd schema . and ValidateServiceLimits.dll.l. If any temperature-pressure pair violates the service limits of the selected Piping Materials Class. and alternate operating cases. the ValidateNomDiam. For more information about assigning program IDs. which is assigned to the Nominal Diameter property. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 169 .dll Performing Service Limits Validation The Piping Specification utility verifies that the temperatures and pressures assigned to a pipe run comply with the service limits associated with the selected Piping Materials Class.pdtable_102 table ra schema . In continuous validation mode. and us_pjstb. us_pjstb. a warning displays the appropriate pairs.pdtable_201 and pdtable_202 tables library files .PipeSpec. pressures.r. In Data Dictionary Manager. operating.

Alternate Design. and the process case temperatures on the pipe run are ignored for the lookup. The PipeSpec utility uses process case temperatures of the run during the commodity code lookup only if the code for that component has a maximum temperature limit value in the 3D database. in PDS 3D. If not. that the PMC of the pipe run must be populated and comply with service limits. The minimum requirements to cause a lookup are that the piping component must be in a pipe run.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication Category Look Up The Piping Specification utility looks up the Commodity Code and Fabrication Category properties of inline piping components. Note • The units for the PDS 3D maximum temperature are those specified in Options Manager. this unique name is the AABBCC Code property. 170 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . In the continuous validation mode. The Commodity Name is a unique name for every symbol. If a maximum temperature exists for that component. then the lookup is restricted to that particular component. then a value of zero Deg-K is assumed for each of the unspecified temperatures. If any temperature values for the pipe run are unspecified. this lookup occurs each time the Piping Materials Class or any of the four case Max temperatures (Design. but if the modification occurs on a property of a pipe run. and that the nominal diameter of the piping component must be specified. If the modification occurs on a property of a piping component. In PDS 3D. a value of -9999 for maximum temperature in pdtable_202 indicates a null value. then the utility returns a commodity code only if all of the records have the same code value. SmartPlant symbols are assigned the same AABBCC Code properties in Catalog Manager. If multiple records are obtained in the lookup. A relationship between the fabrication category and the commodity name can be defined in the 3D databases. then the lookup insures this value is larger than all of the process case temperatures assigned to the pipe run in which the piping component resides. Operating. For example. then the lookup encompasses every piping component on that run. then the Commodity Code property displays an error message. If the PMC is assigned but does not comply with the service limits. Validation also occurs each time the Option Code or Nominal Diameter of the component is modified. and Alternate Operating) are modified on the pipe run. an error is recorded in the error-log file with the appropriate message. The Fabrication Category property of inline piping components is a select-listed property in SmartPlant P&ID.

Error messages help you identify the cause of failure when the utility does not complete the tasks as expected. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. For example. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. Note • Error messages are placed in the PipeSpecError. you can refer to the SmartPlant P&ID Installation Guide by clicking Help > Printable Guides. Choose one. and depending on the settings in Options Manager.log file in the directory assigned to the TEMP environment variable. The PipeSpec utility uses the entries in the Short Value box of the Option Code list to obtain the Option Code used in the PDS 3D database tables. the missing properties are listed in the log file. and allows you to choose a PMC from a piping specification.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Similarly. if minimum requirements are not met for the lookup. Short Value for the Option Code select list contains the PDS 3D indices corresponding to the appropriate Option Code text in SmartPlant P&ID. For more information about Piping Specification configuration. page 172 Piping Specifications Dialog Box Opens when you click the Calc button for the Piping Materials Class property (PMC) for a pipe run in the Properties window. page 173 • Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. Piping materials class . page 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 171 .Lists the PMCs in your piping specification. property validation for piping segments and inline components is run. the Option Code property is a select list of text values in SmartPlant P&ID. while it is a set of code numbers or indices in PDS 3D. Related Topics • Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. This can include checking service limits. This functionality is not available unless the proper settings are defined in Options Manager and the applicable Program IDs are assigned in Data Dictionary Manager.

Given the appropriate settings in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. you can manually assign commodity codes to inline components. see those Help files. then the commodity code property becomes Not In Spec.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. 3. 4. • 2. choose the appropriate PMC from the list and click OK. Click the Calc button . and the PipeSpec utility looks up accepted diameters and validates the assignment. Select the Piping Materials Class property for the pipe run in the Properties window. For more information. page 169 172 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . respectively. Maximum Design Pressure. On the Piping Specifications dialog box. 1. Select the pipe run. If you choose temperature-pressure limits for process cases that do not agree with the assigned PMC. then the error Service Limits Error is added to the PMC for the run. for instance. For more information. Notes • If you subsequently assign nominal diameters to inline valves or other components. including inline components. Tip • Based on the chosen PMC and other assigned properties. the PipeSpec utility copies properties and checks limits in the entire run. • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. page 173. such as Nominal Diameter. If you choose a diameter. and so forth. see Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec. SmartPlant P&ID assigns commodity codes and fabrication categories to them that correspond to the PMC of the pipe run and the specifications in your 3D databases. that does not exist for the assigned PMC. Maximum Design Temperature.

you can still click the Calc button for the Commodity Code property and choose a code. but so it the Fabrication Category property for the inline components. For information about the settings required for continuous service limits validation. PipeSpecError. see Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec. page 172. define the Nominal Piping Diameter property for the component. not only is the commodity code defined automatically. 1. or you can open the error log.log. However this does not verify that the component agrees with a piping specification. For more information about the error log. respectively. see Options Manager Help. if properties have not been assigned as expected. if the relationship is defined in your 3D database. then a pipe run with temperature-pressure limits that do not agree with its PMC produces the error Error in PMC in the commodity code for an inline component. With continuous validation. In the Properties window. click Related Topics. For more information. Select an inline component that belongs to a pipe run whose piping material class has been defined. Tip • You can verify that a commodity code and fabrication category have been assigned in the Properties window. see those Help files. page 169 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 173 . • • • Related Topics • Using the PipeSpec Utility: An Overview. Notes • If continuous validation is turned on for the PipeSpec utility. For more information on assigning a PMC. • 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec Important The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager. given that the relationship exists in the 3D databases. Adding or changing the option code can change the commodity code. If continuous validation is not activated but other appropriate settings and program IDs are assigned.

The software includes a standard group of instrument and instrument loop symbols. the pipe segment appears selected. Instrument Loops You can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. and other instrument components. in a plant process. these instruments monitor and control inline instruments. level gauges. Typically. the instrument is placed in free space. Related Topics Add Instruments to a Loop. Signal lines are intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. or electrical switches. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. Inline instruments include instrument valves. flow controllers. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. Inline Instruments Inline instruments are components that you can insert into a piping segment. your plant administrator can change and add to these symbols as your plant requires. inline instruments. and pressure regulators.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Placing Instrumentation: An Overview You can place various types of instrumentation in your drawing. such as flow or temperature. and system functions such as digital control stations or computers. Offline Instruments Offline instruments are components that you do not insert into a piping segment. such as orifice plates. flow controllers. page 164 • Place an Inline Instrument. Instruments are devices used directly or indirectly to measure or control a variable. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. such as orifice plates. however. computing devices. and piping. Instruments can be items such as flow control elements. such as pressure regulator valves. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. Instruments loops are a group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can transfer from one function to the next to measure and control a process variable. As you drag inline instruments over a pipe segment. Offline instruments include flow controllers. flow indicators. page 178 • Assign Heat Tracing. page 180 • 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

specify properties of the inline instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. page 178 • Place an Inline Instrument. The percent character. page 180 Place an Inline Instrument 1. page 177 • Remove an Instrument from a Loop. If the item you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other items. If you want to display all available loop tags. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 175 .Allows you to type in descriptors to display the available loop tags. you could type %F% in the Search for box. is a wildcard. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile. 4. 2. page 175 • Place an Offline Instrument. Position the item and release it. Notes • As you drag inline instruments over a pipe run. Search Now . or PickQuick. Drag the item to the appropriate line in the drawing. the instrument is placed in free space if rules defined in Rule Manager allow such a placement. %. simply type %. you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected. limited by parameters that you enter here.. if you want to list only loop tags that contain the letter F.. you can use the Configuration tool.) button next to the loop tag cell. 3. click the inline instrument that you want to place. This dialog box opens when you click the ellipses (. to select the appropriate placement for the item. Search for .Finds and displays the loop tags that match the criteria in the Search for box. You can choose a tag from the main window and click OK in order to assign the tag to the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. Tip • If the Properties window is not visible. the pipe run appears selected.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window) Allows you to search for and specify the loop tag for the item whose properties currently appear in the Properties window. For example. Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. In the Properties window.

When a value for one of the affected attributes changes on the pipe run. This is configurable by adding the ProgID called UpdInlineCompProp. This copying behavior is based upon the pipe run properties that should have their values copied to the in-line components. You must specify that particular validation id in order to use the functionality. • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. MaterialOfConstClass. The way this works with the attributes that have that ID is that the software is watching the pipe run and the inline components. page 174 • Routing Lines: An Overview. By keeping the pointer either above or below the piping. if the pointer is below the pipe run. updating the pipe run will not affect the inline component. page 156 176 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and ScheduleOrThickness. Nominal diameter is also included although it does not have that particular Validation ID specified. and it was previously equivalent to the value on the inline component. you can decide the orientation for the heat tracing on the inline instrument at placement time. Validation takes place between the pipe run and the inline components on that pipe run with the result that you may see some properties values being copied from the pipe run to the inline component.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • While placing an inline instrument on a pipe run with associated heat tracing. the routine UpdInlineCompProp. then the heat tracing appears above the instrument and vice versa – regardless of the heat tracing orientation on the piping. They are CleaningReqmts.ForeignCalc in the Validation ID field for the PipeRun Property. CoatingReqmts. then an update to the pipe run will update the inline component. Also. Notice the only attributes that are delivered with this validation ID. If the values were different. You may determine which properties should be copied. You can use Data Dictionary Manager to sort the properties by Validation ID using the Piperun table.ForeignCalc is not delivered as part of our sample validation. It has the one involved in the pipe spec access.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Offline Instrument 1. you can connect them to piping segments or inline instruments using signal lines. In the Properties window. you can escape placement mode by rightclicking. page 215 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. For more information. Position the item and release to place it. page 164. see Assign Heat Tracing. you can mirror. enter values for the properties of the instrument in the appropriate rows in the table. 3. 4. After you place items. Tip You can click an item from Catalog Explorer and then place it by clicking the appropriate location in your drawing. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing. or move them. • Notes • If you place an offline instrument over an existing signal line. • Tips • If the Properties window is not visible. In the Catalog Explorer list view. You can assign heat tracing to offline instruments. After you place offline instruments. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Or. the software inserts the offline instrument in the signal line. click the offline instrument that you want to place. rotate. Press Esc to quit placement mode. page 174 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 177 . just as piping components are inserted into pipe runs. then you can display it by selecting the instrument and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. 2. too.

3. Define properties for the loop by entering values in the Properties window. 6. The software automatically generates a unique item tag for the instrument. page 265. clear selection of the instrument and then select it again. you can create a customized loop report to generate lists of items in specific loops in your drawing or plant. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor to display elements of the loop.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Add Instruments to a Loop 1. • • • • • • 178 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . After you create instrument loops. From the Catalog Explorer tree view Loops node. 8. and you can either place instruments then create the loop or create the loop and assign instruments to it as you place them. Choose the appropriate loop from the resulting list. you do not need to place the loop symbol in the drawing itself to create an occurrence. The software automatically generates an item tag when you enter a tag suffix. or you can click the Calculation button next to the Loop Tag box in the Properties window. Select Send to Drawing Stockpile or Send to Stockpile from the shortcut menu. placing the loop in the stockpile adds the loop to the model. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. Select the item tag of the loop from the Loop Tag select list in the Properties window. You can assign a group of instruments and other elements to a loop by creating a select set of them and assigning the correct loop tag for the set. If you need to refresh the instrument Loop Tag Suffix display in the Properties window. 4. Click Search Now. Select the item that you want to associate with the instrument loop. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. enter characters in the Search for box in order to display the available loop tags. On the Loop Tag dialog box. 2. You can assign the Loop Tag qualifier to instruments that you have already placed in your drawing or that reside in the stockpile. Instead. Since loops are logical collections of instruments rather than physical groupings. 7. Moving the instrument loop itself to another stockpile has special limitations. Instrument loops normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. right-click the instrument loop that you want to place. 5. Notes • Selecting the item tag of the loop for an instrument triggers the Item Tag Validation program.

page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. 2. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. page 331 • Loop Tag Dialog Box (Properties Window). page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. page 175 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. Related Topics Generating Reports: An Overview. page 83 • Updating Associated Instruments with Loop Properties (Properties Window) 1. Click OK. you can display it by selecting the instrument or loop and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 179 . Click in a checkbox to select and update the instrument associated to the displayed loop.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • If the Properties window is not visible. page 38 • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. page 174 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview.

In the drawing. select the item or items in the drawing. In the Properties window. If the Properties window is not visible. You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing. too. validation automatically creates an instrument item tag. you can display it by selecting the item and then clicking Edit > Properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Remove an Instrument from a Loop 1. the instrument item tag remains the same until the instrument is assigned to a new loop. • • • Related Topics • Placing Instrumentation: An Overview. The Delete command is not carried out if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. remove the value for the Loop Tag property for the selection. page 174 180 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . select the item or items that you want to remove from the loop. If you remove the loop tag property. Notes • When an instrument is assigned to a loop. You can remove an instrument from a loop by deleting the item from the model. 2. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. First.

Note If you enter text with a recognized unit of measure using a quotes or double-quotes. After the creation of a label. You do not see label properties while using the design software. you have an easier method to find to the label properties. the plant administrator can define text content inside the label with the SmartText editor in Catalog Manager. The following table identifies some of the label properties that are defined during label creation in Catalog Manager. Nonetheless. the predefined property value in the label overwrites the current property value on the item that it labels. the software parses the UOM and ignores the double-quotes (or tick marks). At label creation time. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager.or 2-Point Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Not applicable Yes Not applicable Yes Fit Graphics to Text Yes SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 181 . Whenever you select a label.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Labeling: An Overview Your main tool to add or edit text content that appears in a label is the Properties window. you can place free text in an item note. Labels that do not overwrite the property at placement are called driven labels. The same properties appear in the long list of properties when you select the item itself. you cannot edit text such as OLL= on the OLL Elevation Equipment label. these properties perform their function in the background and are invisible to you. Since only the label properties appear when the label is selected. A label always reflects the current property values of the item that it labels. Different labels have different label properties. the corresponding labeled properties for its item appear in the Properties window. these properties dictate label placement behavior. When placing a label later. In other words. By adding or editing text. Break Labeled Item Type Placement Type Leader Line Terminator Type Offset Distance Offset Source Behavior Area Break Title Block Yes 1-Point Flow Arrow Yes 1-Point Component Yes 1. Labels that populate a property at placement are called driving labels. you are entering data into the database.

you select the label that you want from Catalog Explorer and then identify the item in the drawing that you want to label. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. Afterwards. If you place a leader line with the label. and break) appear in columns. Labels can be moved by selecting the label and dragging the black square at the center of the label. Some labels have no symbology associated with them. 182 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . component. page 188 • Place an Annotation.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Table notes: • The four types of labels (title block. the Short Description label for Equipment). you cannot change the placement type in the design software. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. If you place such a label. You can add a leader line to a label by right-clicking on the label and choosing Leader line display. you have an empty label. empty labels display a question mark so that you can find them more easily and not unnecessarily repeat work. but the properties that normally appear have not been entered yet. flow arrow. First. page 211 Placing Labels: An Overview You can place a label in a few basic steps. You use two-point placement when you need one click to identify the item to label and a second click to indicate a different location for the label. it would be essentially invisible on the drawing. the first click also identifies the end of the leader. Labels can have two-point placement or one-point placement. You set the placement type of a label at its creation in Catalog Manager. • • • Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line. Yes indicates that the property applies to that type of label. You use one-point placement when a single point in the drawing identifies both the item to label and the location of the label. that is. indicate that the property applies under certain conditions. However. they contain text only (for example.Point for one-point placement. like 1. Label properties appear in rows. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. Not applicable indicates that the property does not apply to that type of label. Since there is no symbology associated with this type of label. Special notes. Drag the label to the location that you want it to occupy in the drawing.

which are defined in Options Manager. A line label follows a line when you change its angle. When you place an off-page connector (OPC). where the number corresponds to the drawing. the software stops the sharing of data between segments of pipe. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. In other words. When you place a property break label. for example.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Changing default label formats in Options Manager (for example. After you place the matching connector from the stockpile into the related drawing. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. The matching connector receives the value. A label and its assigned leader line follow when you move a line. you break the pipe run. the software does not delete the label but repositions it in an associated location on the line. changing from horizontal to vertical. Change units in the SmartText Editor dialog in Catalog Manager to specify a different unit of measure in a label. for example). All delivered labels use plant default units. From Drawing 123. changing temperature from K to °C) does not change labels that are already placed in drawings. for example. page 188 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 183 . the software automatically creates and stores a matching connector in either a plant or project stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you recalculate a line. • • • • Related Topics Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. and so labels do not always display the units selected in the Properties window. You must replace those labels individually to see the change whether those labels use the plant default setting or have the value set uniquely. the software automatically updates the matching connector in the original drawing (To Drawing 122.

click again to place the label where you want it in relation to other items in the drawing. a Cursor Location value of above midpoint. and it is highlighted indicating that you can place a label. Click the item in the drawing that you want to label. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. no leader line. 184 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can edit the database properties for the labeled item after you have placed the label. This valve received a label with one-point placement. If the label is designed for two-point placement. If the properties of the label require two-point placement. You point to the valve. An example of twopoint placement is placing an equipment label on a pump. Select the label that you want from the Catalog Explorer list view. 3. Depending on the definition of the label. consider placement of a Tag ID label on a valve. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. 2. These properties are set in Catalog Manager during label creation.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Label from Catalog Explorer 1. the software places the component label. and an Offset Source value of local. • Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement. When you click the valve. you must use item placement mode instead of the drag method. An example of onepoint placement is placing an ID label on a valve. page 187 One-Point Label Placement To illustrate placing a label with this placement method. Notes • Labels are a special class of item in Catalog Explorer. Properties include an Offset Distance value of .5 inch. you place labels with one-point or two-point placement.

If the value for offset source is None. Offset is always a positive value. If the pointer appears below the center (that is. however. Pointer position determines if you place the label above or below the component. Midpoints align at the y-axis of the local coordinate system of the symbol with the label. the software aligns the center of the label at the center of the item receiving the label. Label Offset options can be universally applied by inputting a value in the Distances option in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The dots on the valve and label are not part of these drawing items. A value of Zero offset distance aligns the bounding boxes. Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. page 21 • Manipulate a Leader Line. page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label. If the pointer appears above the center (that is. The property for offset source also affects label placement. the y coordinate is a positive value) you are placing the label above the item. This y-axis alignment line crosses the center of the labeled item. The center of the bounding box is (0. In this example. the center is the point where the pointer touches the line. These midpoints always align when you place a label with one-point placement. The tolerance for the Select command determines the distance above and below the pipe run. For a pipe run.0). if a label offset is designated for the label during creation in Catalog Manager. The label remains in dynamics (you can move the label to a different location before you place it) so you can confirm correct placement. that value overrides the Options Manager setting. the label immediately moves to this position. This action allows you to place labels on a line and at the center of symbols. page 188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 185 . the y coordinate is a negative value) you are placing the label below the item. When you point to locations in the drawing and locate a valid target. page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. The dots represent the center of the bounding box. page 184 • Place a One-Point Label. The alignment axis is perpendicular to the line at this point. designated in Options Manager. the local origin. the software uses the default offset distance.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a One-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. Drag the label to the appropriate place in the drawing. 3. Release the label when the target is highlighted. Tips

When you drag a label over an appropriate target, the target is highlighted.

The pointer position, in relation to the item when you place the label, determines if you place the label above or below the item in the drawing. 4. In the Properties window, select or type values for the properties of the label in the appropriate rows in the table, if needed.

Notes

Title blocks, flow arrows, off-page connectors, and some component labels use one-point placement. A label display always reflects the values of the item with which it is associated. Labels that populate the item values at placement time are called driving labels. In other words, the predefined properties in the label overwrite current item properties when the label is placed. Labels that do not overwrite the item properties are called driven labels. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager. If you place flow arrow labels on a pipe run, the direction of the arrow changes depending on the flow direction of the pipe run. If the pipe run has no direction defined for it, the direction of the flow arrow label defines the flow direction of the pipe run. You can use the Configuration Tool, or PickQuick, to select the direction of a flow arrow as you place it. If you place an off-page connector on a pipe in the drawing, the software fills in the connector number and automatically adds a second off-page connector to either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing. When you place the second connector in a drawing, the software automatically updates the number and name of the drawings in both offpage connectors. To display a leader line for the label, right-click the label, and then select Leader line display on the shortcut menu. If the Properties window is not visible, you can display it by selecting a label and then clicking Edit > Properties on the main menu bar.

186 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool, page 146 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Two-Point Label Placement
To illustrate placing a label with this placement method consider placement of an Equipment ID label on a pump. When you point to the pump, it is highlighted, indicating that you can place the label. When you click the pump, the software recognizes the pump as a target for the label. That action is the first point of two-point placement. At the location on the drawing that you want actually to place the label, click again. That action is the second point of two-point placement. After the first click, the pointer changes from a northwest arrow, , to a four-headed arrow, , until you place the label with your second click. During the time between the first and second clicks, the label is attached to the pointer.

This pump received a label by using two-point placement. (1) and (2) illustrate the two pointer positions and clicks required to place this label. Properties include a Rotation value of false and a Leader line value of true. These properties are set through Catalog Manager during label creation. With two-point placement, the software does not use properties for offset distance or pointer location. You can place the first point anywhere on the item to receive the label. The leader line points to this location. Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 187

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Two-Point Label
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the label that you want to place. 2. In the drawing click the item that you want to label. Tip As the pointer passes over an appropriate target item for the label, the software highlights the item. To label the item, click the item when the software highlights it. 3. Click the location in the drawing for the label.

4. Quit label placement mode by pressing Esc. Tip Or, you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. 5. In the Properties window, specify the properties of the label in the appropriate rows.

Tip

If the Properties window is not displayed, you can display it by selecting the label and then clicking Edit > Properties.

Notes

After you place a label, you can move it and manipulate its leader line. For more information, see Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190

Property break labels and various types of component labels require twopoint placement.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a Break Label, page 196 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement, page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

188 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Copy Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the label that you want to copy. 2. Right-click the label and select Place New from the shortcut menu. 3. Associate the new label icon that appears at the end of the pointer with the new item by highlighting the item and clicking. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Align Labels
1. In the Drawing view, select the labels that you want to align. Tip In order to align labels, you must be sure not to select any drawing items other than labels. You can remove an item from a select set by pressing Ctrl and clicking the item. 2. Click the appropriate alignment button on the main toolbar:
• • • • • • •

Align labels so that their bottom lines match Align labels so that their center points agree on a vertical line Align labels so that their center points agree on a horizontal line Align labels so that their left-most lines match Align labels so that their right-most lines match Align labels so that their top lines match

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 189

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Manipulate a Leader Line
1. Display the handles of the leader line by clicking the label that it belongs to. Tip In order to manipulate a leader line, you must display it. Right-click the label and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu. 2. Click a handle and drag the line to a new location.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182

Update Label Settings
1. Click Tools > Custom Commands. 2. On the Custom Commands dialog box, double-click UpdateLabelsCmd.dll. Tip

You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program.

Note

The UpdateLabelsCmd.dll refreshes the value of the currently placed label properties as displayed on the drawing. The command does not update the label based on modifications made to the label using Catalog Manager. To update the label if changes have been made using Catalog Manager, the label must be replaced in the drawing using Edit > Replace.

Related Topics • Labeling: An Overview, page 181

190 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using the Types of Labels: An Overview
The type of label that you place determines the workflow that you follow. You define the label type when you create a label in Catalog Manager. As defined in Rule Manager, rules apply when you are placing a label. The following four types of labels are Title Block, Flow Arrow, Component, and Break. Title Block The title block label is unique among label types because you do not have to identify the item to receive the label. The title block usually displays general information about a drawing. After you select the label in the list view, you can drag it to the location in the drawing where you want to assign the label. You cannot modify label properties for a title block. The different template files, which create new drawing files, contain different title blocks. Therefore, you can automatically place standard title blocks in standard drawings, which are built on standard templates. Or, you can create custom title block labels to fit your custom templates.

Flow Arrow You place flow arrows in process piping lines. When you place the label, the arrow orients itself with the flow in the pipe run if you have already defined flow direction. If you have not specified a flow direction, then the direction you place the flow arrow defines it for you (that is, a flow arrow is a driving label). As you drag the label from the list view of Catalog Explorer, pipe runs in the Drawing view are highlighted when you pause over them. Click a highlighted pipe run to place the label. Flow arrows require only one click to place them.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 191

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview After placing the label, you can change the flow direction of the pipe run in the Properties window, and the flow arrow reorients itself accordingly. You cannot change label properties that appear in the Properties window for a flow arrow.

Component This type of label identifies physical commodities in the model. A typical example is an Equipment ID label. Properties assigned to the label affect its behavior. Component labels have a unique property: Label Behavior. The values are defined in a select list in Data Dictionary Manager and are chosen in Catalog Manager when you create a label. The default value is Follow. Values for this property can include the following:

Follow (no rotate) - The label does move but does not rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Follow - The label does move and rotate, corresponding to changes to the labeled item. Fixed - The label does not move if you move the labeled item.

This illustration shows component labels that you use to label vessels, nozzles, and piping components. It also depicts both fixed and rotated orientations of labels.

192 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break A break label, or property break label, graphically shows that a change occurs or can occur in a property at some point in the process. This label indicates to the software that an inconsistency for that property is acceptable. As a result, the software does not issue a warning, or an existing inconsistency resolves itself when you place the break. Break labels do not set properties but note that a value change is acceptable for the property at the indicated point. Text included in the label reflects the property at that point. You can associate multiple property breaks with one point on the drawing.

You place property break labels, in the Segment Breaks node of Catalog Explorer, with two-point placement. Notes

You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. After you place the label, you can right-click the label, and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. You can place several break labels at one point, and multiple leader lines can be confusing.

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 193

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Place a Title Block
1. Find the title block that corresponds to your drawing template in the Catalog Explorer List view. 2. Click the label and position it over the pre-defined title area on the drawing so that the elements of the label fall within the cells of the title area. 3. Click to place the title block. 4. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Tips

You can review the properties of the title block label in the Properties window, but for title blocks, you cannot modify those properties. If you want to modify drawing properties, which are displayed in the title block label, you can do so in Drawing Manager. For more information, see Drawing Manager Help. You can move the title block if you need to position it more carefully within the title area of the drawing. For more information, see Move an Item With the Select Tool, page 218.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview, page 191

Place a Flow Arrow
1. Find the flow arrow in the list view of Catalog Explorer and select it. 2. Position your pointer over the process line that you want to label. 3. If a flow direction has not been specified, then choose an orientation for the arrow so that it reflects the correct direction. Tips

If a flow direction has already been specified for the line, then the flow arrow orients itself so that it reflects that property.

If you pause over a line whose flow direction has not been defined, you can use PickQuick to position the flow arrow. 4. Click to place the flow arrow on the process line.

5. Continue placing flow arrows, or click Esc to quit placement mode. Note

You must change the flow direction of a line by changing the property in the Properties window. Do not rotate a flow arrow by using the Rotate command or the rotate handle in order to change the flow direction; flow direction is a property.

194 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

For more information. choose the label that you want to place. 3. page 191 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 195 . Continue placing the same label or click Esc to quit placement mode. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. page 197 • One-Point Label Placement. page 186 and Place a Two-Point Label. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. 2. page 182 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. Related Topics • Labeled Item Type. see Place a One-Point Label. page 191 Place a Component Label 1. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. Place the pointer over the component that you want to label. From the list view in Catalog Explorer. 4. Place the label using either one-point or two-point placement methods. page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview. depending on the label. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. page 188.

After you place the label. select the break label that you want to place. Place the break label using two-point placement. and then click Leader line display on the shortcut menu to control the display of the leader line in the drawing software. Use care when you assign leader lines. you can right-click the label. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 313 • Placing Labels: An Overview. From the List view in Catalog Explorer. page 187 • Using the Types of Labels: An Overview. or press Esc to quit placement mode. page 182 • Two-Point Label Placement. page 191 196 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. • 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Break Label 1. the second click (2) designates the location for the break label itself. The first click (1) specifies the junction in the process line. and multiple leader lines can be confusing. Notes • You can turn on or off the Is Leader Visible property in Catalog Manager. You can place several break labels at one point. Continue placing the same break label at other junctions in the drawing. Tip The Catalog Explorer Tree view node where break labels are located is called Segment Breaks.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Label Properties: An Overview
The following label properties are available for specifying your labels.

Labeled Item Type
This property defines the type of item that your label is used with. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you must specify this property; you cannot change it in the design software. The property must be defined correctly to allow you to place labels. When you create a label in Catalog Manager, you choose the labeled item type from the Item list in the SmartText Editor. That list is defined in Data Dictionary Manager, where all the valid item types are defined and stored. Examples of labeled item types include pipe run, instrument, piping component, equipment, and so forth. If you specify that the labeled item type is a pipe run, then you can place your label on a pipe run and not on any other type of item in your drawing. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Distance
This property defines the distance from the labeled item to the label. Offset distance applies for labels that are defined with one-point placement. This property also applies for two-point label placement if the property for offset source is set to Local. The property must be defined correctly in Catalog Manager to allow you to place your label. The actual plant-wide offset distance is specified in Options Manager. The software measures the distance from the bounding box of the item to receive the label and the bounding box of the label itself. Consider the offset as the clearance distance between the bounding boxes. Notes

The bounding box in SmartPlant P&ID differs from the SmartSketch definition of range. SmartSketch (A) uses the x-y coordinate range around an item. SmartPlant P&ID (B) uses a rectangular area.

For a line segment, the bounding box is the line itself.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 197

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Offset Source
This property specifies the origin for the offset distance. The possible values for offset sources are None - The label does not have an offset. This value indicates placement at the center of the labeled item. Project Settings - Plant-level parameters determine the offset distance. You can use Options Manager to define the plant settings distance. Local - The label does have an offset, and the value for the Offset Distance property, which is specified in Catalog Manager, defines the offset to use. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the offset source property in the drawing software. Likewise, you set the local offset distance when you create a label, and you cannot change the property in the drawing software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Mirrorable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can mirror the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot create a reverse image. You define this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Disable Flip Text
This value allows you to rotate or orient text for readability. By default, the software displays text in a readable manner and will not allow it to display upside down. For example, if you move a label in a direction that would effect the readability of the text, the software automatically flips the text so that it can still be read. Using Catalog Manager, you can disable this option and allow the text to display upside down if needed. Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview, page 83

198 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Is Rotatable
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that you can rotate the item. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that you cannot change the angular orientation. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Is Fit To Text
The value of this property is set to True if the label graphics must fit around the text when you place the label. The value of this property is set to False if the label graphics do not need to fit around text. You can change the designation in Catalog Manager. You can set the value to True only for enclosures that are circles, ellipses, rectangles, or parametrics. You set the Is Fit To Text property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. The following illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to False. The rectangle appears at the same size when you created it:

This illustration is an example of a label with the Is Fit To Text property set to True. The rectangle resizes to fit around the text:

Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place a Two-Point Label, page 188 • Place an Annotation, page 211

Is Leader Visible
The value of this property is set to True to indicate that the label includes a leader line. The value of this property is set to False to indicate that the label does not include a leader line. You set this property when you create a label in Catalog Manager. You can turn on or off the display of the leader line after you place the label.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 199

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note

To turn on or turn off the display of the leader line, right-click the label, and click Leader line display.

Related Topics • Manipulate a Leader Line, page 190 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

Label Terminator Styles
The Terminator Style property specifies the terminator, if any, to place at the end of a leader line. Choices include None, Arrow, Solid Dot, and so forth. This property applies only to labels whose value of the Leader Line property is set to True. You specify these properties when you create a label in Catalog Manager. Afterwards, you cannot change the terminator type property in the design software. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184

200 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview
A connector is not actually a label but more like a component that includes a label. Placement behavior for a connector is very similar to a standard piping component label. OPCs, utility connectors, and piping components are inserted into a line. The drawing needs a connector when a line run continues on another drawing. The minimum information in the label portion is the drawing name to which the connector points and the connector number. Connectors do not have a property for flow direction, although most connectors use an arrowhead to indicate direction. When you place a connector, it does not set or respond to flow direction. The connector represents continuation, not connectivity or flow. During document creation, when you place the first connector of the pair, the software places the partner in either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing of your choice. The default placement for the partner is into the Stockpile. When you create a connector and place it in a drawing, the property for the drawing name is not defined. The partner in the stockpile reflects the drawing name in which its match was located. When you place the partner from the stockpile, the first connector is updated to reflect the drawing name where you placed the partner connector. As a result, you never need to type a drawing name, and the software guarantees a valid match. OPC pairs have a to and from orientation. The software does not use the graphical to and from distinctions, but reading the drawing is easier for you with this differentiation.

1. The OPC is a to connector if its connected point appears at the finish end of the connector. 2. The OPC is a from connector if its connected point appears at the start end of the connector. In order to switch between to and from orientations, you must disconnect the OPC from the line and then rotate or mirror it. Then you can reconnect the line to the other end of the OPC. At the time of placement, you can pause when placing the OPC and wait for the PickQuick toolbar in order to choose the correct orientation.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 201

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview You can delete a connector from the drawing, and the software moves it to a stockpile and updates the properties of its partner. To delete a connector from a stockpile, both must reside there, and you delete both from a stockpile. After you delete a connector, you cannot reuse the same number. You cannot change the connector number or drawing name in these labels. However, you can change other properties. If you copy a connector, the software must generate new connector numbers and add a partner to a stockpile. The property for drawing name changes to Null or Undefined for the copy. These properties exist for connectors:
• • •

Offset source is set to None. Rotation is set to True. Leader line is set to False.

In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer, page 184 • Place a One-Point Label, page 186 • Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Place an OPC or Utility Connector
1. From the list view in Catalog Explorer or from a stockpile, select the connector that you want to place. Tip In Catalog Explorer, Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for instruments. Two types of connectors are available for process lines: Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs or Utility Connectors. The correct symbology (for example, line weight and color) differentiates OPCs. You define symbology with Options Manager. 2. Click the location in the drawing where you want to place the connector.

Tips

You can place a connector in free space on the drawing and route a line to it, or you can place it at the end of a line that already is drawn. If you are placing a connector in free space, rotate or mirror the OPC after placement in order to get the correct orientation. Then route the line to it.

202 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you are placing a connector at the end of an existing line, you can wait for the PickQuick toolbar so that you can choose the correct orientation. 3. Modify the properties of the connector in the Properties window.

Tip

If you placed a new connector from Catalog Explorer, you can display and select the partner in the Engineering Data Editor and modify its properties, too.

Notes

Utility connectors support only one-to-one relationships. In other words, they come in pairs only. When you place a utility connector and its partner goes to a stockpile, that partner connector is of the same type as the first connector you placed. In order to change the partner connector to the other type of utility connector, you must place the partner in its drawing and then replace the symbol. For more information on replacing symbols, see Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233.

Related Topics • One-Point Label Placement, page 184 • Placing Labels: An Overview, page 182 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

ToFromText Dialog Box (Properties Window)
Opens when you click To / From in the Properties window when an OPC or other connector is selected, and allows you to enter a text value to be displayed in the connector. Click the ellipses to open the ToFromText dialog box. Description - Allows you to enter to or from information for the connector. You can enter drawing names or numbers or other pertinent information about the connected drawing or the direction of flow. Related Topics Properties Window Command, page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties, page 87

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 203

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector
1. Click Tools > Options. 2. Go to the Placement tab. 3. Select or clear the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option. Note

If the Place partner OPC in Stockpile option is not selected, the Set Stockpile Location for Partner OPC dialog box appears whenever you place a connector. This dialog box allows you to place each partner OPC in the stockpile of a specific drawing.

Related Topics Place an OPC or Utility Connector, page 202 • Store a Partner Connector, page 204

Store a Partner Connector
1. Place a connector in a drawing. 2. On the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box, choose the stockpile in which you want the partner stored. Tip

If you have not deactivated the default storage for connectors, this dialog box does not appear because the partner connector is placed directly into the Stockpile. However, you can change the default storage location. For more information, see Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204

Related Topics • Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector, page 204 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move a Connector to Another Stockpile
1. In the Engineering Data Editor, select the connector that you want to move. 2. On the Engineering Data Editor toolbar, click File > Move to Different Stockpile. Tip

If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for, then the Move to Different Stockpile command is not available. That is, you cannot move a connector that belongs to a different drawing, for instance.

204 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview 3. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box, select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing, you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. 4. In the Drawing list area, select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to.

Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Move Partner OPC Opens the Move Partner OPC dialog box, from which you can move the selected connector to the stockpile of any drawing in the active plant. This command is available only when the partner connector is located in the Stockpile. Related Topics • Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Move Partner OPC Dialog Box
Opens when you click Move Partner OPC on the Connector shortcut menu. This dialog box allows you to move a partner connector from the Stockpile into the stockpile of a specific drawing, or vice versa. Plant Hierarchy - Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant. When you select a node, the drawings associated with that node appear in Drawing list. Drawing list - Displays all the drawings associated with the selected node on the Plant Hierarchy tree. Related Topics Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile, page 206 • Move Partner OPC Command, page 205

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 205

4. • Tip If you do not want to place the connector in a stockpile of a specific drawing. right-click the connector whose partner you want to move. In the Drawing list area. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. 3. • Note • If the partner connector is in a stockpile and is displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. However. Tip If you select a connector that you do not have write privileges for. if the partner connector belongs to another drawing. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Partner Connector to Another Stockpile 1. see Open a Continuation Drawing. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. then the Move Partner OPC command is not available. see Move a Connector to Another Stockpile. click Move Partner OPC. you can use the Open Partner Drawing command on the shortcut menu to open the other drawing and move the connector from its stockpile. For more information. From the shortcut menu. In the Drawing view. select the plant hierarchy element that contains the drawing whose stockpile you want to assign the connector to. This command is not available if the partner connector is not located in the drawing stockpile. page 201 206 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can select Stockpile at the bottom of the Plant hierarchy tree. select the drawing whose stockpile you want to add the partner to. for instance. page 201 Open Continuation Drawing Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Open Continuation Drawing Opens the connected drawing when the partner of the selected off-page or utility connector is in a drawing or a drawing stockpile. page 204. On the Move Partner OPC dialog box. That is. For more information about opening the partner drawing. you cannot move it. Related Topics • Open a Continuation Drawing. you can move it from there. page 207.

From the shortcut menu. click Delete From Model. Related Topics • Open Continuation Drawing Command. page 206 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. • Note • The selected connector and its partner in the Stockpile are removed from the model. Related Topics • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview. click Delete on the shortcut menu. page 201 Delete a Connector From the Model 1. which moves the selected item to the Stockpile. Select the OPC or utility connector whose connected drawing you want to open. click Open Continuation Drawing. then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. page 201 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 207 . page 201 Delete From Model Command Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Open a Continuation Drawing 1. 2. this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. If you want to move the connector to the Stockpile instead of deleting it completely from the database. From the shortcut menu. In the case of the connector. if you are deleting a connector. 2. Right-click the connector. Right-click the connector that you want to remove from the model. the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile. Tips • This command is available only when the partner of the selected connector is stored in the Stockpile. • Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model. Notes • Unlike the standard Delete command. page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview.

connect to process. The ItemTag project deals specifically with the following item types: instrument loops. exchangers. but can be generated automatically. automatic tag generation. Property validation is triggered when any property that comprises the Item Tag value is added or modified. Instrument Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Type Modifier Measured Variable Code Tag Sequence Number Loop Tag Suffix Tag Suffix (Instrument Type Modifier)(Measured Variable Code)-(Tag Sequence Number) Loop Tag Suffix(Tag Suffix) Instrument Loop Item Tag Structure Format Instrument Loop Function Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Instrument Loop Function)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Pipe Run Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Fluid Code (Unit Code)(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)-(Operating Fluid Code) 208 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This project generates unique Item Tag values and maintains consistency between the Item Tag value and the properties used in its calculation. and tag reformatting. and equipment (other equipment. Legend Italics: Required for checking item tag uniqueness. signal runs with a plant item type pipe run (hydraulic. This project disregards all other item types. and so forth). Bold Italics: Required for the item tag. equipment components. instruments. Calculation can be triggered by the Item Tag property for any of the items shown in the tables below. and the database tables and column names where modifications trigger calculation and validation. pipe runs. and vessels). mechanical equipment.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Calling Item Tag Validation The ItemTag project performs calculations and validations for unique tag checking. The following tables list item types that are validated or calculated by the ItemTag project.

• • Related Topics • Add Instruments to a Loop. clear the selection of the instrument and then select it again. page 178 • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. Item Tag cells for these item types are read-only except for those of signal runs. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide or click Related Topics. including item tag formats. and Item Tag properties for instruments are not read-only so that implied instruments can have item tags that are assigned manually. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 209 . For information on customizing the software. page 268 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 13 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Equipment Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Equipment Component Item Tag Structure Format Nozzle Item Tag Structure Item Tag Signal Runs (Plant Item Type Pipe Run) Item Tag Structure Format Unit Code Operating Fluid Code Tag Sequence NumberTag Suffix Unit Code(Operating Fluid Code)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix) Notes • To refresh the instrument loop tag suffix in the Properties window.

there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. Opening and saving a . making the drawing unusable. It is called Item Note & Label. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. page 211 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and it looks like this: 1. and other information to your drawing. Because annotations are frequently parametric. remarks. Item note Related Topics • Place a Revision Cloud. These labels allow you to enter the remarks. Annotations include everything from geometric shapes to extension and dimension lines. When you place an annotation. notes. page 214 • Place an Annotation. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. which has an item type of item note. however. Placing annotations works like placing any other component in a drawing. and other information that you need to effectively annotate your drawings. often you can resize them to fit your needs. you can then place a label on the item note. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node.pid file in SmartSketch can corrupt the file. Note • Annotations are a way to place free remarks in a drawing. Caution • You cannot annotate drawings by opening them in SmartSketch and adding dumb graphics to the drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Using Annotations: An Overview Annotations are model items used to add notes. on a drawing. You can use annotations to include any type of information previously inserted into a drawing using primitive commands. Annotation point 2.

see Scale a Parametric Item. page 239. For more information. as in the procedure above. In the Catalog Explorer list view. There are several design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. Assign text to the annotation in the Note Text property box in the Properties window. 5. 4. it automatically displays that text. Tip • You can also assign text to the graphic in the Note Text property box for the graphic. page 182 • Using Annotations: An Overview. The plain annotation point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node. Item note Related Topics • Placing Labels: An Overview. page 186. page 210 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 211 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Annotation 1. The symbol is called Item Note & Label. For more information. however. Click to place the annotation at the appropriate place in the drawing. and it looks like this: • 1. Most of these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. Note • You can resize annotations by dragging their parametric handles. 3. page 188 and Place a One-Point Label. 2. To add text to the annotation. and when you add a label. see Place a Two-Point Label. Annotation point 2. select the annotation that you want to place from the Graphics folder. place a design label on the annotation. Press Esc to quit placement mode. there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it.

Press Esc to quit placement mode.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Area Break 1. 3. The value for the inside area break overrides the value for the outside area. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. for a group of items. In the Properties window. For example. Or you can place a multi-sided area break by clicking at a starting point and then clicking for each vertex of the shape. You can nest area breaks that have different values for the same property with one restriction: one area break must completely enclose the other area break. you can designate a portion as Supply By Contractor and a smaller portion as Supply By Owner. 2. 5. Place the area break shape around items in the Drawing view for which this area break applies. specify the properties for the select set. Select the area break in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. • 4. including the area break shape itself. Create a select set of the items that you want to include in the area break. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Notes • • An area break is a logical grouping of design items. like fencing items with the Select Tool. Tips • You can place a rectangular area break by dragging the pointer in the Drawing view. page 83 212 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . You can place area breaks that do not have common properties within or overlapping other area breaks.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Package 1. Do not include those items in your select set because the package item tag does not appear in the Properties window if any member of the select set does not possess that property. 3. click in the Pkg Item Tag box and select the appropriate value displayed list. For more information about moving plant item groups from one stockpile to another. Press Esc to quit placement mode. 4. whichever is appropriate. If the Properties window is not visible. In the Drawing view. Right-click the package symbol in Catalog Explorer in the Design node. Notes • Packages normally reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. select either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile. page 83 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 213 . In the Properties window. choose Select Set from the Properties box. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. In the Properties window. Tip • Some catalog items do not possess the Pkg Item Tag property. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. Moving the package itself to another stockpile has special limitations. 5. Select the package in the stockpile. 6. page 265. page 144 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. 2. In the Properties window. 7. From the shortcut menu. • Related Topics • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. select items to be part of the package. enter a value for the Item Tag property. 8.

Small. 4. select the Symbols > Design > Revision Cloud nodes. 5. Using the Catalog Explorer tree. the line width and line style using the Symbology option in Options Manager. 2. Related Topics • Using Annotations: An Overview. In a clockwise direction. page 210 214 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click the starting point in the drawing for the revision cloud area. Right-click to complete the revision cloud. continue clicking to place vertices on the revision cloud. Notes • You can change the symbology.Large or Cloud . 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place a Revision Cloud 1. Set the Area Break Style property to either a Cloud .

and then the complete list of fluid code values appears. and can be resized by using their scale handles. you select a fluid code from the select list. you can delete the item. you can modify the items in several ways. Resizing parametric items maintains certain characteristics of the item. too. the item appears in the stockpile for later placement. If you want to change the orientation of items. it disappears from the drawing completely. such as the length of its sides. delete the property for the fluid system. If you want to remove an item from a drawing. and you can only move these inside the equipment. If the plant model requires the deleted item. The fluid code list displays only codes beginning with the first letter of any previously selected fluid code for that line. you can move items or groups of items from one location to another in the drawing. You can also move groups of items to another open drawing in the same plant hierarchy. Notes • When modifying the fluid code properties of a line.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview After you place items in a drawing. The software processes rules defined for items as you move them. If the Properties window is not open. If the plant model does not require the item. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation. You can select a entire row by clicking on the corresponding row number to the left of the table and then viewing the properties in the Properties window and editing them there. as well as as you place them. You can modify the properties of each item by selecting the item and changing individual properties in the Properties window. For example. limits exist for possible placements. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 215 . such as angles between elements of the symbol. Also you can edit some item properties in the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window by selecting a table cell and filling in the appropriate information. To redisplay a complete list of available fluid code values. while it allows modification of other characteristics of the item. Obviously. Depending on the rules defined for particular items in the drawing. Many items are now scalable. you can display it by selecting an item and then selecting Edit > Properties. specific trays can be flagged for placement inside a piece of equipment. You can permanently remove required items from the plant model using the Delete from Model command. You can resize or scale parametric items by using their parametric handles. you can mirror and rotate most items.

and the action ends when another item is selected. page 219 • Review and Edit Item Properties. too. page 215 • Undo Your Last Action. not one action for each member of the set.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. however. move a connector to another drawing stockpile Changing or viewing the claim status of drawing objects • • • • • • • An undoable action is defined in several ways. The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Up to ten operations are saved in the undo list. Modifying item properties is an action. This definition of an action holds true for select sets. and for multiple items selected in the EDE. The undo list is cleared if you perform any of the following actions: • Change the properties of the Drawing view on the View Properties dialog box Turn the display of inconsistency indicators off or on by clicking View > Show Inconsistencies Add a filter tab to the Drawing view Click File > Save Open a different drawing or toggle to another open drawing Open a new Drawing view or new Engineering Data Editor (EDE) Using commands in the EDE or on the Connector shortcut menu. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. and you can undo them by repeated use of the Undo command. page 239 Undo Command Edit > Undo Allows you to reject the last action that you completed. That is. page 241 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. Running a command is usually an action. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. page 87 • Scale a Drawing Item. page 223 • Move an Item Using the Move Button. modifying the properties of a select set is one action in and of itself. page 217 216 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

• • Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. such as Zoom. the View > Previous command is still available for that purpose. page 219 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 217 . page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. then the undo list has been cleared. The Undo command stores up to 10 actions making this command available repeatedly. move it to the Stockpile. the owned items move also. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. and you can no longer undo your last action. open the second drawing and place the item from the stockpile. Notes • If you want to move an item to another drawing. You can specify the locations by clicking the drawing sheet or by entering relative values in the Move ribbon. page 144 • Undo Command. and you can move select sets. Note • • The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations. page 216 Move Command Edit > Move Moves items from one location to another. For example. When you finish manipulating the view. If the Undo button is not available. however. If you move an item that owns other items.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Undo Your Last Action Click Undo Tips • • . and Pan. Fit. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. while you are using the Move command. You can use other view manipulation commands. You can access this command from the Edit menu or the main toolbar. Pressing Ctrl + Z also undoes your last action. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. You can move one or multiple items at a time.

On the main toolbar. 0.Increases or decreases the value in the ribbon boxes. page 219 • Move Command.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the x-coordinate. 2. Tip Dragging a handle modifies the item instead of moving it. Tip The pointer snaps to the keypoint thereby making it easier for you to control the exact locus of the move. at a location where the software recognizes a keypoint . Drag the item to its new position. Copy . page 215 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.25 to 0. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. Position the pointer over the item that you want to move. Step Distance . from 0. For example. typing a step value of 0. Position the pointer over the item but not over any of the handles of the item. Y . Drag the item to its new position. Related Topics • Move an Item Using the Move Button. page 144 Move an Item With the Select Tool 1. and so forth.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move Ribbon Specifies the from point and to point when you move items. click Select Tool. click the Select Tool . page 144 218 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the main toolbar.75.Copies the items in the select set when you move them. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview.25 and pointing away from the from point increases the distance in discrete steps. page 217 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview.Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the y-coordinate. • Move an item with precision 1.5. 3. 3. X . 2.

Click to define the from point. if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles. Click to define the to point. • • • • Related Topics • Placing Equipment: An Overview. the trays and nozzles move with the vessel. You can use the Move ribbon to specify the to point. page 152 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 219 . 4. If you want to copy the items. and place the item from the stockpile. the owned items move also. You can drag an item without using Move. and you must click in the appropriate portion of the drawing to specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the item or items. Fit. Notes • If you move an item that owns other items. You can use other view manipulation commands. such as Zoom. click Move 3. When you finish manipulating the view. On the main toolbar. and Pan. Select the item and then drag it to its new location. press Ctrl when you place the item.and y-axis. Tip • . The values are relative distances along the x.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move an Item Using the Move Button 1. For example. If you want to copy the item. If you want to move an item to another drawing. 2. Select one or more items. while you are using the Move command. press Ctrl while you drag. move it to the Stockpile. open the second drawing. the software returns you to the Move command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line 1. 2. When the pointer turns into a double arrow location and release. or press Alt while routing a line or click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any direction and at any angle. page 156 220 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Notes • . drag the segment to the new The software applies geometrical line routing rules as you move a line. page 221 • Routing Lines: An Overview. 3. When you move a line segment. press Shift as you move the line. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. select the line that you want to move. If you want to override those rules. the software changes the length of attached line segments to accommodate the move. In the Drawing view. Point near the center of the appropriate line. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then selecting or typing the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. If the Properties window is not open. • • • Related Topics • Move a Line Using Vertex Handles. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line.

Click an existing line in the drawing. Drag the vertex to a new position in the drawing and release. 3.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Line Using Vertex Handles 1. • • Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Notes • While moving the vertex handle to modify the line segment. Click the vertex handle of the line route that you want to move. You can change values for the properties of the line by clicking the line and then specifying the new values in the appropriate rows in the Properties window. you can display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the main menu bar. click Alter Segment on the Line Routing ribbon or press Alt to allow the line segments to move freely at any angle. 2. If the Properties window is not open. Press Esc at any time to stop changing the selected line. page 156 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 221 .

page 215 • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. equipment component. • • • If more than one possible destination drawing is open. these labels are automatically added to the select set. • OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. or item note) not in the select set but they are dependent on objects in the select set. the Move To Drawing dialog box appears. These conditions must be met in order for this command to be available: • The source and destination drawing must be open. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. actuator. page 223 • 222 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . actuator. The Move To Drawing command manipulates the select set in order to make sure the selected items are appropriate items to move. equipment component.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Command Edit > Move To Drawing Allows you to move a select set of drawing items into another open drawing. If there are dependent objects (such as a nozzle. Title blocks are automatically removed from the select set. and if the parent object that it is dependent upon is not in the select set. or item note) in the select set. Related Topics Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. • The command expands the select set to include the following objects: • If there are labels that are not in the select set but are attached to objects in the select set. If there is a dependent object (such as a nozzle. and you can select the appropriate destination drawing. it is removed. that label is removed. If there is a label in the select set and the item that it labels is not in the select set. these objects are automatically added to the select set. You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. The command removes these objects from the select set: • • • Inserted OLE objects are automatically removed from the select set.

• 6. It contains a list of possible drawings that your item(s) can be moved to. In the Drawing view of the destination drawing. 4. open drawing templates. The Move to Drawing dialog box displays. Then. click Edit > Move To Drawing and click in the drawing to define the Select from point. 5. This dialog box displays only when you have more than one possible destination drawing open. You must also have the item(s) selected that you want to move. then select the desired destination drawing from the Available Drawings list on the Move To Drawing dialog box. The drawing objects to be moved must be selected. the pointer is a crosshair. click the to point. page 223 • Move To Drawing Command. Related Topics • Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing. If more than one possible destination drawing is open.Lists the open drawings that are available to be a destination for the Move To Drawing command. 2. Those drawings that are not included in the list are the source drawing. Click Edit > Move To Drawing. While you are using a from point (or to in the destination drawing). the following conditions must be met: The source and destination drawing must be open. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 223 . page 222 Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing 1. and neither of these drawings can be read-only. the from point becomes the origin of the select set. and open assemblies. Select the drawing and click OK. open read-only drawings. Notes • In order for the Move To Drawing command to be available.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move To Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to choose the destination drawing that you want to place a item(s) into. 3. Open the destination drawing if it is not already open. click the from point. Available drawings . Select the items that you want to move into the destination drawing. In the Drawing view. The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select set. Tips • For the purposes of placement in the destination drawing.

the Undo command is not available for moving a select set to another drawing. page 215 224 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . loop or package relationships or plant group relationships). whose members are all moved to the new drawing. Since you have to switch to a different drawing. resides in the source drawing stockpile. Also. Logical relationships are preserved (for example. if a logical group such as an instrument loop. OPCs cannot be moved from one drawing to another using this command. then that logical group moves to the stockpile of the destination drawing.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select set. • • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.

or even replace all items of one type at the same time. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. When you find or replace drawing items. As drawing items are found. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. and so you can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them if appropriate. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. you can modify their properties or reposition them or even replace them with an item of a compatible type. page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items. too. The Find and Replace commands are not available in the Engineering Data Editor. The software also searches your drawing for inconsistency indicators so that you can review and correct inconsistencies systematically. the selected items are added to a select set. Having found all drawing items of a certain type. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. You have the capability to replace a single drawing item with a comparable item. page 231 Find Command Edit > Find Displays the Find and Replace dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. You can replace items by using the options on this dialog box. which allows you to search a drawing for items by using catalog items or a filter or to find inconsistencies in your drawing. Replacing drawing items is straightforward.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview The software has the ability to find items and inconsistency indicators in your drawing. you can define criteria based on a delivered filter or on a user-defined filter. Or. You can define search criteria based on a catalog item or an item type already in place in your drawing. page 228 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. page 226 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. replace many items one-by-one. they are added to a select set. page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item. page 225 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 225 . too.

Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. • 226 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Find and Replace dialog box. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. On the Find and Replace dialog box. 2. Select an option from the Search in list. and click OK. • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. select a filter to locate your drawing items. and click Find on the Find and Replace dialog box to display information on the next drawing inconsistency. select <Inconsistency> from the Find what list. 4. • 5. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. 3. Click Find to select the first inconsistency. 5. page 225 Find an Item by Using a Filter 1. On the Select Filter dialog box. Click Edit > Find.. Continue clicking Find to advance through the drawing inconsistencies. select <Filter. 3. Notes • For detailed information about all your drawing inconsistencies one-byone. 4.. 2. right-click the selected inconsistency and click Properties.> from the Find what list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. page 313 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Find Drawing Inconsistencies 1. Leave the Consistency Check dialog box open. Choose an option from the Search in list. Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when an inconsistency is selected. Click Edit > Find. Click Find to search for and select the next item match in your drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing items that meet the selected filter.

On the Select Catalog Item dialog box. 5. • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. Click Edit > Find 2. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. All the items are in the select set. and you can view the common properties of the set in the Properties window. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found. • Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. and click OK. select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. select the catalog item type to search for. Click Find to select the first match in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing. page 225 Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item 1. • Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview. Use the Direction options to change the order in which single drawing items are found.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. page 225 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 227 . On the Find and Replace dialog box. Select an option from Search in. 4. 3.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item
1. Select an item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Find. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select an option from the Search in list. Tips

On the dialog box, the Find what option is automatically defined according to the drawing item you selected in the first step.

Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 4. Click Find to search for and select the next matching item in the drawing or click Find All to select all matches in the drawing.

Notes

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found. Use the Direction options to change the order in which drawing items are found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Replace Command
Edit > Replace Displays the Find and Replace dialog box, which allows you to replace some or all of the drawing items that match the search criteria defined by the options on the Find tab. Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

228 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace a Single Drawing Item
1. Select an existing item in your drawing. 2. Click Edit > Replace. 3. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 4. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the catalog item to replace the selected drawing item, and click OK. 5. Choose an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 6. Click Find to search for and select the first matching drawing item. If the selected item can be replaced with the item specified in Replace with, the Replace command is available.

7. Click Replace to replace the selected drawing item and to find and select the next matching item. Tip

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item specified in the Replace with box.

Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is replaced.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 229

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Filter> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Filter dialog box, choose the filter that you want to use to find drawing items, and click OK. 4. Select <Browse> from the Replace with list. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, choose the catalog item that you want to replace the drawing items you find with your filter, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to make the Replace All button available.

8. Click Replace All to replace all instances of the selected drawing item with the item defined in the Replace with box. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231

230 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items
1. Click Edit > Replace. 2. On the Find and Replace dialog box, select <Catalog Item> from the Find what list. 3. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type from the catalog that you want to find in your drawing, and click OK. 4. On the Replace with list select <Browse>. 5. On the Select Catalog Item dialog box, select the item type that you want to replace the found item type with, and click OK. 6. Select an option from the Search in list. Tip Selecting Active window disables the Scroll mode option. Selecting Active Document enables the Scroll mode option. 7. Click Find to search for and select the first match and to enable the Replace All command.

8. Click Replace All to find and replace all matching items. Note

Use the Scroll mode options to control how the Drawing view changes when a drawing item is found.

Related Topics Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 231

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace Mode Command
Tools > Replace Mode Controls whether catalog items are placed as substitutions for existing drawing items or placed normally. When this mode is active, the software places catalog items only when they replace an existing drawing item. When this mode is not active, the software places catalog items as usual. The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. The replace mode functions very much like Edit > Replace. However, the replace mode works for only one item at a time and is not activated from inside a dialog box. The Replace Mode command copies properties of the current item onto the new item. You cannot use the replace mode for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Replace an Item Using Replace Mode, page 233

232 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Replace an Item Using Replace Mode
1. Click Tools > Replace Mode or click Replace Mode on the main toolbar. 2. In Catalog Explorer, select the item that you want to place in the drawing. Tip You cannot use this mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. 3. Move the selected catalog item over the drawing item that it is to replace.

Tips

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for angled valves. If the drawing item can be replaced with the catalog item, the replace is displayed, and the drawing item is selected. icon appears, click to replace the drawing item with the

4. When the replace icon selected catalog item.

5. Continue to replace more items with your currently selected catalog item, or press Esc to quit placement mode. 6. Click Tools > Replace Mode again to turn Replace Mode off. Notes

You cannot use the Replace Mode option for pipe runs or signal lines. You also cannot use this mode to replace items that are multiple representations. The Replace Mode command also copies properties of the current item onto the new item.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Finding and Replacing Drawing Items: An Overview, page 225 • Place Multiple Representations, page 154 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 233

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Find and Replace Dialog Box
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This dialog box opens when you click either Edit > Find or Edit > Replace. Depending on your command choice, you access one of the following tabs. Related Topics Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228

Find Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Allows you to search the drawing for specified items. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. Find All - Initiates a search for all items matching the search criteria and adds them to the select set. The active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. 234 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item, page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter, page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item, page 228 • Find Command, page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies, page 226 • Replace Command, page 228

Replace Tab (Find and Replace Dialog Box)
Sets options for searching for and replacing drawing items. This tab is on the Find and Replace dialog box. Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option opens the Select Filter dialog box. Since you cannot replace an inconsistency, if you select the Inconsistency option from the Find what list, the Replace with option is not available. Replace with - Allows you to enter a new replacement item or select a replacement item from a list of the five most recently used items, which are listed below the dashed line. You can define a new replacement item by selecting Browse and picking a catalog item from the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the active drawing or just the contents of the active window. If the Active Window option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you can select a preferred scroll mode. Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left unchanged. Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or backward through the document. Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope. Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction. Each time a item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is changed based on the Scroll mode setting. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 235

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Replace - Replaces the item selected when you clicked Find. The Replace button is available only when the item found can be replaced by the item defined in the Replace with box. Each time you click Replace, the located item is replaced, and the Find command continues based on the Direction setting. As each drawing item is found, the active view is updated based on the Scroll mode setting. Replace All - Replaces all items that match the Find what criteria with the item defined in the Replace with box without prompting you. After all of the replacements are completed, the software reports the number of matches found and the number of replacements that were made. The active view is also updated depending on the Scroll mode setting. Related Topics Find Command, page 68 • Replace a Single Drawing Item, page 229 • Replace Command, page 228 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Catalog Items, page 231 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters, page 230

236 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

To open a node. This button displays the Filter Properties dialog box or the Compound Filter Properties dialog box. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 237 . Access this dialog box using one of the methods described below: • Click Browse on the Add Filter Tab dialog box when you want to add a filter to the Drawing view. page 226 • Replace Multiple Drawing Items Using Filters.Displays the New Filter dialog box. Using this dialog box. Only the contents of one node appear. page 357 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. or reports or to search for items using definitions associated with a filter. depending on your selection in the filter list. the software displays them in the list view. You can navigate through the tree view by clicking the different nodes. you can create a new filter or modify an existing filter. page 230 • Select Catalog Item Dialog Box Allows you to select a catalog item type for the search criteria when you use the Find or Replace commands. Navigation Bar . To close a node. Properties . click the plus sign to the left of the node name. This dialog box is constructed much the same as the Catalog Explorer window. Click Browse on the Filter tab of the Define Report Items dialog box when you are choosing your report item type.Displays the symbols that are associated with the active node in the tree view. click the minus sign to the left of the node name. which allows you to specify a new simple or new compound filter.Displays a hierarchy of nodes that contain catalog items. Choose Filter in the Find what list on the Find tab of the Find and Replace dialog box.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Filter Dialog Box Allows you to associate different filters with tabs in the different views. Related Topics Create a Simple Filter. If you create a compound filter. Tree View . List View . If the selected node contains any drawing symbols.Allows you to see and use Catalog Explorer shortcut buttons to navigate to catalog items more quickly. to choose item types for tables. select the individual simple filters that compose a compound filter and click Properties to view the Filter Properties dialog box for those simple filters. page 138 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. • • New .Allows you to edit the properties of the selected filter. page 136 • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

page 228 Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview Many components allow you to change their shape or orientation using component handles. rotated. You can drag any one of the handles. and right center of the range of an item. Catalog Manager defines these properties for items when the symbols for the items are created. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to mirror the item correctly. 238 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Items can have several different types of component handles. • • • Not all drawing items in can be mirrored. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to rotate the item correctly. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item correctly. You can scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle. defined in relation to the origin of the item. page 226 • Replace Command. Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric items. page 226 • Find an Item by Using an Existing Drawing Item. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions: top center. • The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes. Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to an item. Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a component around axes. bottom center. or scaled. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Drawing Item by Using a Catalog Item. A scalable symbol displays four solid square scale handles. left center. The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their origin. and the symbol scales either larger or smaller depending on the direction that you drag the handle. Scale handles allow you to change the scale of a drawing item. page 68 • Find Drawing Inconsistencies. You can mirror items by dragging the mirror handle in the appropriate direction. Note also that select sets cannot be mirrored or rotated with component handles. and you can use component handles to scale or resize parametric items in a drawing. You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate direction. page 228 • Find Command. page 227 • Find an Item by Using a Filter. The Mirror and Rotate commands on the toolbar can be used for select sets.

Select the parametric drawing item that you want to resize. page 238 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. • Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview. Drag one of the parametric handles change the size of the item. page 239 • Scale a Parametric Item. Continue dragging the parametric handles until the item is the size that you want.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. Note • Certain properties of the parametric item. page 241 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. in the middle of each side of the item to 3. page 244 • Scale a Drawing Item. such as angle values. remain the same when you resize it. 2. Scalable symbols are created by setting the IsScalable property of the symbol to True in Catalog Manager. page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle. 2. page 215 Scale a Drawing Item 1. A handle is displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol. page 215 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 239 . Select your scalable item in the Drawing view. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. Tips • A scalable symbol includes four solid square scale handles . Drag any one of the handles to make the symbol either larger or smaller. depending on the direction that you drag the handle. Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. page 239 Scale a Parametric Item 1.

Related Topics • Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define. and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom. Position Angle . Mirroring is displayed dynamically so that you can see the result of your action before you release the item to place it.Copies the item or items when you mirror them. 90 extends the axis vertically to the top. Note • To determine the option name on the ribbon. click Mirror on the main toolbar. page 241 • Mirror Command.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror Command Edit > Mirror Reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis that you define. Copy . The mirror handle appears at the upper right of the item.Sets the angle of the mirror axis. For example. or mirror and copy. page 241 Mirror Ribbon Appears on the main toolbar when the Mirror command is active. or you can make a copy of the item in the mirrored position. and allows you to either specify mirroring options or to observe mirroring options.or y-axis causes the item to appear mirrored about its center. Related Topics • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. To mirror an item using a defined mirror axis. You can also use mirror handles. page 240 240 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Setting the position angle to zero extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen. dragging a mirror handle across an x. The software reflects one or more selected items about that axis. The origin of the angle measurement is the point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. page 242 • Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle. You can mirror the item itself. pause over an option and read the ToolTip. You can mirror without copying. 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left. page 241 • Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element.

Select an item in the drawing. 3. and then click. Select one or more items. the software returns you to the Mirror command at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. 3. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 241 . Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item. 2. hold Ctrl when you click to place your items. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. When you finish manipulating the view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle 1. Notes • Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically. click Mirror . page 253 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. The software displays the mirror axis and the mirrored items dynamically (that is. Click the mirror handle or click Mirror on the main toolbar. then use Rotate or Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. 4. On the main toolbar. such as Zoom and Pan. You can use other view manipulation commands. while you are using the Mirror command. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of the drawing or by clicking a keypoint . as you move your pointer). you can use the Position Angle box on the Mirror ribbon. 2. page 215 Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define 1.

2. On the main toolbar. click Mirror . and then click. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation. you can enter values in the Rotate ribbon. First Click . it can take on any value. For example. By dragging the pointer over the item. The software then dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. that is. you can use Mirror to align the actuator in the appropriate position. locate a mirror axis. the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. Notes • You can use other view manipulation commands.Defines the rotation point. If an actuator is upside down when placed on an instrument valve. such as Zoom and Pan. To rotate and item. Second Click . You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to control the increments of the rotation. 242 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software returns you to Mirror at the point where you were when you started manipulating the view.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element 1. select the item and then click Rotate. hold down Ctrl when you click to place your items. Select one or more items. To define the rotation axis. 3. while you are using Mirror. page 215 Rotate Command Edit > Rotate Rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle about a specified point. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new position. 4. Tip • If you want to copy the mirrored items. you must specify two points by clicking in the drawing. Angles are always displayed as a positive value.0.Defines the rotation handle. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them. The mirrored items are displayed dynamically on the other side of the mirror axis. if the box is set to 30. When you finish manipulating the view. • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Third Click - Completes the rotation of the item. Also, you can rotate an item about its center with the rotate component handle . Keeping the rotate component handle close to the center of an item causes the item to rotate at 90 degree increments. Dragging the rotate component handle further away from the center of the item causes the item to rotate at smaller angles. The angle increments become smaller the farther away your pointer is from the center of rotation. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244

Rotate Ribbon
Appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to either observe rotation options as you rotate an item or specify rotation options. Copy - Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating. Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point to which you rotate. The position angle is always a positive value measured counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following picture, the center of rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 243

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated item. The value is always positive. Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter increments in the Step Angle box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic. Related Topics • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244 • Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle, page 244 • Rotate Command, page 242

Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle
1. Select an item in the drawing. 2. Click the rotate handle . 3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item. Notes

You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the item to change the step angle for the rotation. You can rotate items using the Rotate button on the main toolbar, too.

Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define, page 244

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define
1. Select one or more items. 2. On the main toolbar, click Rotate 3. Click at the center of rotation. 4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis. Tip The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being rotated. The location and position of the rotation axis defines the rotation from point. 5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.

.

6. Click to define the rotation to point.

244 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes

To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the Rotate ribbon. In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point. You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are using the Rotate command. When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to the Rotate command at the point that you were when you started manipulating the view.

Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview, page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview
You can delete items from a drawing by selecting them and clicking Cut on the main toolbar or by pressing Delete on the keyboard. Clicking Cut places the selected item on the Clipboard. This action allows you to paste the item in the same location in the drawing and then move it to another location as appropriate. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. The data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item, it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. Notes

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a select set from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. You can delete an item by selecting and right-clicking it. On the shortcut menu click Delete. If you select Delete from Model, the selected item is not only deleted from the drawing but also from the database. In other words, it is not placed in the Stockpile, regardless of its properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 245

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing, page 250 • Remove an Item from the Model, page 251

Cut Command
Edit > Cut Cuts selected items from the drawing and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected items replace the previous contents of the Clipboard. When you cut items, they go to the Stockpile, given appropriate stockpile settings. Related Topics • Cut an Item from the Drawing, page 246 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Cut an Item from the Drawing
1. Select the item. 2. Click Cut Notes

.

After you cut an item and its associated properties, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste or Paste Special to paste the item and its properties into the current drawing or into other drawings or documents. The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

246 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview, page 273 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

Paste Command
Edit > Paste Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same location that the items occupied in the source document or drawing. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Paste an Item With a Different Format, page 280 • Paste an Item, page 247

Paste an Item
1. Open the drawing in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard. 2. On the main toolbar, click Paste then select Paste. Notes

or right-click a blank area in the drawing and

The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Copy or Cut command again. Equipment components cannot be pasted back into the drawing after they have been removed using the Cut command. You cannot paste items if the Clipboard is empty (that is, if you have not previously used the Copy or Cut commands). Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste command.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 247

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Select All Command
Edit > Select All Selects all visible items in a view. Note

You can access this command when you right-click a blank area in a drawing or table, too. On the shortcut menu click Select All.

Related Topics • Select an Item, page 147 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Modify an Item With the Select Tool
1. Click the Select Tool 2. Select an item. 3. Position the pointer over one of the item handles. 4. Drag the item handle to modify the item. For example, you can rotate an item with its rotate handle, mirror an item with its mirror handle, scale an item with its scale handle, or resize an item with its parametric handle. Related Topics • Manipulating Items With Component Handles: An Overview, page 238 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144 .

Delete Command
Edit > Delete Removes the selected item. You cannot paste items that you delete; however, if the item moves to the Stockpile on deletion, then you can place that item again from the stockpile. Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing.

248 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

However, off-page and utility connectors are always placed in the Stockpile when deleted regardless of the TagReqdFlag property and settings in Options Manager. Also, you can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items in a fence from the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Delete an Item from the Drawing, page 249 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Delete an Item from the Drawing
1. Select an item. Tip To delete a large group of similar items, use a filter to display items to delete, then select the items displayed by your filter. For more information on using display filters, see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View, page 138. 2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete on the keyboard.

Tip

When you use the Delete key on the keyboard to remove an item or items from the drawing, you must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view.

Notes

If you want to delete the item, its location in the drawing, and its properties in the database, right-click the item and select Delete From Model from the shortcut menu. The item is not placed in the stockpile regardless of its settings or properties. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. For more information, see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 249

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview, page 144

Remove an Item from a Drawing
1. Right-click the item that you want to remove. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete. Tips

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a group of items from the drawing, too. First, select the item or items in the drawing. Then you must place the pointer in the Drawing view and press Delete. The software does not delete the item if the pointer is located anywhere outside the Drawing view. Or you can select Edit > Delete on the main menu bar after you select the items. You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor.

Notes

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and is included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. However, the data associated with the item remains in the database. If the TagReqdFlag property is False, when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. For more information on deleting items from the model, see Remove an Item from the Model, page 251. When you delete inline components, the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. A stockpile item that is deleted automatically goes to the Stockpile. You can move it to a drawing stockpile from the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview, page 245 • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview, page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing, page 265

250 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview

Delete From Model Command
Connector Shortcut Menu > Delete From Model Deletes the selected item from the database; if you are deleting a connector, then its partner is deleted from the stockpile as well. Notes

Unlike the standard Delete command, which moves the selected item to the Stockpile, this command removes the selected items or connector and its partner from the model completely. In the case of the connector, the command is not available unless the partner connector is in the Stockpile.

Related Topics • Delete a Connector From the Model, page 207 • Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors: An Overview, page 201

Remove an Item from the Model
1. In the Drawing view, right-click the item that you want to delete in order to display the shortcut menu. Tips

You can delete a select set from the model by choosing the items and then right-clicking on any member of the set to display the shortcut menu.

You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering Data Editor. 2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model to delete the item from the drawing and from the plant model. That is, the item is not placed in the stockpile, and when you save the drawing, no data associated with the item remains in the database.

Notes

You can only remove items from the plant model that do not share a relationship with another drawing. You can permanently remove items that are not flagged as required for the model by selecting Delete from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 251

when you cut or delete the item it is removed from the database as well as the drawing. see Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. which you set in Catalog Manager. Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Pant Stockpile. However. cutting or deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile. page 265. page 215 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. which you set in Options Manager. If the item has a TagReqdFlag property of True. page 250 252 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the software automatically mends the pipe or signal run. • • Related Topics • Modifying and Moving Placed Items: An Overview. You can move an item into the stockpile of a specific drawing. the data associated with the item remains in the database.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. page 265 • Remove an Item from a Drawing. When you delete inline components. and is included in the StockpileItems group. For more information. If the TagReqdFlag property is False.

Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. To see the pasted item. page 254 • Copy an Item. Remember that placement rules are in effect when you are copying an item to a new location. it is placed on the Clipboard. Several methods exist for doing this. When you paste the item. page 253 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. the software frequently pastes it on top of the item that you copied. click Copy Notes • . page 245 Copy an Item 1. You can copy an item with the Move command. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 253 . and press Ctrl as you place the item in the drawing. page 280 • Paste an Item. page 253 • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. You can do the same with a select set. page 254 • Copy an Item.too. page 244 Copy Command Edit > Copy Copies selected items to the Clipboard. On the main toolbar. After you copy an item. Related Topics • Copy an Item With the Select Tool. Select an item. page 247 • Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. This command replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents. So a copied nozzle must be placed on a piece of equipment. Select the item. without removing the current item from the drawing. drag it to its new location in the drawing. Then you can use Paste to place it on the current drawing. just as they are when you originally place an item from a stockpile or from Catalog Explorer. click Move on the toolbar. such as using the Copy button on the main toolbar or using Ctrl while you move.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Copying Items: An Overview Copying an item makes it possible to use a drawing item that is already in place as a starting point for placing a new item. or rotate a drawing item. 2. for instance. mirror.

but not over any of the handles of the item. this command makes it possible to accomplish that goal. a nozzle. Click Select Tool 2. page 86 • Select an Item. page 144 Copy an Item With the Select Tool 1. Select an item. 3. Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. In cases where you want the software to continue constructing a select set beyond a break in a line. 4. This functionality is useful for finding branches from runs and finding all the runs and components on an entire drawing that have a common property value. page 253 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Position the pointer over the item. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. page 147 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Hold Ctrl and drag the copy to its new location.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Related Topics • Copying Items: An Overview. Selecting Connected Items: An Overview You can use the Select Connected Items command to navigate the line connectivity from a selected line segment to add components and other runs to a select set based on matching properties. Note • The properties that define a run are specified in Options Manager. page 256 • Customize the Properties Window. page 273 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. for example. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. and so you must place the copy in an allowed position as if it were a new catalog item. Once the items are selected in the drawing. Placement rules are in effect. but also lines and networks and all runs included in the drawing. page 144 on the main toolbar. it is then a simple matter to choose the select set in the Properties window and continuing editing properties for not only runs.

Provides options for defining the extent of your select set. This dialog box remains open until you dismiss it. Scope List . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 255 .Allows you to choose from Run. Related Topics Create a Select Set From a Line. Include Components .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Select Connected Items Command Edit > Select Connected Items Opens the Select Connected Items dialog box. which allows you to create a select set that includes the active line and disconnected lines and inline components in any network. page 144 • Select Connected Items Dialog Box Allows you to construct a select set from lines and inline components. Include Runs . that is. page 156 • Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. The Scope List allows you to choose extent. including components. The Line option selects runs that are connected at end points.Incorporates lines into the select set. page 256 • Routing Lines: An Overview. and the Include Runs and Include Components buttons allow you to incorporate different items into the select set. once the dialog box is open. even if there are breaks in a network. one or the other or both is always active. Drawing. The default value for this list is Line. Notes • The Run option means that lines in a single run are selected. This command is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected on the drawing. page 254 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. The Network option adds branches. Network. and the Drawing option selects all the runs and inline components in the open drawing. is available only when either a single line segment or a single component is selected. Scope . however. and you can highlight items in the drawing and manipulate members of the select set while the dialog is active. you can change the selected item in the drawing and change the scope of the select set freely. Line. At no time can neither the Include Runs nor Include Components buttons be selected. The Select Connected Items command. page 148 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview.Adds inline components into the select set. which appears both on the Edit menu and on the Line Shortcut menu.

Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Matching Properties . Properties List . by using the Include Runs and Include Components buttons. Preview .Displays options for defining the select set according to common properties. Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager. Alphabetic .Displays properties grouped by specific categories. but the display of the Properties window itself is not updated until you click OK. Tip The properties for the new selection are displayed in the Select Connected Items dialog box. Related Topics • Create a Select Set From a Line. page 147 • Select Connected Items Command. You can select more than one property in this list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys. At any time.Lists properties in alphabetical order. 6. too. 5. • 256 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Select a single line segment or inline component in the drawing. • Tips • You can use the Ctrl or Shift buttons to select more than one property value. page 255 Create a Select Set From a Line 1. 4. page 256 • Select an Item.Allows you to choose common properties for your select set. Categorized . You can choose an empty property value for matching criterion.Highlights in the Drawing view the items that are selected according to common properties in the Properties List of this dialog box. too. 3. 2. you can change the scope of the select set by changing the display in the Scope list. By default the properties are displayed categorically. You can change the scope to include inline components or exclude lines. On the Select Connected Items dialog box. If you want to construct a select set based on common properties. The properties for the originally selected item are displayed by default. you can select a different line segment or component in the drawing in order to change the properties displayed in the dialog box. Click Edit > Select Connected Items. select those properties from the Properties list in the Matching properties area of the dialog box.

• 8. page 147 • Selecting Connected Items: An Overview. 9.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If no properties are displayed in the dialog box. Notes • If you click Cancel. and the original item is selected in the drawing. The matching items are highlighted in the Drawing view. Related Topics • Select an Item. the Select Connected Items dialog box closes. select a line segment or component in the drawing that already has a property value you know you are interested in. The selected items are centered in the Drawing view. Click the Preview button to see the items that qualify according to the matching criteria chosen in the previous step. page 254 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 257 . Once you have selected the items you want for your select set. click OK. Use the Selected Items list in the Properties window to display the common properties for the select set. For more information. 7. see Customize the Properties Window. page 86.

for instance. Or you can open the Engineering Data Editor of the drawing data and edit properties in the cells of the table. items that belong to another drawing cannot be edited. and paste properties. page 89 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Once you have populated the properties of an item you can. with the same restriction. page 87 • Working With the Properties Window: An Overview. Related Topics • Copy Bulk Properties. In the Engineering Data Editor. or create filters and control Drawing views so that only items with specified properties are displayed. page 54 • Paste Bulk Properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modifying Item Properties: An Overview When you use the design software to produce drawings. In the Properties window you are also constrained to edit only those properties that are not read-only. cut. page 88 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. page 329 • Modify an Item With the Select Tool. it is important to be able to specify and change the properties of the items that you place in your diagram. you can copy. page 83 258 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or label items so that their properties are displayed graphically. page 248 • Modify the Table Properties of an Existing Engineering Data Editor View. too. You can review and edit the properties of an item in the Properties window. run reports that display the items and their properties. You can edit the contents of some cells directly in the table if the corresponding property is not read-only or generated strictly by validation.

page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. reports.com. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. Description . Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in labels. formatted like this: http://www. formatted like this http://www. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. allowing you to enter long text descriptions for items.extension.intergraph.Allows you to type a description for the item. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 259 .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Description Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Description property in the Properties window. page 87 Hold Status Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Hold Text calculation button text value. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. This box can contain a link to a Web address.intergraph.com. and so forth. and allows you to enter a Description .Allows you to type a description for the item.extension. This box can contain a link to a Web address.

page 87 Insulation Spec Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses for the Insulation Spec property in the Properties window. such as Insulation Type or Insulation Purpose. You can choose a specification from either of the following lists. allowing you to specify an insulation specification for the selected item or items.Lists all the insulation specifications in the plant insulation specification file. Matching . page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. page 261 260 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . All . Related Topics • Properties Window Command. Related Topics • Assign an Insulation Specification. Note • The path to the plant insulation specification file is defined in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety.Lists all insulation specifications that match any already chosen values. Any modifications to insulation specifications are carried out in Insulation Specification Manager.

Allows you to type a description for the item. page 258 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. such as the insulation temperature. On the InsulationSpec dialog box. Click the Insulation Spec property box in the Properties window. you can choose a specification from the All list. page 84 • Review and Edit Item Properties. Note • If you assign a heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties.intergraph.com. 2. Select the item that you want to add an insulation specification to.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Assign an Insulation Specification 1. or purpose. formatted like this: http://www. Tip • If you have already specified other insulation properties. Description . 3. Related Topics • Modifying Item Properties: An Overview. type. 4. choose a specification from either the Matching or the All lists. You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document. Click the Calculation button .extension. Related Topics • Properties Window Command. Note • Very long descriptions are not displayed in their entirety in design labels. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 261 . then the Matching list contains only those insulation specifications that agree with the properties already chosen. your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted. in the Properties window. nonetheless. This box can contain a link to a Web address. page 144 Note Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Note Text calculation button and allows you to enter a text value in an item note.

You can also link to a file on your file system by entering the path like this: file://UNC_path/share/document.Specifies the file from which stream data is imported. Stream data is generally imported from an Aspen Zyqad stream data file.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Revision Text Dialog Box Opens when you click the Revision Text calculation button enter a text value. page 175 • Review and Edit Item Properties.extension. allowing you to specify the stream number for your pipe run. formatted like this: http://www. Related Topics Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. page 87 Stream Number Dialog Box Opens when you click the ellipses next to the Stream Number property in the Properties window.Lists the values found in the text file specified in the File Name box.com.intergraph. Stream ID List . Note • Labels do not display very long descriptions in their entirety. and allows you to Description . page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet.Allows you to type a description for the item. Related Topics • Place an Inline Instrument. File Name .Allows you to search for a file on your computer or network. page 267 • 262 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Browse . You can click Browse to find the file on your computer or the network. This box can contain a link to a Web address.

which opens when you right-click in the EDE. You can import items into the Stockpile. too. page 154 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. You can also access some of these commands from the Engineering Data Editor shortcut menu. which belongs to the Plant or the active project. or drawing stockpiles) from one stockpile to another. page 265 • Place an Item from the Stockpile. You enter placement mode when you click the icon associated with a stockpile item in the left-most column of the EDE. the Stockpile menu contains the commands for manipulating stockpile items. page 264 • Place Multiple Representations. by importing reports with the File > Import > Data File command on the main toolbar. Related Topics • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. or click Active Drawing Stockpile to view items in the stockpile of the active drawing. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 263 . or you can place them in a drawing or delete them from the model altogether. You have the capability to place an item from a stockpile directly onto an open drawing. Be sure that the other item buttons on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar (that is. You view the items in a stockpile in the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). In the EDE. These commands make it possible to place or move or delete stockpile items. In particular click Stockpile to view items in the Stockpile.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Moving and Placing Stockpile Items: An Overview You can move the items that reside in stockpiles (the Stockpile. the Active Drawing or Other Drawings buttons) are not active when you want to view stockpile items alone.

You can move your selected stockpile item into the drawing stockpile of another drawing. page 204 • Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing. you can use the Configuration tool to select the appropriate placement for the item. For more information. Tree view . page 38 264 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 149. and then clicking Edit > Properties to display the Properties window. 2.Displays a list of available drawings that can accept the selected stockpile item. List view . see Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. page 265 Place an Item from the Stockpile 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box Opens when you right-click a stockpile item icon in the Engineering Data Editor and select Move to Different Stockpile. In the Engineering Data Editor.Allows you to navigate in the plant hierarchy in order to display the drawing into which stockpile you want to move the selected item. click the icon in the left most column for the stockpile item that you want to place. • Notes • If the item you place has multiple orientations in relation to other items. Click the appropriate position in the drawing for the item. not a drawing item. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. You cannot use Replace Mode mode to replace drawing items with items from the Engineering Data Editor. You can enter values for properties of the placed item by selecting the item. page 146 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. • • Related Topics • Configuration (PickQuick) Tool. Related Topics • Move a Connector to Another Stockpile.

safety classes. This capability allows you to define values for an item that does not yet exist in the database. Tip Be sure you have chosen a stockpile item in your Engineering Data Editor. From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile . choose a drawing from the list and click OK. This action can occur at anytime. this action is allowed. From the shortcut menu. and so forth.If the plant item group contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain items in any drawing.Same constraint as above applies. • • • Plant item groups are listed in Data Dictionary Manager. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 265 . add or edit property values for the items returned in the report. right-click the icon of the stockpile item that you want to move. frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on drawings. and then import the items back into the drawing.No constraints apply. you can use a report to import information for items that already exist in the database. 2. Equipment Nozzle List. From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile . Also. not a drawing item. select Move to Different Stockpile. Note • Plant item groups. • 3. Valid reports are Equipment List. and Pipe Run List. packages.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Move a Stockpile Item to the Stockpile of Another Drawing 1. On the Move to Different Stockpile dialog box. such as instrument loops. Both of these reports have hidden columns that store some key information that is necessary for importing this information. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has special limitations: From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile . You must first run the report. The property values for the items are updated. page 38 Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile You can use the Equipment List and the Pipe Run List to import new items into the stockpile. Related Topics • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. In the left-most column of the Engineering Data Editor.

page 67 • Generate a Report. For examples of importing pumps into the database using the Equipment List. page 329 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile.0"?> <Preamble> <Items> Description Identifies the XML file and the version used Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID Indicates beginning of the list of all item types and properties to be imported.Database Item Type. and must be a valid format. Indicates the beginning of the list of properties to be imported for the item type Imported property for the item type: AttributeName Derived from the Data Dictionary Manager property name. page 334 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. and must be in double quotes. </Identification> <ContextSpecificIdentifier ContextId <Item Attributes> <Item Attribute> Notes • The log file for import activities is called SPImport.Specify if the property has units of measure. page 267 266 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. AttributeUnits .must be one of the properties listed. not the display name. not the index number. ITEMTAG .Path to symbol to be created in stockpile Ignored by SmartPlant P&ID.Must be in double quotes. and specify the actual value. • Related Topics • Add an Item to the Stockpile from Catalog Explorer. Attribute Value . and must have corresponding </Items> tag Defines Classification and Symbol File: Classification .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview XML Tags and Descriptions Tag <?xml version="1. even for select-listed values. click Related Topics. Symbol File .log and is saved to your local Temp directory.

Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the software. you can click Report in order to open the log file and view notes on the import process. Equipment. Previously imported items. Browse to the location of your spreadsheet. Tips • The status bar at the bottom of the SmartPlant P&ID window displays the progress of the import activity. and Exchangers. are updated with data from the newly imported file. You can use the Equipment List. • • • • Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. 3. Items must have an assigned item tag prior to definition or modification of properties.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet 1. and click Open. Click File > Import > Data File. Pump Equipment List. In addition. too. page 265 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 267 . On the Import Log dialog box. Pumps. select it. you must make modifications the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. See the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide Help file for more information on import code and other importing parameters. Pipe Run List. • Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. You can populate the stockpile with items from Aspen Zyqad exported spreadsheets and some SmartPlant reports. Notes • Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. These spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. or you can click Close. 2. and Heat Exchanger Equipment. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported. Click Help > Programming with SmartPlant P&ID. and Equipment Nozzle List Reports from SmartPlant to define properties of items already placed in the drawing. Stockpile items that come from importing Aspen Zyqad data can be easily updated by re-importing a data file. these reports can create occurrences of items in the stockpile. All three reports.

for example. The path name of the associated symbol is available in column T. Additionally. change the value in the Item Tag cell (for example. see Generate a Report. click File > Import > Data file. page 329 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. Notes • Importing new pipe runs using the Pipe Run List report is a little different because it also includes SP_ID and Fluid Code columns. The delivered Item Tag format for pipe runs is unit code . and D. 4. Tag Sequence Number. but you must be careful with row copy and paste because the layout is a little different. and Tag Suffix properties. 101. Place a pump in a drawing and assign an item tag. then clicking Format > Column > Unhide.tag suffix . • Related Topics • Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. In this example. page 334. 7. Click File > Save. 3. P-100A. For more information on generating reports. Run the Equipment List report. In SmartPlant P&ID. these should be updated to P. Click File > Close. page 265 268 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile 1. 6. Click Open. respectively. you must clear the SP_ID value. Z. Columns Y. respectively. The method above is valid.fluid code. Browse to the Equipment List report that you just created and modified.tag sequence number . 2. change P-100A to P-101D) by highlighting the last column in the report and the column right next to it. In the resulting report. and AA display the Tag Prefix. 5. 8.

Related Topics • Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now. you can specify that lines show a gap at these non-physical intersections. This procedure can improve the clarity of your drawing considerably. When AutoGap is on. can increase the efficiency of your design session. instead of turning on auto-gapping. page 270 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. A progress indicator at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. By default. Notes • Using Gap Now. page 270 AutoGap Command Tools > AutoGap Turns automatic gapping on or off in the drawing. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off. and the software gaps your lines automatically as you route them. the software does not automatically gap drawings. page 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 269 . Using the Gap Now command. the software automatically gaps drawings during the working session each time that you modify an item. or when you save a file. instead of leaving AutoGap on. The Gap Now command does not affect the setting for AutoGap. The toolbar contains an AutoGap button off. automatic gapping is off. In order to portray this condition. When AutoGap is off. Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant. or you can choose when the software performs gapping on your drawing by using the Gap Now command. Symbology and priority for your line gaps is set in Options Manager.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Gapping Lines: An Overview A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in the drawing but not physically in the plant. You can either turn auto-gapping on. for turning AutoGap on and • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. when you print. improves the performance of the software.

The status bar at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another command while the software completes the gapping. that is. Tip • You can turn the automatic gapping on or off by clicking AutoGap the main toolbar. gaps appear automatically. page 270 Perform Line Gapping in Your Drawing Now Click Tools > Gap Now. page 269 • Routing Lines: An Overview. page 156 270 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Gapping refers to the condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the drawing but do not physically intersect in the plant.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Turn AutoGap On or Off Click Tools > AutoGap. too. on the entire drawing. Related Topics • Routing Lines: An Overview. Notes • Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. • Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Notes on • • When you route lines and AutoGap is on. Using the Gap Now command does not affect any setting for the AutoGap command. page 156 Gap Now Command Tools > Gap Now Performs gapping on the current drawing. Related Topics • Gapping Lines: An Overview. Using Gap Now instead of leaving AutoGap on improves the performance of the software. page 269 • Turn AutoGap On or Off.

This command refreshes the graphic symbology of symbols in your drawing based on the current settings in Options Manager. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. You can force changes in Options Manager to appear in the current drawing by updating Options Manager settings. However. page 271 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 271 . page 190 • Update Line Settings. regardless of when the drawing was created. page 272 • Update Symbology. However. • Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Notes • Any user can update drawings using these commands.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview You can force the software to redraw the graphic representation of your data. page 272 • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. which are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. The ApplySettingsCmd macro also updates the line settings. the drawing. so that the current values in Options Manager are reflected in the drawing. Related Topics Update Symbology. you cannot revert to previous definitions. page 138 • Update Label Settings. check your permissions. to find out if you can make changes to the plant-wide symbology in Options Manager. The symbology and other settings defined in Options Manager usually only take effect in those drawings that are created after those values are defined. Once you load the current plant-wide definitions into your drawing. by using the Update Symbology command. page 272 Update Symbology Command Tools > Update Symbology Updates the line width and color symbology for your active drawing.

page 271 • Using Filters: An Overview.dll macro applies the latest settings to all runs on the current drawing. 2. For more information. 2. Related Topics • Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. • • Related Topics Updating Options Manager Settings: An Overview. However. but the new values only affect lines placed after the change. Click Tools > Custom Commands. Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings created after the change. see Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. you cannot revert to previous definitions. You can change these settings in Options Manager. double-click ApplySettingsCmd. The ApplySettingsCmd. The Update Symbology command makes it possible to override this constraint. Minimum Connector Segment and Routing Self-Avoidance. On the Custom Commands dialog box. You must run this macro for every drawing individually. Open a drawing. Once you load the current plant-wide symbology definitions into your drawing. page 271 272 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Update Symbology 1. unless Options Manager symbology changes again.dll. Click Tools > Update Symbology. you can always override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and choosing alternate symbology for items. in Options Manager control the behavior of pipe and signal runs when they are placed in a drawing or when an inline component is placed on a run. You do not have to update symbology for this drawing again. page 130 • Update Line Settings 1. even if you end your design session. page 138. Note • Two settings. Notes • The line width and color symbology for your active drawing is changed to the most recent symbology defined in Options Manager.

the original information does not change and vice versa. the pasted data is updated either automatically or manually. If you change the embedded object. You can transfer text. or you can insert a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a drawing. numbers. When you change the original data. the original information does not change. When you change the original data. You can link or embed information between drawings or documents that were created with this software and OLE software. You can move whole documents around or just parts of a document that you select. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 273 . You can embed an entire document inside another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. and an Excel worksheet. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy and a link in another location. You can copy and paste an item to duplicate it in another location. You can insert linked information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. When you paste the information in the destination document with the Paste Link option.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview This software is compatible with Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) software. The information that you move is an object. notes from Microsoft Word. The linked data is stored in the source document itself. • • • Linking or Embedding An object is data from one application that you insert in a drawing. You can embed information with the Paste Special command on the Edit menu. You can link an entire document to another document by inserting the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu. If you change the copied data. or images between drawings or documents that were created with this software and other OLE applications. and vice versa. Linking stores data in one location and places a copy with a link in another location. Embedding copies data in one document and stores the information in another document. you can use Microsoft Word to make a comment and then display the comment in your drawing. You can edit the linked information by opening the source document. the copy can be updated either automatically or manually. For example. a reference point or box is inserted into the destination document. Embedding copies information and stores the information in another document that was created in a different application. You can even create a drawing that contains another drawing. You can insert information created in another application with one of many methods: • You can cut and paste an item to delete it from one location and move it to another location. This box displays the information that you pasted.

If you want to link the existing object. Then. select Link on the dialog box. You can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. • 274 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . For example. Copy. later. you could link the drawing inside the documents that contained the reports. you could embed each drawing into a Microsoft Word document and send the Microsoft Word document to each reviewer. Notes • If you want to copy the information. Notes • If you want to embed the existing object. Linked information increases the document size only by the size of the displayed image. Or if you want to link the object. Each report would automatically display the results of the drawing updates. if you want to display a drawing in several different reports that you created in Microsoft Word. the software automatically embeds the information in the document. if you wanted to send out several drawings for review. Linking is also useful when you want to share information in many different places and set that information to update automatically. If document size is not an important factor. • • Linking or Embedding an Object If you want to insert an existing document. press Ctrl while dragging. or browse to the document. If you copy or paste information into an application in which you cannot edit the information. and not remove it from its original location. then link the data to another document. make sure you have not selected Link on the dialog box. The entire document is embedded into the drawing. On the dialog box. and Pasting The easiest way to embed an object is to use the Cut. For example. then use embedding. the information appears as a static picture. not by the size of the data itself. select the Create From File option and then enter the name. too.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview If you want to keep the document size small. you could update the drawing by editing it in this software. Embedded objects make the file size larger. Embedding is useful when the person viewing the document with the embedded information does not have access to the software that created the object. you can use Edit > Insert > Object. Embedded information is also a good choice if the information does not need updating. and Paste commands on the Edit menu in any OLE software. On the Paste Special dialog box be sure that you select Paste and not Paste Link. If you cannot edit the information. The person can still view the information if it is embedded in the document. select Paste Link on the dialog box. Embedding by Cutting or Copying.

page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. you cannot edit the object. page 282 • Embed a New Object. page 283 • Change a Link. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. you can double-click the object to open the software that created the object. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. You can edit the embedded image by double-clicking it. If you do not have the source software installed. Related Topics • Break a Link. where you can embed an image into a drawing. page 282 • Embed a New Object. Notes • You can click commands on a shortcut menu to activate the software that created the object. Related Topics • Break a Link. page 282 • Check Symbol Paths. If items inadvertently point to the wrong catalog. You must transfer those files manually. You can type an URL with http syntax in the Description dialog box to link World Wide Web documents to an item. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 275 . page 278 Image Command Edit > Insert > Image Opens the Insert Image dialog box. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software that just opened.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Editing a Linked or Embedded Object To edit an object. right-click the embedded object. you can correct this problem by using the CheckFilePathsCmd macro. To get the shortcut menu. Symbols in drawings usually point to the catalog associated with the current plant. See Related Topics for more information. page 283 • Change a Link. Important • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by workshare. page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object.

browse to the folder and image file that you want to embed in your drawing. 3. When you embed an object in a drawing. • When you link an object to a drawing. page 283 • Edit an Embedded Object. . You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking it. the software updates only the copy of the object stored in the drawing. Click Edit > Insert > Image. such as a . When you change an embedded object. page 273 276 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 277 • Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. all drawings that have links to that object are updated. Click OK.avi document. Related Topics • Break a Link.dwg drawing. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 278 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. The difference between linking and embedding is the method for storing and updating data. • The Insert Object command inserts any OLE-enabled object. Tip A box that is the size of the image appears at the end of the pointer so that you know where the image fits in the drawing. the software stores a copy of the object in the drawing. or CAD drawing. the drawing stores information about the location of the object. page 282 • Embed a New Object. 4. Move the pointer to the location in the drawing where you want to place your image and click to place it. such as a Microsoft Word file. You can edit a linked object by clicking Edit > Links and selecting Open Source.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed an Image 1. but the object itself is not stored in the drawing. where you can insert objects into a drawing with linking or embedding. When you change a linked object. On the Insert Image dialog box. page 273 Object Command Edit > Insert > Object Opens the Insert Object dialog box. 2.

see Paste an Item With a Different Format. If the software temporarily replaces some of the menus and toolbars. • 5. For more information. For more information. Tip You can insert an object that already exists also. page 280. Caution • Do not use these procedures to create a symbol file. text. you embed an entire document. If you attempt to create a symbol source file. Use Catalog Manager to create.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Embed a New Object 1. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. 6. 2. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. If you insert a document into the drawing. see Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. you cannot embed a selection in a document. After you create the object in its separate window. click the Yes button. serious problems result in the drawing. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. change. For more information. page 219. click the Create New option. spaces. page 278. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. Click Edit > Insert > Object. • Tip The contents of the list depend on the applications that are installed on your computer and that support linking and embedding. On the Insert Object dialog box. the terminators. 3. • • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 277 . click File > Exit or File > Update in the source application. Click the pointer. click anywhere outside the embedded object. With this procedure. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. 4. choose the software in which you want to create the object and then click OK. If a message appears asking if you want to update the document. In Object Type. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. Notes • You can move the embedded object again at any later time. or update symbols.

the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. type the name and directory path of the document that you want to include in your drawing. select the Link box. • Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. The software updates manual links only at the time that you indicate. serious problems result in the drawing. Click OK. page 273 Link or Embed a Previously Existing Object 1. Important • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. see Create a Drawing Template. which now includes a box the size of the object at its end. Click Edit > Insert > Object. To change the way the software updates links. click Create From File. Once you embed a border file into a drawing template and a drawing is created in Drawing Manager using that template. any changes to the border file are not reflected in drawings created prior to the change. page 121. 4. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. 5. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. If you want to embed the object. 3. or click Browse to find and choose the file. In the File box. at the location in the drawing where you want to insert the object. change. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. break. For more information about creating drawing templates. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. 6. You must transfer those files manually. In the Description box in the Properties window. or open the symbol source file. do not select this option. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. Click the pointer. If you want to link this object to your drawing. On the Insert Object dialog box. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. If you attempt to update. 2.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview • The software creates automatic links by default. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file.

The software updates manual links only at the time you indicate. An automatic update occurs when the drawing is opened: if a change is made to the source document and the drawing is already open. With this procedure. see Paste an Item With a Different Format. and they should be located in the same directory as the drawing files. To change the way the software updates links. In the Description box in the Properties window. page 280. For more information. You must press the Ctrl + Shift keys while dragging to link the information. page 219. see Move an Item With the Select Tool. by dragging the file from Windows into a drawing. you can create a link only to an entire document. For more information. such as a Microsoft Word document or Microsoft Excel workbook. the change does not appear in the drawing until it is closed and re-opened. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 279 . You can embed an OLE object. This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the drawing. you can type an URL with http syntax to link documents to an Internet item. the terminators. Click the ellipses to open the Description dialog box. Related Topics • Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. you cannot link to a selection in a document. Important • • • • • • • Linked or embedded files are not transferred by Workshare. You can link an OLE by dragging a document from the Windows environment onto the drawing also. If you insert a document into the drawing. You must transfer those files manually. You can place an object on the Clipboard and then embed it by using Edit > Paste Special. If you do not press these keys.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Notes • You can move the object at any time later. the information is embedded. The software creates automatic links by default. click Edit > Links and specify automatic or manual update mode for each link. page 218 or Move an Item Using the Move Button. spaces. and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. too. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. text.

Depending on the type of information. Notes • The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use the Cut or Copy command again. • 3. select the format that you want to use to paste the information from the list of available options. Pasted text and items remain selected after you use the Paste Special command until you select another item or click Esc. Tip You cannot paste an item unless you have previously placed it on the Clipboard with the Copy or Cut commands. Click Edit > Paste Special. Choose the Paste command to embed the information or the Paste Link command to link the information. page 280 Paste an Item With a Different Format 1.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Paste Special Command Edit > Paste Special Inserts the Clipboard contents into a drawing with the format that you select in the Paste Special dialog box. 2. Related Topics • Copy an Item. In the As list. If you select an item for the insertion point and that item cannot be replaced. the Clipboard contents are not pasted over the selected item. page 253 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 273 • Paste an Item With a Different Format. • • Related Topics Cutting or Deleting Items: An Overview. both options can be available. page 245 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Tip • The Results box gives an explanation of the outcome of your selection. page 273 • 280 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

select the link that you want to edit. Related Topics • Edit a Linked Object. and other OLE objects. Note • The software does not translate OLE objects that you have linked to your document when you export a . change.pid file to a MicroStation® or AutoCAD® file. page 102 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 281 . • 5. This command lets you manipulate Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects. On the Links dialog box. page 281 • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Caution • Do not use this command to change a symbol file. If you attempt to update. 4. Make the changes that you want in the source file. You can change links for Microsoft Word documents. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file. 3. 2. break or open the source file. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. Click Edit > Links on the main menu bar. Click the Open Source button. The Links dialog box opens.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Links Command Edit > Links Edits or updates links to objects in another document. Excel workbooks. serious problems result in the drawing. page 273 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. page 273 Edit a Linked Object 1. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview.

2. Note • If you have other links to the same source file. 3. break. change. click either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to the design software. Select Edit > Links.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Edit an Embedded Object 1. Edit the object. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. click the link that you want to change. • Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. page 273 282 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . or open the symbol source file. Double-click the embedded object. Click Change Source. 4. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. browse to a different drive or folder. If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces menus and toolbars. Tip • If you do not see the file that you want to link to. serious problems result in the drawing. 2. In the Links dialog box. specify the file that you want to change the link to. click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to the design software. Do one of the following: • • If you are editing the object in a separate application window. make sure you update all links to the new source file. 3. Caution • Do not use these procedures to change a symbol file. Tip You must have the appropriate software installed on your computer in order to be able to edit the object in its source software. If you attempt to update. In the File Name box. page 273 Change a Link 1.

Click Edit > Links. 3. • Related Topics Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview.dll. When the software asks you to confirm that you want to break the link. Select the link or links that you want to break. double-click CheckFilePathCmd. or open the symbol file. If you attempt to update. The log resides in your Temp directory and is named CheckFilePathsFor_yourplant. Use Catalog Manager to change or update symbols. Click Break Link. page 273 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 283 . serious problems result in the drawing. Caution • Do not use this command to edit a symbol file. change.log. 2. click Yes. Related Topics • Linking and Embedding Objects: An Overview. Click Close.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Break a Link 1. On the Custom Commands dialog box. Click Tools > Custom Commands. Tip • You can find this macro in \Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program. 2. break. 4. page 273 Check Symbol Paths 1. Notes • The CheckFilePathCmd macro checks the directory paths in the file names of all symbols used in the plant. and it creates a log file that reports all symbols missing from the current catalog. 5.

page 287 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Save As Assembly command prompts you to save the assembly in the correct directory. The file extension for an assembly is . The assembly placement quits. you must save the assembly where the other symbols are located. After you have placed an assembly. If you want to retrieve the assembly from the Catalog Explorer tree view. You must place the assembly first and then route piping to it. the file structure and symbols must be identical. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. you can drag the assembly into the drawing. You can create an assembly by selecting several items in a drawing and saving as an assembly. Instead of copying and pasting each individual item into a drawing at several locations. Placing assemblies is like placing any other item from Catalog Explorer into a drawing. you select the assembly from Catalog Explorer and click a location in the drawing. When you want to place an assembly into a drawing. The information in each label remains intact when you place the assembly.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Working With Assemblies: An Overview An assembly is a group of items that you can place in a drawing at one time. Or. an instrument loop that controls the valve. Assemblies cannot be placed inline. the items in the assembly are treated as separate items.pid. Assemblies can save time because you do not have to keep creating commonlyoccurring groups of items. which is specified in Options Manager. However. which is the same file extension as a drawing. Related Topics • Create an Assembly. and a piping bypass around the valve. Note • Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. page 286 • Place an Assembly. You can delete just one item without concern that the software deletes the entire assembly. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. you can place the group of items: the assembly. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. An example of an assembly is a control valve with vents on both sides. if required.

This command is available only when items are selected in the drawing. A red target appears at the end of your pointer. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 285 . Related Topics • Create an Assembly. you cannot use labels.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Save As Assembly Command File > Save As Assembly Saves selected items as an assembly. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. The Save Assembly dialog box opens after you specify the origin. Assemblies are saved with the . therefore. and you can name the assembly and place it in the proper directory. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. signal runs. page 286 • Place an Assembly. pipe runs. it does not appear as a step available for the Undo command.pid file extension. page 287 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. however. For example. You use this target to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. or child items. Note • The Save As Assembly command does not constitute an undoable action.

If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. On the Save Assembly dialog box. • • • Related Topics • Place an Assembly. To remove an item from the selection. If you use the default folder. the file structure and symbols must be identical. The assembly placement quits.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Create an Assembly 1. pipe runs. 4. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. click it while pressing Ctrl. Click File > Save As Assembly. Select several components in the drawing. enter the file name. • 5.pid. you cannot use labels. you must have write permissions to the folder defined in Options Manager. page 144 • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. Tip You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. 2. Tips • You can select more than one item at once by dragging the pointer to fence objects. However. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to specify the origin of the assembly for placement. however. page 284 286 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Click Save. page 287 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. Notes • Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced prior to using this command. In order to save assemblies. The file extension for assemblies is . signal runs. For example. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. or child items. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want. • 3.

Modify or delete individual components in the assembly as necessary. but the default assembly path is specified in Options Manager. signal runs. then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. • Tip You cannot place an assembly into a line that is already routed. In the Catalog Explorer list view. click the assembly that you want to place. you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files. Connect the pipe runs and instruments on either side of the assembly. page 284 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 287 . page 249 Notes • Assemblies are stored in a specific folder. 2. 4. The assembly placement quits. however. Some assembly members also appear during placement to aid you. you cannot use labels. For example. Press Esc to quit placement mode. Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. • Move an Item Using the Move Button. or you can escape placement mode by right-clicking. If you try to place an assembly into a plant that uses a different file structure. However. Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error message. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to position the assembly appropriately. the file structure and symbols must be identical. in the Catalog Explorer tree view. • • • Related Topics • Working With Assemblies: An Overview. 3. You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. you can use unattached ends of pipe runs. or child items. pipe runs. page 244 Delete an Item from the Drawing. Tips • The red target is the origin of the assembly. page 219 Mirror an Item About an Existing Mirror Axis or Linear Element. page 242 Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define. You can save an assembly in any directory that you want.Creating P&IDs in SmartPlant P&ID: An Overview Place an Assembly 1. Assemblies. If you use the default folder.

you can claim items on a fetched drawing. the Plant can no longer create drawings. Note • When you are using projects inside SmartPlant P&ID. any drawings that might have existed in the Plant before projects were enabled remain in the Plant. page 304 288 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the project controls modifications to that object. but the Plant can still delete these drawings. such as table layouts or formats or rules. at the project level. actual design work is still accomplished in SmartPlant P&ID. Once projects are enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. However. You cannot change reference data. managing and meting out that work is largely controlled from the Drawing Manager interface. All the modifications and claiming of objects is carried out in the design software. and check out drawings. unless the drawing is either fetched or checked out to a project. drawings are created inside projects. Only the project can use the commands on the Project menu in Drawing Manager to fetch. A project cannot modify objects it has not claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview After enabling and creating projects in SmartPlant Engineering Manager and using Drawing Manager to manipulate the drawings. Projects and Claiming One of the main capabilities associated with using projects in SmartPlant is the ability for a project to claim a drawing object. However. remember that the reference data belongs to the Plant and is used by projects of the Plant. You do not need to check out a drawing to claim items on it. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. When a project claims an object. but the claim states of objects inside drawings do have ramifications for drawing manipulation and for completing projects. page 289 • Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview. All drawing versions in the Plant are read-only drawings when projects are enabled. check in.

none of the items on that drawing are initially claimed. then those related items must also be claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claiming Items: An Overview A project in the Plant frequently deals with a subset of items within a drawing. you can manipulate the Drawing view properties so that the claim state of items is visually apparent. a error message will be displayed. The Properties window and the Engineering Data Editor do not allow editing of properties on items that are not claimed: the properties are read-only as if the drawing is in a read-only state. The Claim functionality provided by SmartPlant P&ID allows you to grant control of an item to a project. if you break a pipe run. A new item in a drawing is automatically claimed to the project. you must claim them. No other explicit prompts let you know that you cannot edit an item that you have not claimed. you can modify it using the same methods that you would use in a plant that is not project enabled. For example. the piping components and the instruments in that pipe run must all be claimed before you break it. you can delete it using the same methods that you would use in a green field plant. the nozzles attached to it will be deleted and the pipe runs connected to the nozzles will be modified. Before you can modify or delete any of those items. For example. Any modification that changes the meaning of the schematic design. However. the nozzles and the pipe runs must all be claimed before you delete the vessel. labels can be added or removed without claiming anything. some of the piping components and inline instruments in that pipe run will be reassigned to the new pipe run. Properties of items that are not claimed by the active project cannot be changed. the vessel. However. if you delete a vessel. After you have claimed an item. Also. a error message will be displayed. however. nor are the mirror and rotate handles available when you select an item not claimed by your project. when an existing drawing is fetched or checked out to a project. However. If they are not claimed. If they are not claimed. You cannot delete items that have not been claimed. Purely graphical modifications to drawing items are allowed without claiming those items. After you have claimed an item. For example. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 289 . Therefore. requires that the affected items be claimed. claiming fosters an ability to define the scope of work as narrowly as necessary. a symbol can be repositioned or the vertices of a connector can be moved. The simplest way to create a new item is to drag a catalog item from the Catalog Explorer and drop it onto a drawing. if the deletion of an item would result in related items being deleted or modified. A new item is created in a project in the same ways it can be created in a green field plant. Since claiming makes it possible for a project to work on an itemby-item basis. the pipe run. Therefore.

The Claim Mode controls how items are claimed by concurrent projects. Invalidly claimed items differ from the Plant items in that you cannot modify them and check a drawing into the Plant without first establishing a valid claim. you can invoke a claim at any time to expand the scope of your project. Exclusive mode enforces the rule that concurrent projects do not overlap at the object level. Invalidly claimed items can not be modified. the claims made by other projects to objects on that same drawing are now invalid if the project that checked in the drawing also changed an item claimed by a different project. Otherwise. If the Claim Mode is set to Shared. only one project can claim an item at any given time. it must be consistent with the state of the item in the Plant. run Verify for Check In to resolve the situation. Claim Mode The Claim Mode can be set to either Exclusive or Shared by using the Settings option in SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager. Invalid Claims When an item is claimed by a project. you can fetch a drawing with read/write permissions and claim its objects. When the Plant uses Shared claim mode and a project checks in a drawing. With this setting. Invalid claiming can happen only for Plants that support Shared claiming of database items. 290 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . but you cannot release the claim that is automatically created when your project creates a new item. conflict resolution at check in time is simplified. Conflict resolution at check in time will be more complex. You can determine the validity of a claim by using the Claim Status command. Claim commands appear on shortcut menus in the Drawing view. If an invalid claim is found but the item in question matches the item in the Plant. a drawing cannot be checked in if any objects that are not claimed differ from the Plant. This setting may be required for plants that have overlapping projects. and on the Edit menu. an invalid claim exists. and any new item created in a project is automatically claimed by that project. in the Engineering Data Editor. Shared mode allows concurrent projects to overlap at the object level. You can also release a claim at any time. This process automatically sets the claim to valid and allows the check in to occur. If the Claim Mode is set to Exclusive. however. Releasing Claims From inside a project. a single item can be claimed to more than one project.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview You do not need to check out a drawing to claim objects. Claims are automatically released on all drawing items when that drawing is checked into the Plant.

Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. • • • • • • Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. You must have full control user access permissions for P&ID Objects before you can claim objects. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. Claim commands are not available when you open a fetched drawing with read-only permissions. Claim comments can be viewed later by anyone in the Plant when the claim status is displayed. page 302 • Release a Claim. Once a project claims an item. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. allowing you to confirm the "claim-ability" of the items and enter claim comments. Remember that objects are claimed by the project. page 301 Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Gives control of the selected items to the current active project. page 292 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. The Claim dialog box opens. claim is not an undoable command. not by a single user. checking out. Thus. Drawing Manager is the only tool for checking in. and fetching drawings. Claiming items clears the Undo stack. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 291 . Claiming of labels is ignored. For more information about setting user access permissions. page 303 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Notes • A list of claimed items is automatically published to The Engineering Framework. page 292 • Claiming Items: An Overview.

this step can produce an error display on the Claim dialog box. select the item or items that you want to add comments to. and if the Plant uses exclusive sharing. Click Edit > Claim. Comments . Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item.Allows you to record comments for the claim operation that you are currently undertaking. record comments about this claim operation. claim is not an undoable command. In the Items to be claimed list. You can select multiple elements of this list and record comments for this claim operation. 2. In this list. Finally the command compares the selected items against the same items in the Plant and displays a warning if an object either differs from that item in the Plant or if the object does not exist in the Plant. Notes • • A newly placed item is automatically claimed by the project that placed it. page 292 • Claim Command. you can also see if a selected item is already claimed or has any other claim errors or warnings associated with it. You can discover if the selected items are already claimed by your project or another project. and fill in the Comments box. page 44 Claim a Drawing Item 1. Items to be claimed . page 289 292 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . On the Claim dialog box. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. The Claim command checks first if your project already has a valid claim on a selected item. These are the items that you claim to your project when you click OK. Once a project claims an item. Thus.Lists the items that are selected in the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor and their details. 3. not by a single user. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. Remember that objects are claimed by the project.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Claim Dialog Box Opens when you select an item and click Edit > Claim on the main menu bar and displays details of the items that you select for claiming. select the items that you want to claim. Next it checks if the items are claimed by another project. it can be modified by anyone with the appropriate permissions in that project. Claiming items clears the Undo stack.

claiming objects to your project involves many special relationships. the EDE treats the item properties as read-only. the Properties window allows the properties of that item to be viewed and modified. otherwise. When possible. The following topics discuss some of the ways that claiming restricts your activities. When you select an item that has not been claimed. When you claim an item. such as when using the Delete command.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Enforcing Claims Whether you are using shared or exclusive claiming mode. If any of the selected items are not claimed. the Properties window allows the properties to be viewed but not modified. You must have full control permissions on P&ID Objects before you can claim any drawing items. see the User Access chapter in SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help. otherwise. the properties are read-only. When you select a line segment. the Properties window allows them to be modified. the Properties window treats the whole group as read-only. Properties Window When you select a claimed item. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 293 . but an error message is displayed. If the run has been claimed. Controlling Access Each command in the software checks your permissions for the items that it modifies. For more information. you can edit its properties through the EDE. the properties can be edited. the Properties window displays the properties of the associated pipe or signal run. The properties of unclaimed items are read-only. The EDE behaves similarly to the Properties window. Engineering Data Editor (EDE) If the item has been claimed. In some cases. the software cannot prevent you from initiating a command. commands simply do not allow the operation to proceed if you do not have the necessary permissions. No items are ever claimed by the Plant. Modifying Properties Claiming impacts properties modifications in the following manner. if they are all claimed. it is claimed to your active project. Note • Claim Mode is defined in Options Manager for the Plant and all its projects. When you select multiple items.

An inconsistency indicator shows the inconsistency between the two related items. and the properties are not copied. Placing and Moving Drawing Items Sometimes the target item must be claimed. For the selected solution. The target pipe run must be claimed. If a model item is not claimed.The target item does not need to be claimed. Placing Flow-Oriented Components ." The target pipe run and all of its components must be claimed. if the flow direction is already defined. In certain cases. • • • 294 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . placing a piping component or inline instrument causes a zero-length line segment to be created and automatic line connectivity causes it to be joined to an existing run. see Placement Rules. however. The target of that zero-length line must be claimed. if the destination item is not claimed. such as when you place a nozzle on a vessel. In some cases this results in resolving an inconsistency. the user cannot modify any of the implied items that the model item owns. the applicable rules copy property values across the relationship. or Instrument Components . the action is not allowed. properties can be copied from that item without any problem.A flow-oriented component sets the flow direction of the target pipe run. When a relationship to an unclaimed item is created. Equipment Components. page 294. The following list explains how the relationship between an object and its target effects claiming. but other times it does not have to be claimed. The Reapply Rules button executes the placement rules that copy property values across a relationship.A reducer is a "line-breaking component. the Apply button is not available. Placing Reducers . • Placing Nozzles. if the rule calls for properties to be copied to an unclaimed item. Implied Items When a drawing item is claimed. For a description of how Reapply Rules can interact with claiming. Placement Rules When a new relationship is created. however. if it is not already set. Placing Piping Components or Instruments in Pipe or Signal Runs The target run must be claimed. You can place a flow arrow label. it means that you can modify that model item and all of its implied items.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box The Solutions section of the Consistency Check dialog box allows you to copy property values from one item to another.

None of the connected items have to be claimed either. a mirroring. the standard claim violation message displays. and your item will not "snap" into position. • • • If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. Routing Lines up to Owned Piping Components or Instruments . but not the selected symbol. sometimes not. with the Alt key pressed where necessary. If the target item needs to be claimed but is not claimed. Routing Lines up to Another Pipe or Signal Run . Routing Lines up to Freestanding Piping Components or Instruments . automatic line connectivity will cause an existing zero length run to be joined to the new run.The target run must be claimed. The black connection handle does not appear at the required point.The target connector must be claimed. Geometric Modifications Geometric operations include a geometric move. as described above. Routing Lines up to OPCs . freestanding placement is still allowed. If the lines are not claimed. and a scale or parametric modification. then you cannot place your item onto the target. the lines. the "no place" indicator is displayed.The piping component or instrument does not have to be claimed. If the required connected items are not all claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Placing OPCs on Runs . Rule-Based Moves All connected items must be claimed. a rotation. Therefore. Here is a list of the cases where claiming plays a role: • • Routing Lines up to Nozzles . you are not allowed to connect to the target. The target run must be claimed. as if you pressed the Alt key. must be claimed before these operations are allowed.The piping component or instrument must be claimed since it will be adopted by the new run. In certain cases. when routing a line segment up to an existing inline component. the move operation can become a geometric move. The selected symbol does not have to be claimed to perform these operations. the target will not highlight.The OPC does not have to be claimed. Placing and Modifying Lines Sometimes the target item must be claimed. Rotation and Mirroring of Inline Components Rotations of 180 degrees and mirroring about the local y-axis for inline components are special geometric modifications cases because the lines are disconnected before and reconnected after the operations. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 295 . If no type of placement is allowed at that point.The nozzles do not have to be claimed. In most cases.

the following stipulations apply: 1. Internal Vertex of a Run Modification of an internal vertex can result in the run being split. The selected run must be claimed. 3.Placing a label on an area break causes a dynamic property to be added to the area break. 296 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . claiming plays a role in the following cases: • Placing Driving Labels . The Join Runs command allows you to combine two connected piping or signal runs into a single run. The target item may need to be claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Geometric Modification If you move a line segment or a line vertex that is internal to a line. 2. Both of the runs and all components in both runs must be claimed. For this to happen. then the run it belongs to must be claimed since the branch point is deleted and the adjacent line segments in the existing connected run are merged. then the following stipulations apply: 1. Placing Labels on Area Breaks . unless the flow direction is already defined for the line.A driving label sets one or more properties on the labeled item. However. Breaking and Joining Runs The Break Run command allows you to split one piping or signal run into two pieces. However. 2. The run to be broken and all components within that run must be claimed. The entire run and all components must be claimed. you do not need to claim it. This includes flow arrow labels. modifying a driving label modifies the labeled item. If a component is connected to the endpoint. Placing and Modifying Labels The target item for a label usually does not need to be claimed. • If you modify a label. you must claim the item. then the piping or signal run that owns the selected segment does not have to be claimed. Therefore. The target item may need to be claimed. Extreme End of a Run If you modify the start point of the first line segment in a run or the end point of the last line segment in a run. the area break must be claimed. it does not need to be claimed. 4. The target item must be claimed. consequently. If the existing connected item is a branch point for the run.

you must claim that item. Find and Replace Items that are not claimed can be found. and so no claiming is required. If the target line run is not claimed. the target is not highlighted as a valid replacement target. If the target is not claimed. but they cannot be replaced.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Placing Multiple Representations This stockpile command enables you to place an additional representation of an existing equipment item into the design in a different drawing. To replace an item using these commands. Replacing Drawing Items The Replace and Replace Mode commands replace one item representation in the design with a different representation and change the value of the "type" attribute for the design item. it is not highlighted as a valid target when you move the pointer over it. Replace Mode The claim status check takes place as you move the pointer over the target. Related Topics • Place Multiple Representations. The Replace button is not available if an unclaimed item is selected. Modifying an area break allows the shape to be changed. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 297 . Placing Gaps Placing a gap symbol into a piping or signal line implies that the target line must be claimed. This is a purely geometric modification. You must claim the selected equipment item before this command is made available on the Stockpile menu in the EDE. page 154 Placing and Modifying Area Breaks The placement of an area break does not create any new relationships and therefore does not require any claiming. thus creating a multiple representation in the database.

Drawing Items Drawing items are deleted from a design using three different commands: Delete. All dependent items must be claimed. Item in Select Set Equipment • • Additional items that must be claimed for Delete All nozzles. All lines that are attached to selected items or are dependent on those items must be claimed.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Deleting Items Claiming impacts item deletion in the following manner. All of these commands check if the selected items and some dependent items are claimed. then the delete operation proceeds normally. and so forth • Nozzle • • Equipment Component Line Segment • • • Branch Point • • Piping Component • • Instrument • 298 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The following table expands on this idea. If any of the items or the dependent items are not claimed. Delete From Model. equipment components. all items that are deleted along with a selected item must be claimed. and Cut. If all of the selected items and all of the related items are claimed. item type by item type. and item notes All item notes on those equipment components and nozzles All runs with lines attached to those nozzles All item notes All runs with lines attached to the nozzle All item notes The pipe or signal run that owns the segment All components in that run All runs with lines that attach to that branch point All item notes All item notes All runs with lines that attach to that piping component All instrument components – actuators. functions. That is. an error message appears.

exist in the stockpile and have relationships to member items on a drawing or in a stockpile. When an OPC is in the stockpile. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 299 . OPCs can be deleted from the stockpile only if both OPCs in a pair are in the stockpile and are deleted at the same time. it maintains its relationship to the partner OPC. select Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant P&ID > Programming Help. The software checks the claim status before setting any values. if the item is claimed. In a project context. both OPCs in a pair must be claimed before they can be deleted. Moving Between Stockpiles The Move to Different Stockpile command in the Engineering Data Editor allows you to move an item from one stockpile to a different stockpile. it can be deleted from the stockpile. If the plant item group is claimed and all of its members are claimed. If the item is claimed. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. If the item is not claimed. The selected model item must be claimed before you can use this command. the property can be changed. Validating Properties The software uses validation functions before setting properties on items. the property can not be changed. Refer to the Extending the Capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID and Logical Model Automation Reference topics.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Item in Select Set Additional items that must be claimed for Delete • • All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the instrument All item notes All runs with lines that attach to the OPC The partner OPC must be claimed also OPC • • • Stockpile Items Most items in the stockpile do not have any relationships. then the plant item group can be deleted. For more information about validating properties. For these items. Plant item groups. and so forth. the Delete command opens the standard claim violation message. If the plant item group or any of its members is not claimed. for example loops. packages. If the item is not claimed.

Update Task . Properties are copied from the primary pipe run to the other pipe runs. If they are not claimed. page 298 Release Claim Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Release Claim Allows you to relinquish control by your project of the selected items. the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box.Running an update task sets or changes some properties of an existing item. A confirmation message is displayed so that you can confirm the release-claim action. If all of the necessary items are not claimed. You must claim the pipe runs to be modified. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. If it is not claimed. Claims must be released before projects can be completed or for other projects to be able to check in drawings with changes. The item to be updated must be claimed before it can be updated. The new item is claimed automatically as soon as it is created. Create Task . The item to be deleted and possibly other related items must be claimed before the task can do its work. Related Topics • Deleting Items.The Framework > Correlate command correlates pipe runs to the same design basis as an existing pipe run that is already correlated. page 301 300 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . the task status is set to Error and a note is added to the Notes area on the General tab of the Task Properties dialog box.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview To Do List and Correlating Items Claiming impacts the To Do List and other TEF commands in the following manner.Running a create task creates a new item in the stockpile.Running a delete task causes the target item to be deleted. Correlate Items . page 289 • Release a Claim. they cannot be correlated. Delete Task .

• Claim Status Command Engineering Data Editor > Edit > Claim Status Opens the Claim Status dialog box. The actual status is displayed in the Claims column of the list.Opens the Claim dialog box.Releases the claim from your project. For more information. A confirmation message is displayed. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 301 . 2. In order to complete the claim release operation. choose Yes to release the claim. An item claimed by your active project is denoted by an item with an invalid claim on it is denoted by any other state remains blank.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Release a Claim 1. Right-click the item or select set and click Release Claim. Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. which displays the details of the claimed state of the selected items and enables you to claim items. You can also release claims on items when you display their claim status. Notes • You cannot release the claim on an item that is claimed to your project if it is a new item that was created in your project. page 289 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. page 302. then the SmartPlant ID. and so forth. SP_ID. claim items. You must select the items in the Drawing view or the Engineering Data Editor before using this command. A selected item in the list is highlighted in the design window. If a selected item that appears in this dialog box does not have an item tag. Claim . is displayed in the Item Tag column. select Yes on the confirmation dialog box that opens. page 302 Claim Status Dialog Box Opens when you select and item or items and click Edit > Claim Status on the main menu bar. Release Claim . select the items for which you want to release claims. release the claims to items. and you can claim the item and record claim comments. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. You can review the details of the claimed state of the selected items. release the claims to items. and discover other details of the claim status. see Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item.

and claim comments that were entered when the claim was made. the project that has claimed the item. To relinquish claims on those items by your project .Opens the Details dialog box. On the Claim Status dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Details on the Claim Status dialog box. Related Topics • Claim Status Command. review the information in the list of items. New items are automatically claimed to the project that created them. and any claim comments that were entered when it was claimed. To see more detailed information about the claim status of that item. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. Related Topics • Claim a Drawing Item. page 301 Details Dialog Box Displays details about the claim status of the item that you selected in the Claim Status dialog box. You can discover the project that has the claim. the user that claimed the item. the user who claimed it. page 302 • Release a Claim. the user that claimed it. page 45 • Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item. Click Edit > Claim Status. select elements in the list and click Release Claim. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. and any related comments. 6. 2. 4.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Details . 302 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 292 • Claim Status Command. 5. page 302 Display the Claim Status of a Drawing Item 1. 3. select elements in the list and click Claim. To claim the items to your project. select the items for which you want to display the claim status. and clicking Ctrl + C makes the selected items available to paste into another document. The New Item entry is automatically added to the comments for an item that is new to the drawing. You can select all the items in the list by using Ctrl + A. select an element in the list and click Details. and you can discover what project has claimed the selected item. their claim comments are always "New Item". Since newly placed items are automatically claimed by the project that places them.

2. the software displays the item tag in the Claim Status dialog box. page 289 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 303 . Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. You can use this command to switch the claim symbology on and off. Notes • You define the line color and weight used to designate claim status on the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. not the line pattern. GUIDs are automatically generated for every design item. Related Topics Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology. page 289 Show Claims Command View > Show Claims Sets the appearance of drawing objects as it is specified in the Claims tab of the View Properties dialog box. Click View > Show Claims again to turn off the display of claim status in the symbology of drawing items.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Note • When you see the item tag listed for claimed items and an item tag is not defined for the selected items. Click View > Show Claims. the software displays the GUID for that item. If you turn on the display of claim status in the drawing. Using the options on the Claims tab causes only the color and line weight to change. • Related Topics • Claiming Items: An Overview. then when you print the drawing. When an item tag is defined for an item. the claim status will be plotted. page 303 • Display Claim Status in the Drawing Symbology 1.

or you can compare a version in your database to a version in the Plant or another project database. you can view two versions side-byside and examine their differences by using the Tools > Compare and Refresh command. if you move an item and change one of its properties).Indicates the selected group will be removed from the version displaying on the right. or deletion of a property in the Properties window or Engineering Data Editor in SmartPlant P&ID or through automation.Indicates that the selected group will be added to the version displaying on the right. Values for the Change details include the following. they are displayed in time-order from left to right. • Graphic refers to an item that has changed only in its graphical representation in the design. Delete . • Every change grouping and every changed item is assigned a category. Change details displays information about selected groups in the Change groups area. 304 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . • Two versions are in the active database . and if more than one category applies (for instance. that is. a change. The relationship between the two views depends on whether you are comparing two versions in your own database or comparing your version to a version in another database. Differences display in the following two categories. • Add . • • The two versions are displayed in two Drawing views. and the right-hand view is the newer version. the item is moved or otherwise graphically manipulated in the drawing. That is.Indicates the selected group will be modified on the version displaying on the right. Modify .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Comparing and Refreshing Versions: An Overview When more than one version of a drawing exists. Differences between drawing versions are assigned to logical change groups. you cannot compare one drawing to another drawing. described as left and right views. then the highest priority category is displayed.The left-hand view is the older version. You can compare two versions from inside your own Plant or project database. Keep in mind that you can compare a drawing only against a version of itself. which are listed on the Change groups area of the Compare and Refresh dialog box. Data refers to a mismatch in the properties assigned to an item that exists in both drawings. that is. that is. addition.

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Two versions exist in different databases . To refresh any differences between these two versions. the drawing refreshes to display the changes. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. Compare With Dialog Box Opens when you click Tools > Compare and Refresh allowing you to select a drawing version to compare against the version that you currently have open and active. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. Available Databases . you must set the Action column to Refresh. If you accept the changes.Lists all the different databases that currently have a version of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box.Lists all the versions of the chosen drawing in the database you named in the Available Databases list. you use the drawing in the plant. To refresh a project drawing. Be sure to refresh all of the changes that do not involve claimed items because these are the changes that have been checked in by other projects. You want to include these changes in your drawing so they will not be lost when you perform a check in. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 305 . and the left-hand view belongs to the version in another database because you cannot be assured that time-order is the logical order to display the versions.The right-hand view is reserved for the version in your active Plant or project database. Change groups are marked if the changes affect items you have claimed. The differences display in what is known as a change group. Compare and Refresh Command Tools > Compare and Refresh Allows you to refresh the active drawing with data from another version of the drawing. Change groups are marked if it affects items you have claimed. History .

Enlarges the selected area by allowing you to draw a fence around the area. Options include: 306 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Change groups . You must first select an item in a drawing.Changes the pointer to an arrow allowing you to select an item.Reduces the display of the selected area where you click.Area that lists the changed items in groups. the Default items color displays. Action .Displays the Compare Options dialog box.Displays the properties in either an alphabetic list or by specific category. The report contains the details of the compared drawings. A listed item contains all the items this change effects. Allows you to customize the display colors for items that differ between the two drawing being compared.Prints the entire Compare and Refresh dialog box contents. Find in List .Displays modified properties. Number . Zoom Out .Displays a report in Microsoft Excel. Zoom In .Highlights the line in the Change groups and Change details areas.Enlarges the selected area where you click.Defines which action is to be taken involving the selected change. Print . Find in Drawing . You can also specify to print either the right or left view by using the drop-down arrow to select either Right View or Left View.Allows you to move the display in any direction by dragging the pointer across the view. Pan .Zooms to the selected item. Generate Report . You must first select an item in either the Change groups or Change details area.Displays colors in the drawings as defined using Compare Options. Select . Alphabetic Categorized . Zoom Area . If not selected. Show Modified .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Compare Options . Checkbox column .Displays the number assigned to each change group.

Change .Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.Removes the listed item from the version on the right.Indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example. • Claimed . Delete .Describes the type of item.Changes the listed item in the version on the right.Displays the category of the change. Actions include: • • • Add . a vessel has been moved). The column indicates any differences in the two versions and which version contains the change. • Data .performs no action on the selected drawing group.Indicates that a property value has changed (for example.Indicates if an item is a valid or invalid claim. • Category .Defines the results of the compare.Indicates that the items in the group have been claimed. and No Action .Area that lists the details of the item in each change group. Modify . • Claimed .Applies any drawing changes to the open drawing version. Graphic . Options include: • Data . Specific Item Type . Category .Adds the listed item to the version on the right. Change details . Graphic . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 307 .Displays the specific type of item. Valid Claim . Result . a property value for a vessel).Validates Invalid Claims for the selected group (no drawing changes are applied). Refresh .Indicates that the claimed item is a valid claim.Displays the category of the change.indicates that a change has been made to an item in the drawing (for example.Describes what action is required to make the drawing in the right frame match the drawing in the left frame. Item Type .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview • Validate . a vessel has been moved). a property value for a vessel).

Show Modified . Categorized . Black is the default color for this option. This button only applies to modified items that exist in both versions.Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is highlighted. Right-only . Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager.Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one or both of the Drawing views. Alphabetical . when an item is within your locate zone. Selected items . modified properties). Identical items .Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Dialog Box Properties Window Toolbar Allows you to customize the properties that are displayed in the Properties window of the Compare dialog box.Allows you to choose a color for the display of drawing items that are identical in the two views. The active color scheme is displayed in the Compare dialog box status bar. 308 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Blue is the default color for this option. Dark green is the default color for this option.Lists properties in alphabetical order.Allows you to choose a color for the display of items that exist in both views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example. all properties are listed. Left-only . for added and deleted items. Compare Options Dialog Box Opens when you click Compare Options on the Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the various comparison states are displayed in. for instance.Toggles the display of only those properties that are different between the properties that belong to a selected drawing item. Highlight items .Displays properties grouped by specific categories.Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the right-hand Drawing view only. Red is the default color for this option. Different items .Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the left-hand Drawing view only.

In the History list box. Validate will display as an option only if you have an Invalid Claim. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 309 . 5. In the Change groups area. Click OK to refresh the drawing and accept any changes or Cancel to dismiss the dialog box. 4. Click Tools > Compare. 7. 6. select the drawing you want to compare your current drawing with. On the Compare With dialog box. select No Action. On the Compare and Refresh dialog box. review the information in the Change groups and Change details areas. The version you are comparing it to displays on the left. 2. select a database using the Available databases drop-down list box. Click OK. Refresh. Using the drop-down list. click in the Action column.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions 1. or Validate. 8. 3. Your current drawing displays on the right side of the screen.

Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Compare and Refresh Examples The following examples provide details for reconciling data and graphic differences between your current drawing and a previously created version of that drawing. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a data change was located. a data change is found during the compare. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Data Example In this example. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the new property value). All items in the group are valid claims. the property value will be modified as shown in the Change column. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but a change has been made to the Cleaning Requirements property. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. Change details indicates the compare located a different property value (Cleaning Requirement) in the current version. If you Refresh the version. When the current version is compared to the selected version.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 311 . a graphic change is found during the compare. Change details indicates the compare located a graphic modification to a vessel (Jacketed Vessel) in the current version. a jacketed tower exists in the version to be selected for the compare. The current version contains the same jacketed tower but it has been moved to a new location. The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on the left. Clicking in the Action column of the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the previous location of the vessel).Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Graphic Example In this example. the graphic modification will be accepted as shown in the Change column. If you Refresh the version. The setting are not applied to a version until you click OK. When the current version is compared to the selected version. All items in the group are valid claims. Change groups indicates there is only one group and a graphic change was located.

312 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and a property for the jacketed tower has been changed. Clicking in the Action column of any of the three Change groups allows you to select either No Action or Refresh. The current drawing contains the same jacketed tower and nozzle. a jacketed tower with a nozzle exists in the version to be selected for the compare. Change details indicates the compare located an existing nozzle was moved (Graphic) and a property value change (Data) in the current drawing. When the current drawing is compared to the selected version. a new nozzle has been added. the action described in the Change column will be performed when you click OK. All items in the groups are valid claims.Working with Drawings in Projects: An Overview Data and Graphic Example In this example. a data and graphic change is found during the compare. The current drawing appears on the right and the drawing it is compared to appears on the left. Change groups indicates there are three groups of differences. The original nozzle has been moved. If you select Refresh for any of the three groups.

Consistency checking continuously monitors your work when you change or add items to a drawing. Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. An approved warning accompanies the off-page connector (C). if the composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules that your company has defined. pipe runs inherit properties from nozzles. Additional consistency checking and design propagation are defined in Rule Manager. This illustration shows the inconsistency indicators that highlight incorrect relationships at a junction of items in a drawing.Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency checking verifies the suitability of work that a designer performs while creating the drawing. and offers hints. The software verifies. describes specific problems. Using these solutions. page 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 313 . A warning appears at the point where the valve and pipe run intersect (B). in real-time. One solution is to approve a warning and thereby remove the inconsistency from the drawing. The software includes pre-defined standard industry design propagation: for example. you can decide the best method to resolve an inconsistency. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 • Show Inconsistencies. page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. Another solution is to reapply placement rules that normally copy properties from one side of a junction to another at the time of item placement. The software displays all the inconsistencies. An error appears where the pipe run connects to the pump nozzle (A).

click View > Show Inconsistencies again to clear the selection of the option. Select Show > Inconsistencies to toggle the display of inconsistencies off and on.Consistency Checking: An Overview Show Inconsistencies Command View > Show Inconsistencies Turns on or off the display of indicators that identify inconsistent relationships in the active view. page 313 314 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Note • Also. error-free relationships. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. 2. Click View > Show Inconsistencies. The software does not mark consistent. page 314 Show Inconsistencies 1. If you do not want the inconsistencies to appear. inconsistent relationship indicators appear in the drawing. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. you can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing in order to display a shortcut menu. When this option is selected. page 313 • Show Inconsistencies.

page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. As you create a drawing. If a location in the drawing has only one or multiple inconsistencies. consistency checking monitors your drawing for design discrepancies. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 315 . page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency.Consistency Checking: An Overview Properties Command Right-click an inconsistency indicator and choose Properties to display the Consistency Check dialog box. you can correct the problems by reviewing them on the Consistency Check dialog box.

You open this dialog box by right-clicking an inconsistency indicator and choosing Properties from the shortcut menu. Inconsistencies .Consistency Checking: An Overview Consistency Check Dialog Box Opens when you display the properties of an inconsistency indicator. Other sections of the dialog box provide details that are specifically related to the selected inconsistency. When this dialog box first appears. which is provided for information only. and solutions for resolving the inconsistency. Item 1 . All inconsistencies that occur at a junction. regardless of severity. For a lengthy error or warning. the software displays information specific to that inconsistency in the Solutions box. are listed on the Consistency Check dialog box. Item 2 .Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the first item. their specific problem area. You cannot change the inconsistency description. the software automatically selects the first item in the list.Allows the display of inconsistencies that pertain to the second item. When you select one of the inconsistencies in the list. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears. When the Consistency Check dialog box first appears.Displays the actual error or warning.Lists all inconsistencies that exist at the selected junction. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. Description . and alternate design pressure between a piping component and pipe run — three different problems but at the same junction. 316 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . A specific example of this type can involve data inconsistencies for nominal pipe diameter. and lists the inconsistencies. all items involved in the inconsistency are selected. normal operating temperature. a ToolTip appears to reveal the entire description.

Note • Canceling selection of Item 1or Item 2 excludes the item from the select set in the drawing and thereby affects the display in the Properties window. • • You can choose the appropriate solution in the Solutions list and click Apply in order to correct an inconsistency.Performs the solution you choose from the Solutions box. 2. Reapply Rules .Lists solutions for resolving the drawing inconsistency. After selecting an inconsistency from the Inconsistencies list. Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 317 . Related Topics • Properties Command. Apply .Consistency Checking: An Overview Solutions . 3. and after clicking Apply. • Notes • The options for solving the inconsistency in Solutions vary depending on the type of inconsistency. or you can click Reapply Rules to copy properties from one side of the indicator to the other according to placement rules. review the list of possible problem areas at the junction. you can right-click an inconsistency indicator and select Properties. Invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. you can select the correct solution from this list.Copies properties from one side of the selected inconsistency to the other according to placement rules. Open a drawing. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. page 28 • Resolve an Inconsistency. Warnings. Tip In addition. page 317 Review an Inconsistency 1. On the Consistency Check dialog box. The inconsistencies are then re-evaluated and the dialog box is updated. Approved warnings. the selected solution is performed.

the Drawing view offers different inconsistency indicators: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view. Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction. page 313 318 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview.Consistency Checking: An Overview • To alert you to possible problems.

On the Consistency Check dialog box. Or you can use the Properties window to change the nominal diameter of either the pipe or nozzle. When you right-click the indicator. Double-click an inconsistency indicator. Notes • Consistency Check identifies the type of problem with these symbols: Errors Warnings Approved warnings • A Drawing view also offers graphical symbols to alert you to possible problems: Warning for suspicious construction in the Drawing view Error in the Drawing view that warrants your inspection and correction SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 319 . Click Apply. The options in the Solutions list vary. If you determine that this solution is the best one. Tips • Or you can right-click an inconsistency indicator to review its properties. This action can correct the inconsistency. • 4. Changing the diameter confirms that the values are consistent with the information that exists in Rule Manager. 3. 2. Chose the appropriate solution from the Solutions list.Consistency Checking: An Overview Resolve an Inconsistency 1. you can select it and click Apply. select the inconsistency that you want to correct in the list. 5. Open a drawing. you can click the Reapply Rules button on the Consistency Check dialog box. which could involve inconsistent nominal diameters of a pipe and nozzle. you can choose the Reapply Rules command. • Tip • In addition. for example. depending on the type of inconsistency. Tip • An example of a solution is Copy property value Item 1 => Item 2.

page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 322 • Review an Inconsistency.Consistency Checking: An Overview Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. page 317 320 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Notes • The Reapply Rules button is available on the Consistency Check dialog box. invoking the placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. page 313 • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency. page 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 321 .Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Rules Command Available on the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. choosing Reapply Rules causes properties to be copied from one side of the inconsistency to the other according to the same rules that govern copying properties at placement. choose the button for Reapply Rules Then you can reapply rules with one click. if your vessel has a cleaning requirement assigned to it and you place a nozzle on the vessel. rather than a single inconsistency. Frequently this command resolves the inconsistency in your drawing. and drag it to the main toolbar. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. too. An inconsistency indicator at the junction between the vessel and the nozzle is displayed for the mismatched cleaning requirements. the nozzle does not inherit that property. then the cleaning requirement is copied to the nozzle at placement. Go to Tools > Customize. • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. For example. however. That is. then the rule that copies the cleaning requirement to the nozzle at placement is re-invoked and the inconsistency is resolved. If you use Reapply Rules at this indicator. It is possible that you still need to choose Properties from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve any remaining inconsistencies there. But if you place a nozzle on the vessel and then you assign a cleaning requirement to the vessel. this command reapplies the rules defined in Rule Manager for copying properties at placement.

choose the button for Reapply Rules and drag it to the main toolbar. Select Reapply Rules. Go to Tools > Customize.Consistency Checking: An Overview Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency 1. page 313 322 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Placement rules are defined in Rules Manager. rather than a single inconsistency. Right-click the inconsistency indicator to display a shortcut menu. • • • Related Topics • Consistency Checking: An Overview. You can use the Reapply Rules command from the Consistency Check dialog box. You can add the Reapply Rules command to the main toolbar. This button is particularly useful when you want to reapply rules to a select set. Notes • Invoking placement rules is not necessarily sufficient to resolve all inconsistencies at a junction. and on the Toolbars tab in the Tools category. 2. too. It is possible that you need to choose the Properties command from the Inconsistency Indicator shortcut menu in order to open the Consistency Check dialog box and resolve or approve any remaining inconsistencies there. Then you can reapply rules with one click.

Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. you can also populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. During the import process. Also. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. page 267 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 323 . page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. You can import data and items into the database using reports and other files.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Drawing Data: An Overview There are several ways you can import data into SmartPlant P&ID. SmartSketch files can be imported into SmartPlant P&ID using the SmartPlant Migrator wizard.

which is saved to your local TEMP folder. Related Topics • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. These results are also available in SPImport. Note • Relationships between items cannot be imported. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. This dialog box opens when you use the Import > Data File command on the File menu. Import log . page 267 324 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import Data File Command File > Import > Data File Allows you to import data and items into the database from reports and other files. Related Topics • Import Data File Command. page 268 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. only items and their properties.log. page 265 Import Log Dialog Box Shows the progress of the data importation process and allows you to review the log file.Lists the results of the file importing process. page 267 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 324 • Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile.

During processing. Any graphics that cannot be mapped are placed in a SmartSketch file that is then placed as an inserted object in the SmartPlant P&ID file. Certain symbols cannot be placed unless a rule has been met. To account for the rules in SmartPlant P&ID. Connectors and pipes 4. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. Placement Order After the SmartSketch file is scanned and all its objects are mapped to SmartPlant P&ID objects. Symbols attached to symbols that are attached to a connector or pipe 6. Symbol placement is performed in this order: 1. Symbols attached to stand-alone symbols 3. The database does not contain any information for these unmapped objects. Stand-alone symbols 2. In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. SmartSketch does not have rule sets. the Migrator looks at the SmartSketch symbols to determine what the symbols are attached to. SmartSketch graphics that are not recognized as symbols SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 325 . Labels 7. the Migrator maintains graphic visual fidelity.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Import SmartSketch Command File > Import > SmartSketch Allows you to import data from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID and starts the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. the Migrator uses rules to determine the order in which to place the resulting symbols. the Migrator scans the SmartSketch file and maps all the objects to SmartPlant P&ID equivalent objects. a nozzle cannot be placed unless it is attached to a piece of equipment. For example. When migrating your SmartSketch file to SmartPlant P&ID. Symbols attached to connectors or pipes 5. page 328 Using the SmartPlant Migrator The SmartPlant Migration Wizard is a data migration tool provided by SmartPlant P&ID for converting and importing process flow diagrams (PFDs) and preliminary process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) from SmartSketch into SmartPlant P&ID.

compressors. You can check the symbol map file. and if that same symbol with same properties is available in SmartPlant P&ID. Symbols .Appropriate flow direction is established based on the terminator of the connector. Supported Templates . • Nozzles .Piping linear objects not connected to nozzles are placed in SmartPlant P&ID. All of those attributes. or you can edit a symbol map file to equate the symbol names between SmartSketch and SmartPlant P&ID. both products have independent sets of symbols. You define custom properties for SmartPlant P&ID symbols by using Catalog Manager. migrate to the SmartPlant P&ID property database. Properties . Because SmartSketch is file-driven and SmartPlant P&ID is databasedriven. symbol definitions and attributes migrated from a SmartSketch file are stored as properties in the SmartPlant P&ID database. Flow . Notes • The AABBCC code is not displayed in Catalog Explorer or the Properties window in SmartPlant P&ID.Intergraph Process Flow and P&ID symbols map to the SmartPlant P&ID reference data included with the software. you must create your SmartSketch drawing with the SmartPlant P&ID rule set in mind. Nozzles are required in the SmartSketch document for connections to be established when converted to SmartPlant P&ID. if given a value in SmartSketch. pumps. therefore. You can add your own unique attributes to a P&ID symbol in SmartSketch. SmartSketch has a default set of attributes for vessels.Nozzles are required for connection of piping in SmartPlant P&ID.Delivered symbols with a matching AABBCC code are mapped intelligently to the equivalent SmartPlant P&ID symbol. This file is created during the migration process and you can open this file by using Microsoft Excel.csv. for duplicate codes. These attributes are the same as the SmartPlant P&ID properties for the same items.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Rule Considerations Because the SmartPlant Migration Wizard cannot account for all the rule possibilities that are defined in the default SmartPlant P&ID rule set or a customized rule set. SmartSketch symbol attributes are conditionally migrated. You have to make valid connections manually in SmartPlant P&ID. 326 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . custom SmartSketch attributes can migrate into those properties. this means that the attribute must exist as a SmartPlant P&ID property for that symbol. but are not connected. To view the code. Non-Nozzle Connections . you must open the item in Catalog Manager. and shell and tube exchangers.User-defined and default SmartSketch properties are mapped to an equivalent SmartPlant P&ID property. SymbolMap.

SmartSketch does include a subset of the SmartPlant P&ID labels. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. Open the P&ID label in Catalog Manager. for example. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 327 .The following list shows planned limitations of the Migrator: • • • Multiple iterations are not supported Flow direction that is indicated by using symbols is not understood The primary goal is not to take fully developed P&IDs into a data-centric environment The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. 3. This rule maintains visual fidelity even if there are items that could not be mapped intelligently. In order to assign an AABBCC code to a SmartPlant P&ID label so that it matches a SmartSketch label. The properties of these smart labels are passed to the symbol to which they are attached and migrate to SmartPlant P&ID. enter the appropriate AABBCC code. the symbols that were migrated. 2.log file in the Temp folder.All unrecognized graphics are inserted in the SmartPlant P&ID drawing as embedded SmartSketch graphics. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. type AABBCC_code. which are labels that are associated with one or more object properties. 1. the time that the migration started and stopped. and most of the common labels are smart labels. In the Type box. Then the file you just created can migrate Notes • • In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. 4. Limitations . 1F6Y01. Right-click the symbol page in order to open the File Properties dialog box. select Text. Notes • Labels in SmartSketch files are migrated very much like symbols. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview SmartLabels . and any errors encountered during the migration. Any label placed in SmartSketch must have an equivalent label in SmartPlant P&ID before it can migrate. and click the Symbol tab. 5. do the following. In the Name box. In the Value box. • Unrecognized Graphics and Annotations .Item tags and other single property labels are maintained intelligently.

log file in the Temp folder. • Related Topics • Using the SmartPlant Migrator. If you want to migrate only a portion of a file. select the geometry that you want to migrate and copy and paste it into another file in SmartSketch. if you want to. empty drawing in Drawing Manager. Click File > Import > SmartSketch. • 3. page 325 328 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 328 Import a SmartSketch File Important In order to import a SmartSketch drawing into SmartPlant P&ID. Notes • The SmartSketch Migrator converts entire files only. You can determine if all the graphics in your file migrated correctly by viewing the GetSmart. 2. This file contains information about the migration such as the file that was migrated. Tip • The Migrator allows you to browse in the file system for the SmartSketch drawing that you want to import. and any errors encountered during the migration. • Tip You can create a new. Follow the instructions in the SmartSketch Migrator. the symbols that were migrated. 1.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Related Topics • Import a SmartSketch File. Then the file you just created can migrate. you must have SmartSketch installed on your computer. the time the migration started and stopped. Open the drawing that you want to import the SmartSketch objects into.

or . All three reports.xml file from the appropriate folder. whether they remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing. and Exchangers. are updated with data from the newly imported file. Such spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List. Click the Stream ID list and select a stream ID. and Heat Exchanger Equipment List. 4.xls. Click the Calculate button next to the Stream No. Select a pipe run from the drawing to display the Properties window for the pipe run. 5. Previously imported items. page 329 • Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet. • 3. Tip If the Properties window is not open. Related Topics • Display Help for Programming With SmartPlant P&ID. cell to display the Stream Number dialog box. During the import process. Pumps. . Click OK to populate the Properties window with the selected stream ID. Vessels. Click the Browse button and select the Aspen Zyqad stream data . Pump Equipment List. You can easily update stockpile items that originate from importing Aspen Zyqad data by re-importing a data file.txt. page 267 Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data 1. page 13 • Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data. 2. For more information. are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to be imported.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Importing Aspen Zyqad Stream Data You can populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad stream data file. Important • If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report. Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when importing data into the design software. see the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide. you can click Edit > Properties after you select the pipe run. you can assign the stream and its associated engineering data to the pipe run. modifications must be made to the import code to accommodate the changed report layout. Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are supported. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 329 .

Related Topics • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile.Importing Drawing Data: An Overview Note • Existing values in the Properties window are redefined by importing Aspen Zyqad stream data. page 265 330 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .

Microsoft Excel starts. For example. however. Then the software performs the following tasks: 1. When creating your report. Each report contains at least one report item to define the item type of the report. reports are fully customizable. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. and then the Excel workbook opens. Several default report templates already exist. Your report definition is retrieved from the Excel workbook. and pipe run. 2. You begin your reporting process by selecting a report template from the Reports menu and then selecting items in the drawing for inclusion in your report. only the information about nozzles that are associated with pumps is collected. You can create your own reports that contain the information that you want to see in a format you choose. all nozzles in the database are collected for your report. The relationships that exist between the various item types constitute additional available information for a report. a report based on the equipment item type contains a report item named Equipment. This report item makes the properties associated with each piece of equipment available for inclusion in your report. 3. a nozzle is related to the equipment with which it is grouped. nozzle. however. The location of a report item in the tree hierarchy affects the properties that are collected for the associated item type. Your data is retrieved based on the report item definitions of the report template. Examples of item types include equipment. Each report item is based on an item type. Each report consists of a Microsoft Excel workbook and a report definition. Each report that you create is based on an item type. This item type serves as the starting point for collecting data for your report. Your report definition contains one or more report items organized in a tree hierarchy. if a nozzle is added as the toplevel item in the tree. The report template is copied to the report output folder. you can create a report. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. a nozzle report item can be added to access data about nozzles because nozzles and equipment are related. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. which describes the data to collect and how to organize the data in the workbook. instrument. see the Properties Glossary. If the nozzle is added as a child of Equipment: Mechanical. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 331 . At any time during the design creation process. For example. only items that have a relationship with your selected item type can be used as input. You can define additional report items to access more properties for more item types. you do not have to include every available property in your report if it is not appropriate.Generating Reports: An Overview Generating Reports: An Overview Reporting is the process of retrieving information from the database and displaying the information as formatted output. For example. For example.

page 349 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. • Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Data prints to the Microsoft Excel workbook using the cell mapping data in your report definition. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. page 334 332 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username.Generating Reports: An Overview 4. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports.

which displays a list of all plant-level reports associated with the current plant. Include items in drawing stockpile . This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command.Generating Reports: An Overview Plant Reports Command Reports > Plant Reports Opens the Plant Reports dialog box. The location of these report templates is defined in Options Manager.Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. This list is alphabetical.Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. This command is available on the Reports menu on the main toolbar and also on the View menu in the Engineering Data Editor. Note • The Engineering Data Editor is the area where you can view stockpile items. Current Selection . page 38 Plant Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose a report and specify what items to report on. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected. If you want to run a report based on items in your Engineering Data Editor. Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 331 • Navigating in the Engineer Data Editor: An Overview. if you want to run a report on table items. Entire drawing . use the Reports menu. Selecting a plant report from this list and specifying the items that you want to report on generates the associated report in Microsoft Excel. If you want to run a report on drawing items. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 333 . use the Engineering Data Editor View menu.Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. If you have a drawing in the Design window and you want to report on items in that drawing. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > Plant Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > Plant Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. use this command from the Reports menu. use this command from the Engineering Data Editor View menu.

Select the report that you want to generate. Related Topics • Generate a Report. • 4. In the Report using area on the Plant Reports dialog box or the My Reports dialog box. Click Reports > Plant Reports.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. Before running the Line List report. choose the items that you want to report on. the software gives you the option to report on all items. • Tip Or click Reports > My Reports to select a customized report that you defined already. 3. • • Related Topics • Generating Reports: An Overview. The software stores the reports that you generate in your Windows directory under \Profiles\username. page 334 • Plant Reports Command. You can include more items in your report by selecting Entire drawing. In the Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. 2. page 265 334 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Tip If you select no items. page 331 • Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile. page 333 • Select an Item. Notes • You must have installed Microsoft Excel on your computer to display reports. select the items that you want to include in the report. verify that every line in the selection has an Item Tag. Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. page 147 Generate a Report 1.

If you want to run a report based on drawing items. This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. This list is alphabetical. Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor. The options that appear in this area depend on the view. Note • You can define the location for storing user-level report templates by clicking Tools > Options and then selecting the Files tab. This dialog box opens either when you click Reports > My Reports on the main toolbar or when you click View > My Reports on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. page 334 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Report using . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 335 .Produces a report containing the items currently selected in your drawing or table. They can be stored on your local workstation. This option is not available if no drawing or table items are selected.Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. use the Engineering Data Editor menu. You cannot choose the Include items in drawing stockpile option when you choose Current Selection. use the Reports menu.Allows you to specify whether or not you want items that reside in the drawing stockpile in your report. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • Generate a Report. page 331 My Reports Dialog Box Allows you to choose one of your custom reports and to specify what items to report on. if you want to run a report based on table items. access this command from the Reports menu on the main toolbar.Produces a report containing the contents of the entire drawing. that is active when you access this dialog box. Entire drawing . not the Engineering Data Editor command. access this command from the View menu on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar. Current Selection .Generating Reports: An Overview My Reports Command Reports > My Reports Opens the My Reports dialog box which lists all user-level reports. Include items in drawing stockpile . This option is available only when you use the Reports menu command. If you want to run a report on drawing items. if you want to run a report on table items.

Related Topics • Generate a Report. page 335 • Select an Item. page 147 336 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Using either of these options allows the software to ignore the 255 item limit. You can include more items in your report by selecting the Entire drawing option.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • A report can contain up to the default value of 255 items. page 334 • My Reports Command.

as the name suggests. Fixed format templates allow the greatest amount of freedom in formatting your report. In addition. So the software allows you to define report templates in several different formats and with all manner of information from the design database. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 337 . that report template is tightly linked to the plant that creates the property. the same report template is valid. and thereby how you can map the properties that you want into your report templates. the template file stores an internal identifier for that property. as long as all plants use the same property name. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. too. page 340 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. see the Properties Glossary. You can create report templates in three different formats: • • • Tabular Fixed Composite Format Report The delivered report templates are all tabular format reports. Each report is based on a unique item type. combine tabular and fixed formatting. therefore. and the properties that are associated with that item type are readily available to include in your report. thus. In order to discover how items and their properties are related. any item that is related in any way to the basic item type of your report makes its properties available to include in the definition of your template. such as Equipment List and Pipe Run List. which is included in the glossaries attached to online Help. but you can control the content of the template also. and composite report templates. Not only can you completely control the format of your report. Now the property name is mapped into the report template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. the properties of inline components and instruments can be used in a pipe run report because inline components are related to their pipe runs. you create your own custom report templates or modify the delivered templates in order to gather and display the specific information that you want. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. when a property is mapped to a report template. For instance. Portable report templates In previous versions of the software.Generating Reports: An Overview Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview Although the software includes several default report templates.

• • • 338 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 348 • Generate a Report. The Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is important for setting aside space for the header and empty rows between lines in the report because the placement of report item properties is restricted in the tabular format report template. Be sure to include space in your header for the labels of your columns. such as Unit or Plant Name. page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular Format Report All the delivered report templates are tabular format reports. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. the output appears like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type D-100 T-100 Horizontal Drum 100 Potable Water Tank Horizontal Drum Vertical Tank Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. all properties populate the report by using the same format defined for the first row. For example. When the report is generated. 2. Tips • The header is part of the tabular format report template where data is not mapped based on rows. tabular format reports are row-based. you can add graphics in your report header. page 338 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. click Options. On the Options dialog box. you are free to type a label and map report item properties anywhere in the lines that you designate for your header. the report template for an Equipment List can appear like this: Equipment Name Equipment Description Equipment Type #Equipment::Name# #Equipment::Description# #Equipment::Type# When the report is generated. choose the size of your report header. In other words. The header is a good place to put information that applies to all the items in your report. page 357 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Also. page 334 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template 1. That is.

designate two rows of data for each report item and then an empty row. and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Only one property can be mapped to a given cell. for example the Line List. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option in the Options dialog box. When you add any property value in the header. Choose the property that you want to map to your cell from the Map Properties menu. Save the template and quit Microsoft Excel. Choose the number of empty lines that you want between rows in your report. Tip Some report templates. For more information. Properties for all the items follow the format you map for the first one. page 357. Select a cell in your report template where you want to map a particular property. • 10. Click OK to close the Options dialog box. Each row is filled with properties for one item. in your header. Complete column headings in the last row of your header. • • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 339 . The location of plant-level report templates is specified in Options Manager. although the same property can be mapped to more than one cell. • 5. Complete general labels and graphics. • Tips • You only have to map properties for one item. 4. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. 7. Notes • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. The location for user-level templates is defined on the Files tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options).Generating Reports: An Overview 3. The items on this menu are chosen when you define the contents of your template. if you create a template based on an existing template. if needed. Repeat the previous steps until you have mapped all the properties that you want to map on this report template. 9. Select Blank as your source template if you want to create a fixed or composite format report template. 8. 6. Tip This cell can be either in the body of the report or in the header. the format of your report template is also tabular.

and from the menu select the property that you want to map to the cell you chose in the previous step. • 340 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . When defining the report template. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. For more information. When you generate your report. Choose a cell on your Microsoft Excel worksheet and type labeling information into it. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. When you generate a fixed format report. You can simply map properties to cells without any labeling if you want. you only edit the first worksheet. Tip The properties on the Map Properties menu are specified when you define the contents of your report. and the layout for each worksheet matches the layout defined for the first worksheet. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 357. Choose a cell where you want the property associated with the labeling to appear. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. all fixed format worksheets. Click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 338 Fixed Format Report The fixed format report creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. 2. Repeat the previous steps until you have labeled and mapped all the needed report item properties to the corresponding locations in your template. Tip A label is not a required feature of a fixed format report template. follow the format of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. the data for each report item appears in its own worksheet. page 349 • Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. page 348 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template 1. one for each item of the report item type. page 340 • Display the Properties of a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Related Topics • Composite Format Report. • 3. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. 4.

page 340 • Tabular Format Report.Generating Reports: An Overview Note • You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere on your worksheet. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 341 . page 337 • Fixed Format Report. Define the layout of the first Microsoft Excel worksheet. the first worksheet is automatically fixed format. The properties of the first item are displayed on the first worksheet. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. page 340. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. In a composite format report template. Tips • Each item in the report has its own page. You choose your report format on the Report Properties dialog box. choose Blank from the Source template list if you want to create a composite format template. For more information about defining fixed format report templates. In your Microsoft Excel workbook the first sheet contains the fixed format report. page 348 • Generate a Report. see Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. but the properties for subsequent items in the report are displayed starting with the third sheet because the second worksheet is tabular format. and the second sheet contains the tabular format report. page 344 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. page 334 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template 1. page 341 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. Note • Because the delivered report templates are tabular format. page 338 Composite Format Report The composite format report template is a combination of fixed and tabular format reports.

and the header is saved on the new sheet because the entire header no longer fits in the space allotted on the first sheet. Define the layout of the second Microsoft Excel worksheet. although you can map the same property to more than one cell. You can customize the number of rows in the report header by using the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar and choosing a larger value in the Rows in report header option. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. For more information about defining tabular format report templates. however. save the template and quit Excel. When you add any property value in the header. • 3. 2. Notes • You can map only one property into a given cell. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. a new Microsoft Excel worksheet is created. • Related Topics Composite Format Report. page 338 • 342 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . After you have defined the layout for the first and second worksheets in your report template. the Options command is available for you to use in the tabular portion of the composite report template. page 338.Generating Reports: An Overview You use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. see Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. the second worksheet is automatically tabular format. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. In a composite format report template.

you must specify an item type.Generating Reports: An Overview New Command Reports > New Displays the New Report Template dialog box. page 340 • Tabular Format Report. formats.Specifies your report format. This dialog box provides options for defining plant-level and user-level templates. Templates in this list appear in alphabetical order. page 338 New Report Template Dialog Box Displays options for creating plant-level and user-level report templates. tabular. whereas. names. plant-level template.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item. You do not have to edit the report template when you first create it. The software appends .Lists the names of all existing report templates and Blank. if you do not chose Blank. and descriptions for your report template and define the item type upon which you base your report.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 343 . You only edit the first worksheet. Available options include fixed. or Blank.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating. This name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. If you do not select a Blank source template type. and composite. Related Topics • Composite Format Report. one for each item of the report item type. Report Type . follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. but all fixed format worksheets. All delivered report templates are tabular format. Fixed format . Source template . page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 341 • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 349 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. If you chose Blank. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. Name . You select a user-level template. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > New on the main menu bar.Defines the item properties available in your report. Item type . the item type automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template. The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. You can assign source templates. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. then the Item type option automatically displays the item type that corresponds to your source template.

In the Report type box.Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular formats. In the Name box. Tips • You can create a new report template based on an existing template by specifying a source template also. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. 2. Subsequent fixed format worksheets are created after sheet two for each item of your report item type when you generate your report. 4. 344 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 348 • Edit Command. Description . or the template format is row-based. The first sheet in the workbook is Fixed format. Since delivered reports are all in tabular format. When you save the template. page 345 • New Command. nonetheless. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row. On the New Report Template dialog box.Describes the report type that this template produces. All delivered reports are tabular format. you must choose Blank if you want a fixed or composite format report template. select Blank from the Source template list. the second sheet is Tabular format. Composite format . type a meaningful name to describe the report template you are creating. page 34 Create a New Blank Report Template 1. page 350 • Edit a Report Template. You can select Blank for a tabular format report template. That is. choose template format. You can assign any description. select an item type. For more information.xls to the name. • 5.Formats your report in a table. 3. • Tip This entry is the name of your Microsoft Excel workbook. page 349. Tip • These options are only available when you choose Blank from the Source template list. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. In the Item type box. see Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Tabular format . the software appends . Click Reports > New.

page 348 • Fixed Format Report. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. to create plant-level report templates. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Note • You must have valid privileges to edit a report template.Generating Reports: An Overview 6. If you want this template to be available at the plant-level. When the software gives you the option to edit your new template in Microsoft Excel. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. select the Add to plant reports option. type a description for the template. You can select a template and view its properties and edit it in Microsoft Excel. In the Description box. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 345 . Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. click OK and define the layout and contents of the template. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. page 340 Edit Command Opens the Edit Report Template dialog box. For more information on those procedures. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. 7. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. • 9. Click OK to create the template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 8. This dialog box lists all the available report templates. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. Tip You must have the appropriate permissions. page 341 Related Topics • Composite Format Report.

346 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Source template . granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. or Blank. Select a template from the list.Displays the selected template in Microsoft Excel. The name matches your Microsoft Excel workbook. Templates in this list appear in alphabetically. the software automatically specified the Item type option as the item type that corresponds to your source template. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box. The software appends . If you choose the Blank option. Related Topics • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template.Allows you to enter a meaningful name to describe the report that you are creating.xls to the name when you save the Excel workbook. Name . page 345 • New Command. page 348 • Edit Command. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Edit on the main menu bar.Displays the names of all existing report templates and Blank. page 349 • Edit a Report Template.Defines the item properties available to populate your report. and composite. Item type . Click Properties to view and update properties for a report template. the Item type option is automatically specified with the item type that corresponds to your source template. Available options include fixed. Properties .Specifies your report format. if you do not choose Blank. Open . whereas. plant-level template. You select a user-level template. page 34 Report Properties Dialog Box Displays properties for plant-level and user-level report templates.Displays the Report Properties dialog box where you can modify the description and the report template format. If you select a source template other than Blank. The Blank option creates a Microsoft Excel workbook with no predetermined formatting information. Available reports . tabular. Important • You must have the correct privileges. Report Type .Lists all report templates available to edit or customize. you must specify an item type.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates and opens the selected report template in Microsoft Excel so that you can make changes to it. to edit plant-level report templates.

The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on your worksheet. or the report format is row-based. You only edit the first worksheet.Formats your report in a table. The first sheet in the workbook is fixed format. the properties of each item included in your report begin on a unique row.Creates one Microsoft Excel worksheet for each item.Describes the report type that this template produces. follow the format of the first worksheet when you generate your report. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. the second sheet is tabular format. page 344 • Display the Properties of a Report Template. Tabular format . When you generate your report. That is. All delivered report templates are tabular. page 34 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 347 . page 345 • New Command. Description . the software creates subsequent fixed format worksheets after sheet two for each item that matches your report item type. one for each item of the report item type. Composite format . but all fixed format worksheets. You can assign any description. page 348 • Edit Command. page 350 • Edit a Report Template.Generating Reports: An Overview Fixed format .Formats your report in a combination of fixed and tabular styles.

Quit Excel. Click Reports > Edit. then on the Excel menu bar. 3. Click Open on the Edit Report Template dialog box to display the report in Microsoft Excel so that you can edit the layout and contents of your report template.Delete in the Immediate window. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. Tip Because you are modifying a template that already is defined. changing the Report type option and the description are the only available actions on the Report Properties dialog box.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). On the Edit Report Template dialog box. Select View > Immediate Window. 2. 3. • You must have the correct permissions. page 341 Define the Contents of Your Report Template. to edit a report template. Click Properties on the Edit Report Template dialog box in order to edit template properties on the Report Properties dialog box. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. select a report from the Available reports list.Generating Reports: An Overview Edit a Report Template 1. page 357 Notes • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. see • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. select Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor and follow these steps: 1. 2. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. page 331 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Application. Type Sheet1. page 337 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. 4. For more information about these procedures.

6. click OK to open Microsoft Excel and define the contents and layout of your report. Because you are creating a report based on an existing template. page 331 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 349 . For more information. On the New Report Template dialog box. 4. choose Blank from the Source template list. the format of your report template is tabular. type a description for the new report template. In the Description box. • Related Topics • Composite Format Report. page 340 • Generating Reports: An Overview. 3. page 341 Notes • Because the delivered report templates are all in tabular format. 5.Generating Reports: An Overview Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template 1. In order to make all options available. see Create a New Blank Report Template. Click OK. Click Reports > New. select an existing template from the Source template list. see Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 2. type a name for the new report template. In the Name box. page 340 Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. For more information about those procedures. page 357 Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. page 341 • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 337 • Fixed Format Report. page 344. page 338 Define the Layout of a Fixed Format Report Template. When the software gives you the option to edit your template. some options on the New Report Template dialog box are not available. if you create a template using an existing template.

Lists all available report templates. This dialog box opens when you click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar. page 331 Delete Report Template Dialog Box Displays a list of available report templates. You can delete a selected report template if you have the proper privileges. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. page 345 • New Command. Click Properties.Generating Reports: An Overview Display the Properties of a Report Template 1. page 34 350 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . to delete a report template. page 351 • Edit Command. 3. page 331 • Report Properties Dialog Box. Select a report from the Available reports list on the Edit Report Template dialog box. Available Reports . 2. page 351 • Generating Reports: An Overview. Note • You must have valid privileges. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. which allows you to select and delete a report template. Related Topics • Delete a Report Template. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. page 346 Delete Command Reports > Delete Displays the Delete Report Template dialog box. Select Reports > Edit.

4. then click Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor in Excel and follow the steps below: 1. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. page 331 SmartPlant Reports Toolbar Appears when you are editing or creating a report template in Microsoft Excel. page 360 • Options Command. select a report from the Available reports list.Application. Important • You must have the correct privileges.Delete in the Immediate window. 2. 3. page 348 • Map Properties Command. page 17 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 351 . granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. 3. to delete a report template. Select View > Immediate Window. Quit Excel. and the toolbar is displayed the next time a report is edited. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. On the Delete Report Template dialog box. 2. Click Close. Type Sheet1. Note • If the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is missing when editing report templates in Microsoft Excel. Related Topics • Edit a Report Template. Related Topics • Define Command. Click Reports > Delete on the main menu bar.CommandBars("SmartPlant Reports"). Click OK to delete the report template.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete a Report Template 1. page 357 • Edit a Report Template.

Use the Options command on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar to designate space for your header and to specify the number of blank lines that you want between rows of data on your report. For the selected item in the Report on tree. In order to define the layout of the report item properties. The Options command is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want on the worksheet. A report definition describes how to collect the properties data and how to format it in a report. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. 352 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . which allows you to define a report template specifying the layout and contents of your report. pipe run.Generating Reports: An Overview Define Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Define Opens the Define Report Contents dialog box. and so forth) and controls how the properties of that item type. which opens when you click Define on the Define Reports Contents dialog box. You map properties to the individual Microsoft Excel cells to define the content and layout of your report. To create a report definition (a list of report item properties available to include in your template). Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. This template is a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains cells and worksheets. page 348 Define Report Contents Dialog Box Defines new items to include in your report and selects the cells to include for the new items. you define the properties that you want available for inclusion in your report template. use the Define Report Items dialog box. instrument. page 344 • Edit a Report Template. Each report item is based on an item type (equipment. This dialog box opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. nozzle. you assign properties to particular cells. Note • In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets.Displays the Define Report Items dialog box. Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. or item types related to it. Define . are retrieved from the database. Select the cell and then select the property from the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.

page 34 New Items Dialog Box Opens when you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box and displays a list of items that are related to the item that you selected there. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle.Adds the selected item type to the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Removes an item from the tree view and from your report structure. The software adds this item type as a child of the item type selected on the Define Report Contents dialog box. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. Report on . Its properties are no longer available for your report template. That is. To include the properties. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. page 348 • New Command. the equipment item type only reports on equipment associated with a nozzle. For instance. its properties are available for inclusion in your report template. if you add the equipment item type under nozzles. and equipment without nozzles is not reported. That is. If you add a new item type. and equipment without nozzles is not reported.Displays a tree view of item types the properties available for inclusion in your report template. page 349 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. a new item type added into the hierarchy under another item type does not give you access to the same properties that you have if the item type is higher in the hierarchy. you must select an item from the Report on list and click Define. Apply . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 353 . New . Then you can map the properties that you select to cells in your report template. You use this dialog box to specify new item types to include in the Report on tree.Displays the New Items dialog box. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template. Select an item type to make its properties available to include in your report. For instance. Note • The level into which you add an item type affects the properties that you can access for your template.Generating Reports: An Overview Delete . Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.

page 344 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. in turn. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Automatically adds a special Report Item Group Total property to the Map Properties menu on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.Generating Reports: An Overview Items related to . page 357 • Edit a Report Template. onto your report. page 34 Define Report Items Dialog Box Specifies the report item properties available for your report. The properties of the new item types are then available to use in your report. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. For example. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This dialog box is accessed by clicking Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. You can rename the item. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. and so forth. is accessed by clicking Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. then items are never grouped together because a unique tag is a property that items never share. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. page 344 • Define Command.5" nominal diameter. 1. such as item tags. page 348 • New Command. page 348 • Edit Command.Displays the name of the selected item type. If you have duplicate item type names in your report item type hierarchy. be sure not to map unique properties. If you do. Select item types from this list to include in your report template. Name . page 34 Properties Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Displays properties for a report item so you can select properties to use in your report template.Displays a list of item types related to the item type that you selected in the Report on tree on the Define Report Contents dialog box. The Report Item Group Total property displays the number of items that have identical reported properties. 2" nominal diameter. If you want to tally similar items in this way. page 345 • New Command. you can use this feature to give you the total numbers of valves with 1" nominal diameter. Group by the selected property . Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. which. Select the properties to include for each report item type and define sorting and filtering for those properties. the software prompts you to rename the new item type uniquely.

Displays all properties for the report item you specified on the Define Report Contents dialog box. For example. Only select-listed properties can be displayed in their short value form.Includes the numerical index of the select entry along with either the short value or select list value for that property. double-clicking an item in the Selected properties list moves it to the Available properties list.Lists the report item properties you have selected from the Available properties list that are consequently available for inclusion in your report. Left Arrow . see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. page 343 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 355 .Displays the short text value. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the right arrow.Generating Reports: An Overview Repeat parent data .Moves the selected item in the Selected properties list to the Available properties list. Also. In a few cases.Moves the selected item out of the Available properties list and into the Selected properties list. Use short text . Also. Related Topics Edit a Report Template. Use select list index . the short value is longer than the regular value. if your report contains Unit then Drawing as a child of Unit. double-clicking an item in the Available properties list moves it to the Selected properties list. For more information about select lists and their values and indices. page 348 • New Command. Right Arrow . Selected properties .Displays the cells of parent item data in your report. selecting this option for Drawing causes repetition of Unit cells on any line containing Drawing cells. You can select more than one item by using the Shift and Ctrl keys and then clicking the left arrow. Available properties . page 34 • New Report Template Dialog Box. which is defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager.

page 360 • Options Command.Moves the selected item up in sorting priority. To select a new filter. page 348 • Map Properties Command.Specifies the sorting order (ascending or descending) for the report data. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. in turn. Also.Moves the selected item in the Sort properties list to the Available properties list. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box. You can select more than one item and then click this button.Displays your selected filter. page 348 • New Report Template Dialog Box. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. Applied filter . page 343 356 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. in turn. Left Arrow . which allows you to choose or to further define item types for your report template. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box. which. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. double-clicking an item moves it to the Sort properties list. Browse . Up Arrow .Moves the selected item in the Available properties list to the Sort properties list. Sort properties . Related Topics Define Command.Displays the Select Filter dialog box. which opens when you click Define on the Define Report Contents dialog box.Generating Reports: An Overview Filter Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the filter that you want to use for your report item. page 352 • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. You can select more than one item and then click this button. double-clicking an item moves it to the Available properties list.Lists all the properties of your report item. Available properties .Moves the selected item down in sorting priority. Down Arrow . type a valid filter name or click Browse to locate a filter. Also. opens when you click Define on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar. page 17 • Sort Tab (Define Report Items Dialog Box) Defines the cells that you use to sort the report items and how. Right Arrow .Displays the properties selected for sorting. Order . which. This tab is part of the Define Report Items dialog box.

2. On the Properties tab of the Define Report Items dialog box. On the New Items dialog box. choose that node and repeat the previous steps. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 357 . Tips • When you click New on the Define Report Contents dialog box. 8. When you have added all the items that you want from this list. Click Define. select an item with properties that you want for your report template. 4. choose the properties that you want to map to your report template. Tip If the item that you choose has the same name as an item elsewhere in the hierarchy.Generating Reports: An Overview Define the Contents of Your Report Template 1. you must type a different name for it in the Name box. Select the node in the Report on hierarchy under which you want the new item type to appear to add a new report item type so that its properties are available to map onto your report template. The highest node in the Report on hierarchy under which you can add a new item is the node that belongs to the report item type that you base your template definition on. Click Apply. You can add items under any nodes subordinate to the main report item type as long as they have items related to them. Change the name of the item that appears in the hierarchy by typing text in the Name box. select the new item that you want to add to the hierarchy. • 5. you can choose from only those items that are related to the item you selected in the Report on hierarchy. click Close. On the Define Report Contents dialog box. click Define. On the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. • 7. 6. 3. Click New. • 9. Tip If you want to add more new items under another node in the hierarchy. • Using the New command skillfully allows you to navigate in all directions in the plant hierarchy and gather properties from throughout the plant database. 10.

Choose the PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet macro to generate this data for only the active worksheet. and so you can repeat the previous steps to continue adding more items and specifying their properties. 12. Related Topics • Define the Contents of Your Report Template. which provides options for defining header and spacing details in your report template. • Tip The Define Report Contents dialog box remains open. use the Filter tab. When you have selected all the properties that you want in your report. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. In order to generate From and To data for all Microsoft Excel worksheets. page 337 • Edit a Report Template. page 331 358 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The Options button on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar is not available for editing a fixed format report template because you are free to place headers and data anywhere you want to on your worksheet. you can switch from a filter that displays all pumps to a filter that displays only active pumps. choose the property or properties to sort on by using the Sort tab. For instance. page 331 Options Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Options Opens the Report Options dialog box. Click OK.Generating Reports: An Overview Tips • If you want to sort the order in which your items are listed when you generate a report. • Related Topics • Creating and Editing Report Templates: An Overview. Now you can use the properties you have specified in the layout of your template. click OK on the Define Report Contents dialog box. click Tools > Macro > Macros > PrintFromToDataForAllSheets in Excel. 11. page 357 • Edit a Report Template. If you want to change the filter that finds your report items. page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. • Notes • All the properties that you have made available to map into your template are now displayed when you click Map Properties on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar.

Rows in report header .Defines the number of blank lines between each row in your report. Skip lines between rows . page 349 • Define the Layout of a Composite Format Report Template. In fixed format report templates. page 341 • Define the Layout of a Tabular Format Report Template. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template. It is not available for fixed format report templates because you are free to place captions and properties in any configuration that you want.Generating Reports: An Overview Report Options Dialog Box Specifies the number of empty rows between items in your report and the number of rows in your report header. You can enter a value in the box or use the scroll buttons to select a value. page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. page 348 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 359 . This dialog box opens when you click Options on the SmartPlant Reports toolbar in Microsoft Excel. page 338 • Edit a Report Template. The maximum value allowed is 1000. you are not constrained to have a header or rows at all.Specifies the number of rows in your report header. Note • The Options command is available for tabular and composite format report templates only.

page 348 • Generating Reports: An Overview. You can select a cell in your report template and then assign a property from the Map Properties list. page 349 • Edit a Report Template. The software places the corresponding property in the selected cell. and you can add properties to the menu by using the Define command again. page 331 360 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 344 • Create a Report Template Based on an Existing Template. The Map Properties menu contains a subset of all the properties in the plant database.Generating Reports: An Overview Map Properties Command MS Excel > SmartPlant Reports Toolbar > Map Properties Displays a menu of all properties associated with your report. This menu is populated with the items that you define with the SmartPlant Reports toolbar Define command. Note • The SmartPlant Reports toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel when you create or edit a report template. You do not have to map all the properties in the Map Properties menu. Related Topics • Create a New Blank Report Template.

such as TrueType® fonts. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font. Use scalable fonts. For more information about installation. The software supports plotting using standard Windows plotting capabilities. your drawing prints exactly as it appears in the Drawing view. the fonts you select can affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. subject to the limitations of the device driver. click the Print command on the File menu. For example. or file. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 361 . However. Zero length pipe runs will not print if you print your drawing using Drawing Manager. select a printer and the settings for it. Note Zero length pipe runs will print. you must install and select the printer you want to use.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Drawings: An Overview You can print your drawings on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to laser printers and plotters. You can set properties for the printer by clicking the Properties button. plotter. see the documentation for your printer. and screen fonts. click the Settings button. the screen display of the drawing closely matches the printed drawing. To set the print range and scale. you can send a copy of it to a specified printer. to make sure that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts. Before you print a drawing. Items look the same on the screen and in the printed drawing. Except for the color settings and a few special effects. you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. Preparing to print The printer you use affects the way the current drawing prints and displays text on the screen. Printing a Drawing As you work on a drawing. the zero length pipe run between these symbols will print. when a reducer is connected to a nozzle. such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print. Before you print. or filtered items. If you use printer fonts. To do this. Set printing options. and then click the printer you want to use. It also supports pen plotters. inconsistency indicators. printer fonts. This stipulation applies to special settings like the display of claimed items. You can click the Print command on the File menu to do the following: • • Print an entire drawing or specific views from a drawing.

The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times. Printing to a Digital Archive You can use a separate Intergraph software application to store drawings in a Web server-based digital archive called the Digital Print Room (DPR). Related Topics • Print a Drawing. because they can make the necessary calculations faster. or textures Large bitmaps Links to various drawings The type of printer you have also affects the printing time. page 368 362 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . patterns. but other items that are in the view with the select set print. A DPR Windows printer driver extends the capabilities of File > Print to add drawings to the DPR.Printing Drawings: An Overview Printing Part of a Drawing You can print selected sheets in a drawing or a selected area. page 365 • Print a Selected Area. anyone with a Web browser can view the digital drawings online. Contact Intergraph for more information. You can print not only drawing items that are selected. After you populate the DPR. Expect longer print times when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items: • • • • Curved items Many fills that have complex colors. page 366 • Print to a File. PostScript® printers print faster than LaserJet printers. Printing Time Drawings can take some time to print. Some older versions of PostScript® printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. You can print all views or certain views. This feature is handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them.

Then you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the one you currently have configured. you must install and select a printer. printer.Printing Drawings: An Overview Print Command File > Print Sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter. Type . see the printer documentation. such as. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 363 . Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. This area is read-only.Displays any comments you entered during printer configuration. number of copies. Before using this command. and other printing characteristics.Displays the type of printer currently selected. Comment . or physical location of the currently selected printer. This area is read-only. printer port. The Print to File dialog box appears when you select the Print to file option on the Print dialog box and then click OK. Status . Print to file . The information below the Name box applies to the selected printer. or file. page 102 Print Dialog Box Controls how a drawing is printed. You can select from a list of all the available configured printers. This area is read-only. queue name.Identifies the printer path.Describes the state of the selected printer. You select a file name and location for the print file in the Print to File dialog box. busy or idle. range.Specifies the printer you want to use. Where . which allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings. The printer you select in the Name box is the default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a different printer.Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box. page 367 • Working with Drawings: An Overview. Selecting File > Print also opens the Print dialog box.Stores your drawing in a file with extension . Options are available for defining the printing area. page 361 • Set Print Options. For help on installing a printer. This area is read-only. Name . Properties .pri instead of sending it to a printer. This dialog box opens when you click File > Print on the menu bar.

Settings . 364 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the configured device. Fit to page . Selection .Prints the drawing in black and white. you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design length option to 1. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale.Prints your entire drawing on one page.Printing Drawings: An Overview Drawing . For example. if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12. Print black and white . Related Topics • Print a Drawing. the Settings button at the bottom of the Print dialog box is unavailable. page 368 • Set Print Options.Prints only the active view.Prints your entire drawing. Collate .Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background. Number of copies .Prints each defined view associated with the drawing. page 363 • Print to a File. This dialog box opens when you click Settings on the Print dialog box. Manual scale . View . then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper.Displays the number of copies you want to print. This button is disabled when the Selection option in the Print range group is selected. which allows you to view and edit the scale and origin of your print area. Type the number or use the scroll buttons to specify a number. page 367 Settings Dialog Box Specifies the area you want to print. Active . Print watermark .Activates the All and Active check boxes so you can then define the view or views to print. When you select this option. page 365 • Print Command.Opens the Settings dialog box.Prints the user-defined area. Best fit .Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing.Prints the copies in proper binding order. All .

select the printer before you begin working on a drawing.Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. blue. If you do not set this option. Preview .Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic) with respect to the Paper length option. Note • For many of the options on this dialog box such as.Printing Drawings: An Overview Paper length . then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left. 4. Caution • It is a good idea to save your drawing before you print it so that a printer error or other problem does not cause you to lose any work completed since the last time you saved the drawing. specify the range of pages you want to print. 2. Related Topics • Print a Drawing. Click Print on the Main toolbar. Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both displaying and printing. In the Number of copies box. In the Print range box.Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin.Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print with respect to the Design length option. Y origin .Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin. Select the printer that you want to use from the Name list. Center . when you change an option. Therefore. type the number of copies you want. page 363 • Print to a File. • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 365 . and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect your new values. 3. Paper length. Y. you have a dynamic representation of how your graphic fills the printed sheet. Design length . Design length. and so forth. the red. page 365 • Print a Selected Area.Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change other options on the dialog box. X origin . X. page 366 • Print Command. page 368 Print a Drawing 1.

page 144 366 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. page 23. 2. On the General tab. Click Tools > Options. choose Selection from the Printer Range area. Click File > Page Setup to specify the drawing size. and select the printer to print the drawing. For more information about how to install a printer. You can display the drawing as it is to be printed. you must connect the printer to the computer or network. page 368 Print a Selected Area 1. install a printer driver. Tip For more information on zooming in on an area of a drawing. Select the portion of the drawing for printing. • 3.Printing Drawings: An Overview Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking the Properties button or the Settings button on the Print dialog box. Click File > Print. • • • Related Topics • Print a Selected Area. page 361 • Selecting Drawing Items: An Overview. On the Print dialog box. page 366 • Print Command. see Zoom In on an Area. see the printer documentation. page 363 • Print to a File. Before you can print for the first time. select the Display as printed option.

select Drawing. To sort the sheets by sheet number. Select Print to file on the Print dialog box. Click Selection. and then on the Print dialog box. which has multiple drawing printing functionality. select Print watermark. Tip • button on the Main toolbar. select Collate.Printing Drawings: An Overview Set Print Options 1. use SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. The Settings button becomes unavailable. Click OK. To print The entire drawing All defined views Do this Under the Print range option. The Print to File dialog box appears. Under Options. select Print black and white. If you want to print more than one drawing. Multiple copies Drawing fit to 1 page Watermark Black and white Notes • You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print dialog box. The active view A selected area To a file Select View and then Active. and you can enter the file name and select its location. Under Options. Click OK on the Print dialog box. You can create more than one Drawing view by selecting Window > New > Drawing and zooming or panning to the area of the Drawing view that you want to print. select View and All. In the Number of Copies box. source. Arrange the views you want to print. select Fit to page. enter a number of copies. and orientation. You can set the paper size. Select the item or portion of the drawing that you want to print. • Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Do one of the following. Under Options. The entire drawing is printed. Click File > Print or the Print 2. page 361 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 367 .

page 361 368 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . click Properties. and type the name of the file.Printing Drawings: An Overview Change Printer Properties 1. On the Print dialog box. picture. Click File > Print. 2. Click Advanced on the Printer Document Properties dialog box to specify more printing options. On the Main toolbar. view or change the Orientation option and choose the Duplex Printing option if necessary. 5. Click Properties on the Print System Advanced Options dialog box to open the Halftone Color Adjustment dialog box and further specify color. Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Paper Size options.prn extension. and so forth. select the folder to which you want to print to. and so forth. Note Related Topics • Printing Drawings: An Overview. the Copy Count. Note • . page 361 Print to a File 1. style. click Print 3. view or change the Paper Source option and color quality setting. 4. On the Paper/Quality tab. Scaling. such as. The file is saved with a . 4. 3. On the Layout tab. select Print to file. 6. Click OK. On the Print dialog box. 2. On the Print to file dialog box.

The Custom option is not available for existing drawings. If you select Custom as the sheet size. only for new templates. Browse . Show Watermark . The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template.Specifies when a watermark appears by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. Custom . If you select Custom as the sheet size. Sheet Size . Related Topics Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Note • You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. and watermark. you can change. for example.Printing Drawings: An Overview Page Setup Command File > Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box.Click this button to search for a watermark graphic. you must type custom W and H values. The page orientation is displayed according to each option.Defines the sheet size according to the recorded width (W) and height (H) values. You can set the sheet size. page 125 • Set Document Properties. page 102 • Page Setup Dialog Box Specifies information about the layout for the entire drawing. a B-size drawing to a C-size. H (Height) . orientation. which allows you to specify information about the layout and size for the drawing or template. Landscape . that is.Sets the size of the sheet. Click File > Page Setup to open this dialog box. you must type custom W and H values. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 369 . Portrait .Displays the page so that the long edge is the top of the page. page 370 • Working with Drawings: An Overview.Displays the height of the custom sheet size. Orientation .Displays the page so that the short edge is the top of the page. page 116 • Set up a Page Layout.Click either the Portrait or Landscape option. Choose the template size from the list. page 119 • Save a Drawing or a Drawing Template.

specify the width.Printing Drawings: An Overview Standard . If you select Standard. page 119 • Printing Drawings: An Overview. Click File > Page Setup. that is. H.Defines the sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes. page 370 Set up a Page Layout 1. you can change. page 15 370 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a B-size drawing to a C-size.Displays the watermark only when you are printing the drawing. page 361 • Working With the Design Window: An Overview. Specify when you want the watermark to be displayed by selecting either the While working option or the While printing option. select either Standard or Custom sheet size. for example. Tip You can specify a new sheet size for an existing drawing. Select either Portrait or Landscape. On the Page Setup dialog box. 2. and the Custom option is not available for an existing drawing.Allows you to choose a graphic that faintly appears in the background of the drawing. W (Width) . If you select Custom. Related Topics • Creating Drawing Templates: An Overview. Watermark .Displays the width of the custom sheet size. W. While printing . Specify a watermark if you want a watermark to be displayed. Choose the template size from the list. 3. of the sheet. Related Topics • Page Setup Command. While working .Displays the watermark in the background while you are working within the drawing. The watermark also appears on any printed copies. page 369 • Set up a Page Layout. • 4. The size choices are more limited for an existing drawing than for a new template. and height. specify a standard sheet size.

After the plant is registered. The software maps a plant and all its projects to a single SmartPlant Foundation URL. TEF acts as a repository for data and a medium through which information is shared among other tools. SmartPlant P&D interacts with TEF by correlating items between the plant database and the SmartPlant Foundation database. which points to one. and only one. constructing. For more information. and the like from TEF. and creating a set of tasks in the To Do List that you can run to update the plant database. The system administrator must register each plant in the authoring tool with TEF once. SmartPlant P&ID. Equipment Data sheets. and Drawing Manager. The Framework menu commands are not available unless your plant is registered with the Framework. INtools. Registering Tools with The Engineering Framework Before you can publish and retrieve documents from any of the other authoring tools. The connection allows SmartPlant P&ID to display The Engineering Framework (TEF) commands. see the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager Help. In SmartPlant P&ID and Drawing Manager you can also use the Framework menu to publish drawings and retrieve data. For more information about TEF commands in SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. Most of the commands that provide access to TEF functionality exist in the common user interface available on the Framework menu in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. retrieving PFDs. A SmartPlant Engineering Manager administrator typically registers a plant with TEF. you can publish and retrieve documents. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 371 . you must register each plant in SmartPlant P&ID with a SmartPlant Foundation database. such as Zyqad. you are registering an authoring tool plant with a SmartPlant Foundation URL and plant that you specify. such as Zyqad or INtools. access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client in order to browse in TEF and subscribe to change notifications and compare documents. and SmartPlant P&ID. SmartPlant Foundation plant database and its projects. this action takes place in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. When you use the Register command in any of the authoring tools.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview The Engineering Framework (TEF) standardizes and improves the communication among the various authoring tools you use in the course of designing. and operating a plant. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics.

Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. page 386 372 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 381 • Find a Document to Publish. page 378 • Retrieve a Document from TEF.

which can be a different workflow from the original publish action. The software relates revisions to the master document. the software also publishes the data that is associated with the document when you publish. The published data is not enough to recreate the document in the original authoring tool.xml format. line lists in P&ID). for instance) publish data to TEF in .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publishing to TEF: An Overview In The Engineering Framework (TEF). The authoring tools (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools. You can publish subsequent revisions into a workflow. Users can review and edit the visual representation of the document using SmartPlant Markup. see the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client User's Guide. it is used for reporting and subsequent retrieval by downstream applications. For many applications. Publishes a visual representation of the document that you can view without the authoring tool. The software publishes some document types without the associated data. this is an Intergraph proprietary file. For most documents. • • • For more information about revisions and versions. You can submit documents published without data to workflows just like documents with data. If the data is approved and loaded.xml files to the SmartPlant Foundation database. you can retrieve the data from TEF into other authoring tools. assigning it to a workflow when necessary. After the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation. such as . The software publishes only meaningful engineering data to TEF.doc. The software the loads the data from the .pdf or . The viewable file can also be an Excel workbook or another viewable file type. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 373 . The document types and data that you can publish depend on the authoring tool that you use. depending on workflow approval. the software does the following things: • Creates a new master document and the first revision in SmartPlant Foundation the first time that you publish a particular document. The publishing process involves selecting a document to publish. Changes in the document status of a related revision change the status of the subsequently published versions and revisions of the document. called a RAD file. and specifying a version and revision of the document if specified in SmartPlant Foundation. From that point on. such as reports from authoring tools (for example. the software creates new versions and revisions each time that you publish the document. When you publish documents. Publishes associated data into TEF. the authoring tools share data and relationships when you publish documents containing the data and relationships.

the document types that each tool publishes. When you do not select a workflow for a document during publishing. and information about whether data is also published with each document type. including workflow history and document revision management • • • You can also publish documents to share information with users in other tools without going through a formal workflow. Document Types for Publishing Each authoring tool publishes different documents and data. the Framework Loader loads the document into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as it reaches the top of the Loader queue. allowing users to avoid creating data multiple times in multiple authoring tools To report on common data that originates in multiple tools To provide enterprise-wide accessibility to published documents To manage change. INtools • • • • • Instrument Index documents and data. The following list contains each authoring tool that is part of the Framework. To share data. limited Instrument Specification Sheet documents Instrument Process Data Sheet documents Instrument Loop Drawings I/O Assignment document Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) documents and data Line List documents P&ID generated report documents PFD documents and data Equipment Data Sheet documents and data Summary Sheet documents and data SmartPlant P&ID • • • Zyqad • • • 374 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can publish a document to a For sharing workflow that has only a load step so that the data is loaded into SmartPlant Foundation as soon as you publish the document.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Reasons to Publish You can publish documents and associated data into TEF for several reasons: • To exchange and enhance data among tools. You can also publish a document by not assigning the document to a workflow but by using the default workflow from SmartPlant Foundation.

such as Microsoft Word or Excel files. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 375 .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview SmartPlant 3D • Orthographic Drawings Work Breakdown Structures (WBS) Plant Breakdown Structures (PBS) SmartPlant Foundation • • All Authoring Tools The PBS document contains information about the physical project with the following structure: plant/area/unit. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. The primary reasons to publish documents without data are that the SmartPlant Foundation Change Management functionality can manage document changes and reviews using workflows and that you can view the documents electronically. Publishing Files without Data You can also browse to other file types on the file system. the authoring tools are notified about the plant. and allows you to send the information of the documents that you have selected to The Engineering Framework (TEF). These documents are always published without data. and units that need to be created in each authoring tool. in order to publish them. areas. page 380 Publish Command Framework > Publish Opens the Publish dialog box. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. The PBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work properly. When a WBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. The WBS document contains information about the project and its status in a plant/project/contract structure. The WBS in the authoring tools must match the one in SmartPlant Foundation for publishing from the authoring tools and object correlation to work correctly. When a PBS document is published from SmartPlant Foundation. or SmartSketch® files. Related Topics Publishing to TEF: An Overview. the authoring tools are notified of projects and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tools. page 381 • Find a Document to Publish.

the type of the document. This command is available only if it is defined by your project implementation team. in the background). page 378 • Publish Command. opens the Contract dialog box.Opens a tool-specific dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list. Rows that are gray are provided for viewing purposes only and cannot be selected. the documents begin to be published as soon as you click OK.Removes the selected file or files from the Selected documents list. such as whether it is a new file or was previously published. type.Displays a list of the documents selected for publishing. and the date that the document was last published. Find . the application which last published the document. and the name. and you can specify information about the file. and subtype of the document. File System .Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. and title of the document. page 375 376 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Publish on the main menu bar. you open the Document Properties dialog box.If applicable. Contract . which allows you to search for documents to add to the Selected documents list. You can populate this list by clicking the buttons in the Add area of this dialog box. Engineering Tool .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Publish Dialog Box Displays a list of documents to publish to The Engineering Framework (TEF).Opens the standard Microsoft Select File dialog box that allows you to select documents to add to the Selected documents list.Opens the Advanced Publish Options dialog box. this list provides the name. You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF. the category. the revision and version numbers. If this options is not selected. When you select a file in this dialog box. For each document.Indicates that the system publishes the selected documents in batch mode (that is. Advanced . Remove . the revision schedule. Note • You may select rows that are in white on this dialog box. Batch publish . which allows you to search for files that are of a specific type and that have been updated since they were last published to TEF. Selected documents . description.

SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 377 . select one. Note • An asterisk * next to a box indicates that the information is mandatory. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Selected file . Title . Published previously .Allows you to select the type of the document. Document subtype . The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document category box. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. This dialog box opens when you click Advanced on the Publish dialog box. Document type . page 378 • Publish Command.Displays the name of the file that you selected on the Select File dialog box. Descriptions .Allows you to enter the official title of the document. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command.Allows you to enter a brief description of the file.Allows you to select a category to assign to the document. This description appears later to help you recognize the file.Indicates that the file has already been published to TEF at lease once before. Document type .Indicates that this document has not been published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) before. page 375 Document Properties Dialog Box Provides details about a new or existing document selected for publishing. Name . The options that appear in this list are determined by the selection you make in the Document type box.Indicates the types of documents the software considers when selecting the documents to publish.Allows you to enter the name of the file as it is known in TEF. If applicable. New document .Lists the subtype of the document. This dialog box opens when you click File System on the Publish dialog box. Document category .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Advanced Publish Options Dialog Box Allows you to specify the type of files that you want to search for when you look for documents to publish.

page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Add any additional documents to the Selected documents list on the Publish dialog box by using the buttons in the Add area. page 371 378 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. • Note • You can select the Batch publish option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. the publishing process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). 2. Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. Otherwise. page 378 • Publish Command. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. When you use this feature. For more information. page 375 Publish a Document to TEF 1. Click Framework > Publish. • The documents listed on the Publish dialog box when it first opens are documents that you selected in the authoring tool before you clicked the Publish command. Tips • This feature is also available through the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. in the background).Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. see Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. page 381. For more information.

If the file has not been published to TEF.Selects all the files in the Select documents to publish list. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 379 . for instance). page 380 • Publish a Document to TEF.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Find Documents to Publish Command Framework > Find Documents to Publish Opens the Find Documents to Publish dialog box.Performs a new search for documents to publish. and need to be re-published.Indicates what types of files were considered when the last search was conducted.Displays a list of files that were either updated since they were last published to TEF or files that have not yet been published. Select documents to terminate . page 371 Find Documents to Publish Dialog Box Allows you to search for documents that have been updated since they were last published to The Engineering Framework (TEF) or that were previously published but no longer exist in your authoring tool (SmartPlant P&ID or INtools.Displays a list of all the files that were previously published to TEF but were subsequently removed from the project. The information that appears in the lists on this dialog box were found on this date and time. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that it was last published. For each file. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. Select All .Displays the date when the files were last searched. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. this list displays the name and type of the file and the date that the document was last published. which helps you select the documents that you want to write to The Engineering Framework (TEF) and specifies those documents that have been published before. have never been published. Update . Document types searched . The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Find Documents to Publish on the main menu bar. This list is specific to the authoring tool from which you used the command. Select documents to publish . page 378 • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. the Last Published box for the document displays the value New. Last search performed . For each file.

the documents appear in lists in the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. The selected documents now appear in the Documents to Publish list on the Publish dialog box. Related Topics • Find a Document to Publish. page 380 • Find Documents to Publish Command. When the results of this search are available. and you can publish them to TEF. 2.Cancels the selection of all the files in the Select documents to publish list. page 378 • Publish Command. indicate the documents that you want to remove from TEF. • Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. • • 380 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . From the Select documents to publish list on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box. page 378. Click Framework > Find Documents to Publish. but is still available in TEF. Tips • This feature is also available by clicking the Find button on the Publish dialog box. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. • Tips • Documents in this list are in TEF but are no longer present in the authoring tool.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Clear All . see Publish a Document to TEF. indicate the documents that you want to publish to TEF by clicking the corresponding check box. page 379 • Publish a Document to TEF. For more information about publishing documents. For more information. From the Select documents to terminate list. page 375 Find a Document to Publish 1. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. 3. This step is necessary only if a document was deleted from the authoring tool. • TEF communicates with the authoring tool to determine the documents that need to be published or re-published to TEF. This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF).

see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. such as browsing for documents that have been published to TEF. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 381 .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • The lists displayed on the Find Documents to Publish dialog box are compiled at the time indicated in the Last search performed box. Related Topics • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client Click Framework > Browser. you can perform a number of tasks. Related Topics • Access the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. For more information. using the SmartPlant Foundation To Do List to complete tasks. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. but this process can be time consuming. and subscribing to documents in order to receive notification of changes to the documents. page 371 Browser Command Framework > Browser Opens a web-based user interface that allows you to interact with SmartPlant Foundation if the active plant is registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). Related Topics • Publishing to TEF: An Overview. and so forth. comparing TEF documents with the data in your authoring tool. but the Web Client provides unique access to other features such as the Web Client To Do List and search capabilities. Many of these tasks can be performed from the authoring tools. page 381 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. subscribing to document changes. you can perform a number of tasks. From this interface. such as publishing or retrieving documents. page 373 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You can update the lists by clicking Update. Tip • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). comparing documents. Note • From the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. depending on the mode you are running the applications in: synchronous or asynchronous.

you can configure an automatic retrieval feature. you can use the Framework > Retrieve command in the Web Client to start the retrieval process. and then you can select the document or documents that you want to retrieve from your Web Client To Do List or the tree view. For example. • 382 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieving from TEF: An Overview You can retrieve documents from The Engineering Framework (TEF) into an authoring tool for subsequent work. the software searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents to retrieve. The authoring tools provide commands that let you select a document and retrieve it into that tool. if another more recently published document contains updates to objects in the document that you selected. such as SmartPlant P&ID or SmartPlant Electrical. The Web Client presents a list of documents that you can choose to retrieve. and these are presented in a list in the Retrieve dialog box. With the latest data . from INtools. you can access the Web Client through the Framework > Browser command. However. Retrieval States • As published . You can use either the Framework > Retrieve command to open a wizard that assists you in retrieving applicable documents. After you select the documents that you want to retrieve. Additionally. the software retrieves the most current data in the SmartPlant Foundation database for those common objects. when you use the command from an authoring tool. you can retrieve engineering information from a published SmartPlant P&ID. or you can find the document that you want to retrieve using the Web Client search capability.Retrieves the latest data associated with the selected document in the SmartPlant Foundation database. without first selecting documents. or with some authoring tools.Retrieves only the data the authoring tool originally published with the selected revision and version of the document. The Framework > Retrieve command in an authoring tool is slightly different from the Retrieve command available in the SmartPlant Foundation Web Client. That is.

projects. Create the appropriate structures by running these tasks. created in SmartPlant Foundation and published to TEF. areas. the WBS communicates project status. units. and contracts that need to be created in the authoring tool so that the information is consistent across all associated applications. are retrieved by authoring tools in order to provide information about the plants.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieval Document Types The types of documents that you can retrieve depend on the authoring tool that you are using. Notes • Retrieving the WBS and PBS into SmartPlant Engineering Manager (SPEM) creates items in the SPEM To Do List. The WBS contains information about the concepts of the project in a plant-project-contract hierarchy. The PBS and WBS. The following lists include the documents that each authoring tool can retrieve: SmartPlant P&ID • • • • • PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Instrument Index documents Instrument I/O Assignment documents P&IDs PFDs Equipment Data Sheets Summary Sheet documents and data P&IDs P&IDs Instrument Index documents P&IDs Zyqad • • • • INtools • • SmartPlant 3D • All Authoring Tools From most authoring tools. The PBS contains information about the physical project with the following plant hierarchy: plant-area-unit. When an authoring tool retrieves it. you can retrieve Plant Breakdown Structure (PBS) and Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) documents. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 383 .

You are not required to accept or reject changes in Zyqad. When using INtools. • Data Handling After Retrieval The authoring tool that you use also determines how the software deals with changes in downstream data when you retrieve a document. For example. page 386 384 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Design Basis Objects that tools retrieve from other authoring tools can become the design basis for objects downstream in the design process. you must create the PBS and WBS structures manually. Related Topics • Open the To Do List. tasks to update the pump automatically appear in the To Do List. deleting. When you change common properties for the pump and retrieve the changes into SmartPlant P&ID. you must create the plant-area-unit according to PBS information in SmartPlant Foundation before you retrieve either the PBS or the WBS. In SmartPlant P&ID and INtools. and then it places tasks that instruct you to create. delete. The same process works for logical items that are a design basis for other items. These documents cannot be retrieved into that application. on the other hand automatically overwrites the existing database information when you retrieve data. a pump retrieved from a PFD becomes the design basis for a pump in the P&ID. In SmartPlant 3D. The To Do List gives you the opportunity to view and understand potential changes before accepting. which pulls the data and correlates items. or modifying those changes. page 391 • Retrieve a Document from TEF. The design basis is implied and based on retrieval. such as a stream in Zyqad that results in multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. An object that becomes a design basis for another object can be a specific object that gets richer as it moves through the schematic or logical lifecycle of one application and evolves into a more detailed object downstream. you can view the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) by using the View > P&ID command.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview • When using SmartPlant 3D. Zyqad. You must create at least one unit before you can retrieve any documents from TEF. or modify items at the appropriate time in the design process on the To Do List. you do not have to define it. the authoring tool analyzes the impact of the newly retrieved data on the existing database.

You can select the documents that you want to retrieve and thereby bring in the information from the The Engineering Framework (TEF). you can indicate whether you want to retrieve the document as it was published or with the latest data. page 385 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 385 . For each document.Selects all the files in the Documents to retrieve list. Documents to retrieve .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve Command Framework > Retrieve Opens the Retrieve dialog box. You are notified by e-mail when the operation is complete. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. the type of document. The dialog box opens when you click Framework > Retrieve on the main menu bar. Batch retrieve . the last retrieval date. By using the Revision option. Show . this list provides the name. Related Topics Retrieve a Document from TEF. If this option is not selected.Allows you to indicate whether you want to view a list of all of the latest documents available or of only those documents that need to be retrieved from TEF. and the Revision option.Indicates that the system retrieves the selected documents in batch mode.Indicates the type of documents you can retrieve from TEF and changes the list view so that it displays only that document type.Displays a list of the documents to be retrieved from TEF. page 371 Retrieve Dialog Box Allows you to specify options for retrieving information from The Engineering Framework (TEF). Clear All .Cancels the selection of documents in the Documents to retrieve list. the status of the document. page 386 • Retrieve Command. page 386 • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. and provides a list of the files that can be retrieved by the authoring tool (SmartPlant Electrical or SmartPlant P&ID. for instance). the revision and version numbers. Document type . Select All . the documents are retrieved as soon as you click OK. Related Topics • Retrieve a Document from TEF.

• 3. in the background). These documents can appear in the Documents to retrieve list. see SmartPlant Engineering Manager Help and Related Topics. • Notes • You can select the Batch retrieve option to indicate that the retrieval process is run in batch mode (that is. When you use this feature. On the Retrieve dialog box. From the Documents to retrieve list. Click Framework > Retrieve. Related Topics • Retrieving from TEF: An Overview. TEF searches the SmartPlant Foundation project for documents that are ready to be retrieved into your tool. or you can clear the entire list by clicking Clear All. an e-mail message alerts you when the process is complete. select whether you want to retrieve each document by using the As published option or the With the latest data option. page 371 386 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Otherwise. 4. page 382 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Tips • This command is available only if the active plant has been registered with The Engineering Framework (TEF). select the documents you want to retrieve by clicking the corresponding check box. Tip You can quickly select the entire list by clicking Select All. For more information. By using the Retrieve Option list for each document you are retrieving.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Retrieve a Document from TEF 1. the retrieval process begins interactively as soon as you click OK. select the types of files that are displayed in the Documents to retrieve list by choosing either Only documents to be retrieved or All documents in the SmartPlant Foundation project or by using the Document type list. 2.

a single item in the external application is associated with multiple items within the drawing software. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 387 . page 389 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. For example. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. Items in the active drawing are displayed in bold font style.Lists all the items associated with a single design basis item. Items . page 389 • Correlating Items: An Overview. For example. For some types of piping. page 371 Correlate Items Dialog Box Allows you to review and edit the relationship between plant items and design basis items imported from external applications.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlating Items: An Overview In many cases. a piece of equipment defined in Zyqad usually maps to a single equipment item in SmartPlant P&ID. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from The Engineering Framework (TEF). This dialog box opens when you click Framework > Correlate on the main menu bar. page 389 Correlate Command Framework > Correlate Opens the Correlate Items dialog box and allows you to review and edit the correlation between plant items and design basis items. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item from which it came. the item is highlighted in the drawing. and when selected. A single item can be selected from the list. The Correlate Items command allows you to review and manage these relationships within the drawing environment. a single stream item in Zyqad normally maps to multiple pipe runs in SmartPlant P&ID. a one-to-one relationship exists between an item in an external application and an item or items in the drawing software.

it is correlated with the same design basis item. page 371 388 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Allows you to review a different drawing item. a confirmation message appears. page 387 • Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items. When you click on a correlated item. however. the item is highlighted. Remove . As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. page 389 • Correlate Command. If you click on an item that is already correlated to some other design basis item. As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that has the same item type as the items in the list. both are associated with the same design basis item. and it is added to the list. the new item inherits the properties of the item that it is correlated to rather than the design basis item. Right-clicking quits this command. it is added to the Items list as a primary item.Deletes the selected item from the Items list and cancels its correlation with the design basis item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Select . page 389 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. When you click on a highlighted item. If you correlate a new item with a previously correlated item. Clicking this button clears the Items list. Related Topics • Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. the drawing item is highlighted. This command is available only when one or more items already appear in the Items list. Add .Allows you to correlate an additional item to the same design basis item that the listed items are already correlated to.

When you click on a correlated item. 3. 2. page 387 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 2. Click Framework > Correlate Items.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Correlate Additional Items with a Design Basis Item 1. each item that is created in a stockpile is automatically correlated to the design basis item that it came from. Then the application searches the database for all other items that are correlated to the same design basis item and adds them to the list as well. In the drawing. Note • When you import a document into SmartPlant P&ID from TEF. Select a item in the drawing that you want to correlate to the retrieved item. Click Remove. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 389 . Click Tools > Correlate Items. 3. Tip As you move your pointer over an item in the drawing that is already correlated. The above procedure is to correlate additional drawing items to the design basis item. it is added to the Items list on the Correlate Items dialog box as a primary item. you can highlight and select only items that were retrieved from TEF or native P&ID items that are already correlated. Tip • When the Correlate Items dialog box opens. • 4. Since items from TEF already have a correlation. select the item in the Items list whose correlation with the design basis you want to remove. select either an item that was retrieved using The Engineering Framework (TEF) and placed in the drawing or a previously correlated item. On the Correlate Items dialog box. Related Topics • Correlating Items: An Overview. a message appears to make sure that you want to change the existing correlation. page 371 Remove the Correlation Between Added and Design Basis Items 1. On the Correlate Items dialog box. click Add. the item is highlighted.

By clicking the heading of columns on the To Do List. You can decide when a manual task is complete and set the status accordingly. but the process is not completed successfully. or modified to bring the drawing into agreement with the newest information retrieved from TEF. for example. you sort the list by the values in that column. The available task types are • • • • Create . defer them. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right from the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction.Updates the selected properties of the specified item Delete . Notes • When an Update task is created in the To Do List. You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been completed and those that are pending. you can perform tasks.Creates a new item in the stockpile Update .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Using the To Do List: An Overview The To Do List allows you to keep track of tasks required to keep P&IDs updated with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). the status changes to Complete . Initially. the status is changed to Error . the units of measure used in properties are automatically converted to the defaults for the plant. The units of measure used for properties in Create tasks are converted to the plant defaults when the task is run.Creates and displays a reminder. you can view properties for each task in the To Do List. this feature aids in retrieving data from TEF by providing a list of all the things that must be added. if you attempt to run an Update task assigned to a drawing that is not currently open. From the To Do List. for instance. the status is Open.Deletes the specified item from the plant Manual . but certain information is provided for all types. A single To Do List is shared by all the users of a plant database. or delete them altogether. You can also postpone running a task and change its status to Deferred . deleted. • 390 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The information that is available is specific to the type of task that is selected: Create tasks and Update tasks. Some types of tasks have associated code and you can run them thereby causing the database or drawings to be modified. If you successfully run the task. Error status occurs. Specifically. Each task in the To Do List has a status. Additionally. If you attempt to run a task.

page 394 • Remove a Task from the To Do List. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 391 . page 402 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. which lists tasks to be performed in SmartPlant P&ID. page 405 To Do List Command Framework > To Do List Opens the To Do List dialog box. defer. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. and you can organize your tasks.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. or delete tasks. page 371 Open the To Do List Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. page 396 • Defer a Task on the To Do List. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 402 • Run a Task from the To Do List. page 401 • Update the To Do List Display. From this dialog box. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Note • This command is available regardless of whether a drawing is open or not. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. you can run.

this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. 392 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . this command activates it. This command is available only when a single task is selected. remain open. If the drawing is not active. The commands associated with the To Do List are all on the To Do List toolbar. You can assign or reassign a Create task. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. This dialog box opens when you click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. If multiple tasks are selected. the associated drawing is open and active. If multiple tasks are selected. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. If multiple tasks are selected. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings.Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. Zoom In . this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria.Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. This command is available when an executable task is selected.Displays the Task Properties dialog box. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. in other words. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned. This command is not available for manually created tasks.Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. Assign Drawing . You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview To Do List Dialog Box Provides the ability to manage tasks that need to be run within a SmartPlant P&ID database to keep the plant current with information in The Engineering Framework (TEF). Run Task . Open Drawing . This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. Properties .Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. New Manual Task . and allows you to manually create a new task. Any drawings that are currently open.Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. If multiple tasks are selected. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF.

a description of the task. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. the status of the task. but the report template. page 391 • To Do List Command. If you wish to completely delete tasks from the list of deleted tasks. or Deferred status. you sort the list by the values in that column. You can change the order in which these columns appear in the Task List by right-clicking a column heading and choosing either Shift Left or Shift Right on the shortcut menu to move the column one place in either direction. and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. the name of the task.Displays a list of tasks that have been deleted from the To Do List in the Task list on a gray background. Doubleclicking a task opens the Task Properties dialog box for that task. If there is a problem. If the task runs successfully. the status is updated to Completed . You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. you can select them and click Delete Task again on the To Do List toolbar. and so forth.Populates automatically when you retrieve a document from TEF. Error . the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated. This command toggles this feature on and off. the status is updated to Error . for example. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. Report . Related Topics • Open the To Do List.Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . View Deleted . Refresh . Delete Task . Defer Task . This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. page 391 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 393 .Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. the destination drawing. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. and so the information can change at any time.Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Note • When a task runs.xls. This list provides information about each task.Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. Task List . including. called To Do List. By clicking the heading of any of these columns.

Click Open Drawing . Any drawings that are currently open. You can assign or reassign a Create task. 3. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics Open a Drawing from the To Do List. this command activates it. For more information. too. page 400. This command allows you to visually inspect the referenced objects in the context of the surrounding drawing and is available when the selected task is associated with graphics and the drawing that contains the object is open and active. This command is available when a drawing-specific task is selected and the drawing is not currently open or active. If multiple tasks are selected. You select the tasks from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box. • Note • Once the drawing is open. 2. see View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. select a task that is assigned to a drawing. see Assign a Task to a Drawing. page 371 • Open a Drawing from the To Do List 1. page 371 • Zoom In Command Framework > To Do List > Zoom In Centers and zooms in on the drawing items associated with the selected task or tasks in the Drawing view. Tip You can assign tasks to drawings by using commands on the To Do List. On the To Do List. For more information. remain open. but Update and Delete tasks that are already assigned to a drawing cannot be reassigned.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Open Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Open Drawing Opens the drawing associated with the selected task. page 395. Click Framework > To Do List. If the drawing is not active. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. this command is available only if they are assigned to the same drawing. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 394 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . you can display drawing items from the To Do List.

page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. 3. Related Topics • Open a Drawing from the To Do List. and allows you to manually create a new task. page 390 • View a Drawing Item from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 395 . The software opens a Drawing view with the drawing items that are associated with the task highlighted. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. page 371 View a Drawing Item from the To Do List 1. 2. and only when the drawing that the item belongs to is already open. page 394. page 395 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview If multiple tasks are selected. page 394 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 396 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box. On the To Do List toolbar. For more information. select a task or tasks. click Zoom Tip • . Related Topics • Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. Click Framework > To Do List. not for Create tasks. page 371 New Manual Task Command Framework > To Do List > New Manual Task Displays the Task Properties dialog box. Notes • The Zoom command is available only for Update and Delete tasks. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview.

enter comments if you want to. The tabs that appear on this dialog box are determined by the type of task that you selected from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. There are three basis types of tasks: Create. 4.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Add a New Manual Task to the To Do List 1. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Update. Note • . In the Notes area. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. You must select a task from the To Do List in order to open this dialog box. page 399 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. description. page 399 • Properties Command. page 371 Properties Command Framework > To Do List > Properties Displays the Task Properties dialog box for the selected task. page 28 396 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. and status for the new task. This command is available only when a single task is selected. Click Framework > To Do List. Enter a name. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. On the Task Properties dialog box. 2. Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. This dialog box shows the detailed properties of the task. and Delete tasks. select the General tab. page 371 Task Properties Dialog Box Provides information about tasks that are defined in the task list of the To Do List dialog box. 5. click New Manual Task 3. This dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box.

The following choices are available: Open. and Error . such as the success of the procedure. the status is set to Open.Indicates the level of completion of the task. Item Tag . Information about the execution of the task. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar.Allows you to enter freeform text about the task.For drawing-specific tasks. This information is read-only. is added to the end of any existing notes for a task. This value is not a unique identifier for the task. Drawing . page 399 • Properties Command. Document . Notes . Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Engineering Tool . SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 397 . You can also enter hyperlinks to other documents for more extensive information. Deferred . When a task is created. This information cannot be directly edited on this tab. this box displays the item tag of an existing item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview General Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties that are common to all types of tasks. Status . Completed .Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task. which does not have an identifying icon in the Task list on the To Do List.Displays the item tag of the drawing object from which this task originated.Displays the name of the application that published the document from which this task originated. this box displays the name of the drawing to which the task is assigned. Name . but you can use the Assign Drawing command on the To Do List dialog box to change this value. Description .Displays a longer description of the purpose of the task. For Update and Delete tasks. a Zyqad equipment data sheet or an INtools instrument index). this box displays the item tag of the item to be created. page 28 Details Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information that is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the source and destination of the information being imported as part of the task. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. For Create tasks.Displays the name of the document from which this task originated (for example.

Modified Date . Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Item Type . The information on this tab is read-only. Modified By .Displays the date and time that the task was created. modified. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. modified.Indicates the catalog item used to create the drawing item if the task is run. or deleted. Deleted By . Item Properties . and so forth. The Task Properties dialog box opens when you click Properties on the To Do List dialog box toolbar. modification of an item. page 28 History Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Provides information this is common to all types of tasks and that concerns the history of the task. Run By . or deleted the task.Shows the name of each item property and its new value.Displays the date and time that the task was last run. Run Date .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. Created Date . This information includes the type of item created and the names and values of the properties of the new item. To prevent a value from being used if the Create task is run.Displays the user name of the task creator.Displays the type of item to be created. Deleted Date . page 399 • Properties Command. Created By . page 28 Create Tab (Task Properties Dialog Box) Displays information specific to tasks that create new items in the drawing. 398 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide .Displays the user name that last ran the task. Catalog item . turn off the property by selecting it in the list.Displays the date and time that the task was removed.Displays the user name that removed the task. This information includes the user names and dates for the creation of an item.Displays the user name that last ran.Displays the date and time that the task was last run. page 399 • Properties Command.

On the toolbar. 3. 4. select the task or tasks that you want to edit. • . you can edit the name and notes for the task. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Related Topics Assign a Task to a Drawing. you can edit the catalog item being created and turn off or on the values assigned to different properties for that item.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Related Topics • Modify To Do List Task Properties. page 400 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. For all types. For Update tasks. 2. you can turn off or on the new values assigned to properties for the item. change the properties as necessary. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 399 • Properties Command. The Assign Drawing dialog box opens and lists the available drawings. page 371 Assign Drawing Command Framework > To Do List > Assign Drawing Creates an association between the selected task or tasks and a particular drawing. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. On the Properties dialog box. Note • The properties available for each task depend on the type of task. This command is available when you select manually added tasks or tasks resulting from the Create command. If multiple tasks are selected. Click Framework > To Do List. For Create tasks. page 28 Modify To Do List Task Properties 1. click Properties Tip You can also open the Properties dialog box by double-clicking a task in the To Do List. this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. From the task list on the To Do List dialog box. page 371 • SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 399 .

Removes the association between the selected task and a drawing. page 400 • Assign Drawing Command. select the drawing that you want to assign these tasks to. select the task or tasks that you want to assign to a particular drawing. The Create tasks are not initially associated with a drawing. Drawings . page 399 Assign a Task to a Drawing 1. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics • Assign a Task to a Drawing. page 371 • Run Task Command Framework > To Do List > Run Task Runs the task that you select from the Task list on the To Do List dialog box.Lists all the drawings associated with the active plant.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Assign Drawing Dialog Box Allows you to associate a task in the To Do List with a drawing assigned to the active plant structure. This command is not available for manually created tasks. From the list on the To Do List dialog box. you can assign Create or Manual tasks using this dialog box. Click Assign Drawing . the associated drawing is open and active. the command is only available for tasks generated automatically by integration with The Engineering Framework (TEF) and importing of data from TEF. Clear . in other words. 3. When you select a drawing and click OK. This command is available when an executable task is selected. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. Select the drawing that you want to associate with the task or tasks you selected on the To Do List dialog box. On the Assign Drawing dialog box. This dialog box opens when you click Assign Drawing on the To Do List dialog box. 400 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . this command is available only if each of the tasks meets these criteria. and the status of the selected task is Open or Error. 2. 4. the selected tasks are assigned to that drawing. Click Framework > To Do List. If multiple tasks are selected.

page 401 • Using the To Do List: An Overview.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview When a task runs. 3. select the task or tasks that you want to run. Related Topics Run a Task from the To Do List. page 371 • Run a Task from the To Do List 1. Click Framework > To Do List. or Deferred status. Click Run Task Notes • . page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. the status is updated to Error . and a timestamp and error message are added to the Notes area. Error . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. If a task is assigned to a drawing. • Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. For more information. page 371 Defer Task Command Framework > To Do List > Defer Task Toggles the status of the selected tasks between Open and Deferred . If the task runs successfully. Manually created tasks are not executable tasks and cannot be run from the To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. 2. that drawing must be open before you can run the task. page 394. You can open a drawing from the To Do List. This command is available only when the selected task or tasks have either Open. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. If there is a problem. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 401 . Related Topics • Defer a Task on the To Do List. the status is updated to Completed . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Open a Drawing from the To Do List. the status of the task and the Run Date and Run By properties are updated.

On the toolbar. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 Delete Task Command Framework > To Do List > Delete Task Allows you to delete the selected task from the To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 402 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. Related Topics • Remove a Task from the To Do List. page 403. page 371 402 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . see Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List. A confirmation dialog box appears to verify deletion of the selected task or tasks. Click Framework > To Do List. This command is available only when one or more tasks are selected. 2. 3. Click Framework > To Do List. click Defer Task . page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. You can display deleted tasks in the To Do List. On the To Do List dialog box. click Delete Task Note • . 2. select the task or tasks that you want to defer. On the toolbar. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. 3. page 371 Remove a Task from the To Do List 1. On the To Do List dialog box.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Defer a Task on the To Do List 1. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. select the task or tasks that you want to remove. For more information.

On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. page 371 Report Command Framework > To Do List > Report Opens Excel and runs a report on the contents of the To Do List.xls. called To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. produces reports much the same way other SmartPlant reports are produced.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Display Deleted Tasks on the To Do List 1. page 404 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. but the report template. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. To return to the current task list. click View Deleted Tip • . Click Framework > To Do List. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 403 . This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. 2. Related Topics • Run a To Do List Report. click View Deleted again.

xls. Note • The report template for this report that is included with the software is called To Do List. Click Report Tip This command is only available from the To Do List toolbar. Related Topics • Update the To Do List Display. This To Do List report can be customized in the same ways that other reports can be customized (for instance. For more information. Since only one To Do List is generated per plant. page 348. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. see Generate a Report. It is a tabular format report template. or you can sort the output in an appropriate order for your project). Then the report opens in Excel. Click Framework > To Do List on the main menu bar. If a To Do List report has been generated previously. and so the information can change at any time. page 334. page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. you must choose a name and location for the current report on the Save As Output dialog box. page 371 • Refresh Command Framework > To Do List > Refresh Updates the information that is displayed in the To Do List. For more information on running reports. see Edit a Report Template. page 405 • Using the To Do List: An Overview. multiple users can be working in the To Do List at the same time. page 371 404 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 2. You can use the Refresh command to stay up-to-date. but the report is produced much the same way that other SmartPlant reports are produced. 3. Related Topics Using the To Do List: An Overview. you can add a filter so that only tasks with particular properties are reported on.Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Run a To Do List Report 1. • on the toolbar.

page 390 • Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview. click Refresh .Working with The Engineering Framework: An Overview Update the To Do List Display On the To Do List dialog box toolbar. Related Topics • Using the To Do List: An Overview. page 371 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 405 .

filters show certain parts of the drawing. For more information. relationships between placed items.In PDS 2D. construction status values. Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation . Setting Construction Status .Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. For more information.In PDS 2D. page 407 • Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID . For more information. Future. the default construction status is New. such as only the equipment or only the piping. before you place an equipment group. In SmartPlant P&ID. see Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. graphics are called cells. and you can combine filters. piping. In SmartPlant P&ID. valves. page 407. consistency checking and propagation. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. see Setting Construction Status. page 412. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview The are many functions that can be compared between SmartPlant P&ID and the PDS product. Code Lists and Select Lists . page 408 • Setting Construction Status. design file differences. Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID . code lists and select lists. see Using Filters Versus Levels. page 410 • Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID. page 409 406 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . graphics are called catalog items. and using filters. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values.In PDS. tanks. you set the construction status by clicking the New. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. In SmartPlant P&ID. These graphics include pumps. For more information. page 408. For more information. When you place an item. and other items. they reside in a select list.With PDS™ 2D. Related Topics • Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. page 409. see Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. see Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID. They include attributes and properties.PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. For more information. see Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation. you can set construction status before or after you place an item. Using Filters Versus Levels . page 410. page 413. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control.

Related Topics • Review and Edit Item Properties. see SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Help. they reside in a select list. you should use caution when modifying any entries already included with the product when it is delivered to you. page 87 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 407 . That is. to modify select lists in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. the accepted values for the attribute are defined in a code list. For more information on defining select lists and entries. You must have special permissions. Some code lists and select lists contain special. frequently in the Short Value entry. Select entries are the individual members of a select list. These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values. some properties are likewise restricted to preset values. These special values help SmartPlant P&ID communicate information to other applications. Select lists and their select entries are defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager. an attribute that is restricted to pre-defined values is said to be code-listed. such as PDS 3D and SmartPlant 3D. Consequently. restricted values. In SmartPlant P&ID.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Code Lists and Select Lists In PDS. granted in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

before you place an equipment group. With SmartPlant P&ID whenever you place a component on a piece of equipment. Related Topics • Place Equipment. you must identify the equipment group before adding equipment components to a piece of equipment. page 153 408 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Moving components from one equipment group to another also requires that you manually regroup components so that they belong to the destination equipment. the software automatically creates a group relationship among the equipment and its components. This guideline also exists for placing equipment labels and equipment component labels.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Grouping Equipment in SmartPlant P&ID With PDS™ 2D.

When you place an item. If you have already placed an item. • Related Topics • Customize the Software With the Options Command. click Tools > Options. the default construction status is New. you can set construction status before or after you place an item: • If you know the construction status before placing an item. select the item in the drawing and change the status in the Properties window. you set the construction status by clicking the New. In SmartPlant P&ID. All items that are subsequently placed in the drawing are assigned this status. and then set the status on the Placement tab. or Existing buttons on the Construction Status control. Future.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Setting Construction Status In PDS 2D. page 21 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 409 .

an inconsistency occurs if a designated material is connected to a different type of material. You must resolve them for an acceptable drawing. propagation checks for errors each time that the software populates the database. consistency checking confirms that the created drawing agrees. In SmartPlant P&ID. when you discover an error. Available tools can help in the review of the report along with the drawing. You can list the types of errors you want to detect. consistency checking occurs continuously as you place equipment. Errors occur when you violate the design practices for a plant. resolution can be time-consuming. The designer places equipment. and adds labels for accuracy. Also. or is consistent. such as pipe and valve conflicts. To check for errors in your design. However. Propagation determines that a drawing is not ambiguous. SmartPlant P&ID continuously checks for design errors as you create the drawing. instead of waiting to check for errors until after the drawing is complete. routes lines between equipment. according to settings in SmartPlant P&ID Rule Manager. SmartPlant P&ID uses predefined rules to establish relationships that verify the design. 410 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The software detects and reports the errors so you can correct them in the drawing. For example. However. However. tools or suggested error recoveries are not available. In the SmartPlant P&ID environment. Also. more so than the workflow associated with propagation.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Consistency Check to Propagation Consistency Check in SmartPlant P&ID serves the same purpose as propagation in PDS 2D. After the designer completes this work. because you do not receive a list of possible solutions. Consistency checking is an important function in producing a useful design. with the design practices of the associated plant. places components on lines. PDS 2D uses propagation. Consistency Check starts when you place or modify an item. route lines. and it automatically reports in the graphical view on junctions that do not follow these rules. pinpointing the source of the inconsistency could require time. Consistency Check continuously blends into the software product. and the Consistency Check dialog box lists solutions to fix the errors. Double-click an inconsistency in a Drawing view. Propagation produces a report with propagation exceptions. PDS 2D uses a process called propagation to verify the suitability of a design. The designer places the elements that compose the overall configuration of the design in a graphical mode. In PDS 2D. and label items. the process populates the associated database if serious propagation errors do not exist. while SmartPlant P&ID uses consistency checking.

page 322 • Resolve an Inconsistency. page 319 • Review an Inconsistency. page 317 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 411 .Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Related Topics • Reapply Placement Rules to Resolve an Inconsistency.

at certain times. Related Topics • Place a Label from Catalog Explorer. These labels are referred to as "driven. SmartPlant P&ID supplies a pre-loaded set of symbols. which are stored in the database. piping. you can record text on a label. graphics are called catalog items. see the SmartPlant Catalog Manager Help. Most labels show item properties. SmartPlant P&ID also provides "driving" labels. In PDS 2D. valves. you add or edit properties information for each item in the Properties window. These graphics include pumps. graphics are called cells. For more information about creating symbols. and the software continuously writes this information to the database. Then. page 184 412 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide ." because they are updated as the property values of the item are updated. you propagate or write the information on the labels to the database. PDS 2D cells are grouped together in libraries. labels play a different role than in PDS 2D. which you can use to directly edit properties in the database by editing the properties of the label. You can add and delete cells or place cells from a library into the design file. Plant administrators can create more symbols if needed. In SmartPlant P&ID. and other items.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Comparing Graphics and Text in PDS 2D and SmartPlant P&ID In PDS 2D. tanks. In SmartPlant P&ID. In SmartPlant P&ID.

For more information about creating and editing filters. and you can combine filters. both 6-inch pipe and tanks over 5 feet in diameter are displayed. You can use filters along with rules to check for errors in certain filtered views. and you can combine them to view collective data sets. You can even edit the individual properties of the filters. such as only the equipment or only the piping. page 138 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 413 . SmartPlant P&ID filters fall into the following categories: • • Project filters Personal filters Project filters are stored in Project Folders. while each individual user defines personal filters.Comparing SmartPlant P&ID with PDS: An Overview Using Filters Versus Levels PDS 2D uses levels to separate data types in the Drawing view. Then. For example. The plant administrator defines project filters. see SmartPlant Filter Manager Help. The software automatically defines levels for the various parts of process systems. SmartPlant P&ID offers extensive flexibility in creating and editing filters. and personal filters are stored in My Folders. In SmartPlant P&ID. you can combine a filter that displays 6-inch pipe with a filter that displays tanks more than 5 feet in diameter. You can customize these levels. filters show certain parts of the drawing. Related Topics • Customize a Filter Tab for the Drawing View.

annotations Dimensions. for example. attribute 1. symbols. archive To copy a file to a specified storage location and then delete the file from the current location. access Performing actions that are required to use the SmartPlant P&ID software. text string. You measure angles in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. numbers. notes. beginning with the node name. angle bisector A line that divides an angle into two equal parts. and some special character and punctuation marks. active placement point Coordinates that define the point where you place piping and instrumentation. 2.Glossary Glossary A absolute path name Sequence of directories. Each property has an associated value that defines its current state. A property or characteristic of a component. 414 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . a file name. or reports that you place in a drawing to provide information or comments. alphanumeric Information in the form of letter. and so forth. that locates a file. Most databases represent an attribute by a column in a table.txt. A characteristic that all members of a class possess. \\MyPC\C:\temp\MyFile. append To add to the end of a file. angle Circular measurement of the intersection of two lines in degrees. angle key-in A number that you type to specify an active angle.

C cache A secure place of storage. and NOT (other than). y-. which are blueprints or templates for creating an item within the model. A set of filters can define the potential membership in a category. break label A graphic label placed at a point in a piping line at which any property can change value. catalog A collection of catalog items. B batch A group of jobs to process on a computer at one time with the same program without user intervention. centerline Graphic representation of the central axis of an item.Glossary axis An imaginary line that defines the orientation of a system or item. and z-axis. OR (either). character Data type that stores alphanumeric character data. Boolean operator Syntax that defines logical relationships between expressions like AND (both). A classification of items that share common values for specified properties. Most orientations use an x-. bearing The acute horizontal angle of a line with respect to a reference line. Bill of Materials A detailed list of the items that you assemble. category A grouping of items by description. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 415 . branch point A point on a pipe run that separates piping segments for assignments with different segment parameters.

usually a server. the processing power is split between the two CPUs. and the database runs on the server. The class defines the properties and behaviors that an item can show.Glossary check in Process of moving a file from a user location to a storage location and recording that location in the database. The workstation for the user is the client. All network operations among two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. to link or append. client In network operations. commodity option A pre-defined exception to the default settings for a component definition in the Piping Job Specification. A component has database information associated with it. 416 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . that contains similar items. or select list. class Blueprint for creating an item. In this system. concatenate To connect in a series. commodity code A code that you define that provides an index to material descriptions. component A catalog item that represents a part of the P&ID. configuration Relative arrangement of parts or items. collection An indexed group. commodity item Standard component that you can find in a manufacturer catalog. client/server database A database system in which the database engine and database applications reside on separate. a node that accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource. intelligent computers that communicate with each other through a network. concentric Having a common center or origin point with varying radii.

like a valve and a pipe run. Typical items in a data model are components. For example. Other coordinate systems more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entries. and labels.0. connector Item with multiple vertices. coordinate system Geometric relation that denotes the location of points in the design cube. or use a cylindrical coordinate system to define points on a cylinder.0. coordinates Ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. change. or delete. y-. consisting of database entries and select lists. and other components to one another. or z-axis. SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager maintains this information. you can use a spherical coordinate system to define points on a sphere. you can press F1 to learn about a dialog box.Glossary connect point Active point item that is specially designated in a component. D data Facts or raw material that you add. Proper connectivity must exist to confirm valid data integrity. coordinate Location of a point along the x-. behavior of a connector relies on the two items that it connects. A connect point is a location at which you can connect lines. points are located by traversing the x-. data dictionary The underlying data model of a plant. and z-axes. data model Application items that populate a project. Also. Normally. lines. For example. y-. context-sensitive help Display of help topics that are associated with a dialog box or command. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 417 . a location for applying a relationship connectivity Linkage between items that relates because of their graphics. cursor See pointer. the origin of coordinate systems is 0. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. labels.

a closed shape exists. design session Elapsed time from when you open a design file until you close the design file. a specific program can communicate. or process these files. digits of accuracy Number of digits used after a decimal point to display the discharge dimensions.Glossary database Collection of files of comprehensive information that have predefined structure and organization. Indicating the region. design-wide break A region of the drawing within which a single property value is defined for all the included components. ending at the points of intersection with that arc or circle. database table Part of the database consisting of rows and columns and containing information about the project and design elements. and monitors disk storage usage of the database and performance. diameter A straight line passing through the origin of an arc or circle. or floppy disk. examples of devices are a tape drive. also called a drawing file. removes databases no longer in use. delimiter A separating mark or space. default Predetermined value of a parameter that the system or a program automatically supplies whenever the user does not specify a value. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. device Non-addressable component of a network. design database Database that contains the non-graphical data for the equipment and piping models. disk drive. database administrator The technical support person who assigns user IDs and data access permissions. design file File containing graphics and text data. 418 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . creates new databases. along with an accompanying label that shows the property value. interpret.

directional items use the direction of the line in which you located them. text. difference in longitude.Glossary directional Referring to items that depend on their orientations to directional flow for correct placement in a drawing. dithering Technique for achieving greater color resolution at the expense of spatial resolution. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 419 . drag To use the software functionality that attaches the pointer to an item so you can see the item move in dynamics. drawing. display-only annotation Feature that allows you to generate temporary annotation graphics for review without placing the graphics in a design file. drawing file File in which you place items. or positive. E easting Term used in plane surveying that describes an east. P&ID Graphics file that contains data about one unit. also called a design file. driving label Graphics. directory File or folder that stores the names of other files. diversity Amount of deviation in airflow that a system encounters from the design conditions. You can consider a drawing view like a window into a specified volume in the model. Each drawing has a unique drawing number within the unit to which the drawing belongs. drawing view Specific. or both with their own entities and properties that you place on the P&ID to define values for properties of the components and groups to which they apply. edge-edge model Model that represents connectivity entire by edges. scaled view produced from the model graphics. More colors are produced with loss of some detail.

enumerated list See select list. the name should relate to the contents of the file. the software automatically creates a group relationship between the equipment and the component. As you place equipment components. For easier identification.Glossary endpoint Data point that defines the end of a linear element.that is. field Interface component of a dialog box that displays information to you or allows you to type data to record. As a group. equipment group A single-name equipment body and any items within or attached to the body. 420 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . file name Name that a user defines for an interactively created file. file specification Path name that instructs the software for the location of a file. and assignment to unit. event A status milestone that tracks the history of an item. exit elevation Lowest downstream elevation point on the internal diameter of a pipe. equipment components Items associated with pieces of equipment. file Collection of logical records stored as a unit. exclusive database relationship Relationship that exists between any given instrument and the loop to which it belongs . such as nozzles and trays. name change. Examples of events are creation. the components move along with the equipment. an instrument can belong only to one loop at a time. F fences Temporary method of locating and grouping items that you need to change. such as a tray or nozzle.

flow rate Quantity of fluid that flows per unit of time. group Set of components with physical boundaries and a single name . font Complete set and style of the characters and symbols of a typeface used for displaying text that you place in a drawing file. fixed point A control point that usually is a locally known monument with known coordinates.that is. This subset meets criteria that property values define. 2. ISO. For SmartPlant P&ID. G gap Condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically on the P&ID but not physically in the plant. geometric industry standard A select-list property that identifies the source of the data . including the filename. full path name Name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. flow time Required time for the flow.from which the software deduces the specific geometry of a commodity item. See also relative path name.industry standard such as ANSI. from the start of the piped system. grid Network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines that help to identify either 2-D or 3-D relationships.Glossary filter Function that creates a subset of items. Icons that show the perpendicular or parallel relationships with other items in the drawing as you point over items in the drawing. glyphs 1. to reach a downstream point. a group number. glyphs identify the relationships that you are creating. or DIN. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 421 . Icons attached to the pointer that provide feedback as you draw. or company standard .

422 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . height property Distance between the base offset and the top of the item. and labels. in the plane of. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file.Glossary H handles Graphical indications that appear when you perform a valid change to an item. implied piping component Piping components that the software creates in the alphanumeric database. horizontal distance Distance between two points computed using only the northing and easting coordinates of the points. these components are not represented graphically. This property provides a method to represent a 3-D model when working in a 2-D drawing. I icon A pictorial representation or image. Horizontal angles are the basic measurements needed to determine bearings and azimuths. horizontal angle Angle measured in the horizontal plane. hierarchy A classified structure with superiors. components. a symbol that graphically identifies a command or task. or roots. hierarchical An ordered relationship from greatest to least. header First items of information in a file that precede any actual data. refers to the relationships among groups. horizontal Parallel to. or operating in a plane parallel to the horizon or to a base line. for grouping files or commands. and subordinates. horizontal scale A scaling factor that exaggerates the horizontal scale as you draw graphics. or dependents.

such as flow or temperature. interference checking Process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between items in a drawing. Inline instruments include instrument valves. import script File that the software uses to import or transfer data. and other instrument components. Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. instrument loops A group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged so that signals can pass from one function to the next for the purpose of measuring and controlling a process variable. inline Term used to refer to those piping or instrument components that you can insert in a piping segment. inline instruments Components that you can insert into a piping segment.Glossary import Process that transports or transfers data from one environment to another. integer A whole number with no fractional part. In SmartPlant P&ID. instance A single allocation of an item class. Instruments can be devices such as final control elements. computing devices. you can create instrument loops containing any combination of inline and offline instruments. or electrical switches. such as butterfly valves and temperature regulator valves. input The data submitted to a computer for processing. instruments Devices that directly or indirectly measure or control a variable in a plant process. such as orifice plates and flow controllers. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 423 . isometric Relating to or concerning a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. a view in which the horizontal lines of an item are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base.

and properties. however. a single member in the P&ID. A line route contains line runs. such as a file in a catalog. such as equipment. gaps. label. You can have several layers in a drawing sheet. events. line style Collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group to apply as a style of a line. gaps. a line route does not contain any branches. 424 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . connect to the item. to which you can snap in the drawing . keypoint Point on an item.Glossary item Unit of storage within a larger unit. line route Collection of ordered line runs. J justification Point of orientation for text placement. including vertices. item type Distinct objects that users can manipulate in SmartPlant P&ID. line string A series of connected line segments. Each label is an entity with properties and provides the primary means of defining property values in the P&ID task. L label A graphic representation that reflects the status or condition of an associated item. and components that all share the same attribution. PDS 2D Intelligent graphics and text that identify a group or component. components.that is. and safety classes. K key Property or column in a table that is the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. layer A logical grouping of items on a drawing sheet.

Point to the manipulation handle on upper corner of an item to display the mirror handle. The term has a dual meaning: network can refer to the devices that connect the system. mirror handle Reflects an image about the horizontal and vertical axes. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 425 . Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) The approximate diameter of a pipe. macro A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. the software performs the actions or runs the commands. M MTO Material take-off. northing Term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. collection of all items and their relationships to create a coherent description of a process plant. When you run the macro. also called a Bill of Materials. Visual C++ Delphi. N network Interconnection of host computers and workstations that allows them to share data and control. makeup air Air brought into a space from the outside to replace exhausted air. or network can refer to the connected system. linear Having a single dimension. model A representation of graphics or a schema. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Visual Basic. nozzle A special equipment item that contains the connection point to piping. and so forth.Glossary line width Thickness of a displayed item. a line. mirror To create the reverse image of a display set through a plane or around a defined axis.

Typically. origin In coordinate geometry. and system functions. For example.Glossary O occurrence A row within a relational database table. offline instruments Components that you do not insert into a piping segment. regardless of the method or location that you used for placement. See also orientation by system and orientation fixed. The default orientation of this item is identical to items that the software orients. orientation fixed A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation in which you created them. orientation Position of items in the design plane relative to the origin. See also orientation by system and orientation by user. orientation by user. Offline instruments include temperature regulators. these components are the instruments that monitor and control inline instruments. y-. the software automatically rotates the item 90 degrees counterclockwise from the orientation in which you created it. such as digital control stations (DCS) or computers. orientation by user A type of orientation in which you define the orientation of an item when you place it. You can change the default orientation at placement time. level gauges. Oracle A relational database management system. You cannot change the orientation at placement time. and z-axes intersect. offline Term that refers to those instrument components that are not inserted in a pipe run. if you place the items in free space or in a horizontal line. if you placed the item in a vertical line. and orientation fixed. the point where the x-. operator The part of the Structured Query Language (SQL) syntax that defines relationships between data. See also orientation by system. orientation by system A type of orientation in which the software places items in the same orientation that you created them. See also orientation by user. 426 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . Examples are equal to and greater than.

See also absolute path name and relative path name.Glossary orthogonal view A view that is a projection of the drawing onto a plane along lines that are orthogonal to the plane. pipe run A line run that has piping properties. The P&ID includes three primary groups of items: equipment. A pipe run has a beginning and an end. the collection of pipe runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. branch points and gap components. such as process conditions for temperatures and pressures. P&ID See Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. Also. path name Sequence of directories leading to a file. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. A pipe run segment may have identical properties as a pipe run from which it branches but is not considered part of the pipe run. a contiguous set of pipe run segments separated only by inline components. and identifies physical components in the plant. parametric item Item that contains geometry constrained together using relationships. Also. with driving dimensions that are defined as adjustable parameters. It does not branch or contain spaces between components. parameter A property with a value that determines the characteristics or behavior of an item. peak flow Maximum flow rate of water through a specific size pipe. The P&ID is the basis for both the construction of the physical plant and further specification of instrumentation components. and instrumentation. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) Primary drawing for maintaining a plant. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 427 . pipeline Set of connected piping segments and their associated piping items. P PFD Process Flow Diagram. The drawing relates critical processrelated information. piping.

a 150-pound carbon steel specification.for example. a drawing that serves as a start for a P&ID. that you place by a primitive command.typically. or one-point piping component . primitive commands The most basic graphic command such as placing a line or placing a circle. off-page connector. Piping components include valves. strainers. In drawings. piping network Series of connected pipe runs and inline components.for example.Glossary piping components Graphic elements that represent processes or functions within a particular piping segment. as drawn through the anchor point. position angle Defines the angle between the horizontal axis. utility connector. plant A group of facilities and equipment that performs one or more material processing functions within a given geographical area. A network terminates at a nozzle. primitive items An item. items with the same line number. 428 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . and safety components. process line Ordered collection of connectors and inline components with an equal set of core properties . pointer On-screen tool that allows you to indicate an item or area. One company can have several plants located at different geographical locations. Piping Materials Class (PMC) Classification of components by service or specification . such as a line or circle. a pipe cap. Specifically. piping components are connected with multiple line segments. piping segment A line string with two or more vertices that defines the centerline geometry of the pipe run and contains the non-graphic data associated with the pipe run. a representation of the piping that transfers process fluid. and the rotate handle. flanges. reducers. PFD Process Flow Diagram.

density. commodity libraries. report formats. and other information of a similar theme. the project may contain design files from multiple applications. graphics symbology. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 429 .Glossary process point A tool that defines the operating conditions at a particular place during a process. reference data A collection of information containing facts relative to industry design codes. line style. and width. reference file A drawing file attached to another drawing file for reviewing reference. lines extending from the boundaries of an item and between which dimensioning data for the area marked by the projection lines is placed. A project is not necessarily specific to an application. or material. For example. job specifications. cost. Examples include defining temperature. item. You can establish relationships as you place new items or between items already on the drawing sheet. Properties stored with the valve symbol are displayed in the Properties window when the valve symbol is selected. 2. The properties of an item can include display properties and properties stored with the item. or document. probably in separate geographical locations and having limited communication among them. Other properties stored with the valve symbol can include the manufacturer. label descriptions. R RAD 2D Draft Platform 2D graphic platform developed from the product core functionality of SmartSketch. Term used for convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. This connection indicates that some form of communication of behavior or state occurs. property A unique characteristic of an object. projection lines Witness lines. and flow rate. catalog data of vendors. a graphic representation attached to a drawing view. symbol. the properties of a valve symbol can include display properties such as color. project 1. relationship A condition that exists between items. Several projects can be under design at one time. A directory file created in an application environment that contains design files and subprojects.

See also absolute path name and path name. revision triangle A numbered triangle placed in the P&ID to indicate the drawing revision when the change occurred. rotate handle Turns a selected item around its anchor point. You can select a user-level or a project-level template to create a new report template. orientation by system or orientation by user. 430 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . row A unit of related information in a table. whether they are defined in the P&ID reference data as orientation fixed. it appears in the stockpile for later placement. but much more difficult to predict. rule Standard mechanism for creating relationships. revision cloud A set or arcs used to enclose changes that have occurred since the last revision. one collection of column values for a table. rubberbanding Animation dynamic that allows you to specify the position of a data point while the item changes as you move the pointer. report template An online outline for a new report that you need to define. An item is required if the Tag Required Flag property is set to True for the item in the Properties window of Catalog Manager. relative path name Sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. and to the orientation of any graphic item to which they are attached at placement time. rotation angle Defines the angle of change between the old and new positions of a rotated element. A rule defines a valid context for two items to communicate their behavior or state. Point to the manipulation handle on either side of an item to display the rotate handle.Glossary relative mode A placement mode in which symbols respond to their orientation definition at creation time. If you delete a required item from a drawing. required item Item that the plant model needs. Relative placement mode is more flexible then absolute.

and piping. segment Contiguous piping and piping components between two points in the network at which properties change value. An ordered collection of connectors. and inline components with an equal set of core properties: typically. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 431 . 2. All network operations between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.Glossary S scale To enlarge or reduce the size of a defined item. A collection of signal runs from all drawings in a project whose project-defined line property values are identical. schematic file Schematic drawing or diagram of a particular item in the plant. and by the terminal ends of piping lines. See also pipe run. Segments terminate by property break labels. Scale Handle Changes the size of a selected drawing item. signal lines 1. nozzles. off-pace and utility connectors. 3. items that share the same line number. branches. schema Description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. Specifically. a representation of the wiring used for transferring electrical or software signals. Intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments. the node that maintains common data or performs a common task that clients need. server In network operations. search criteria Set of values used to scan a database or object library. inline instruments. select set A group of more than one drawing item. Point to the manipulation handle on any corner of the item to display the scale handle. modifying only the dimensions but not the ratio among the pieces. signal run A line run with signal properties.

and querying relational databases. symbol name Descriptive phrase that names a symbol that resides in a folder. and so forth. A collection of formats or properties that you name and store as a group. Standard Query Language (SQL) Language developed by IBM for creating. and text. including color. the software applies all the formats or properties in the style to the element. Symbology refers to the color. text libraries contain source files. 2. 2. modifying. step angle Specifies the increment of rotation for a selected item. symbol. See also neutral file. stockpile View of the data model. style. Usually. style 1. The appearance of geometry and annotations on the drawing sheet. Display style of an item. color and line weight of an element. dimension. In Options Manager. surface of revolution Surface formed by the revolution of a curve about an axis in its plane. 432 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . relative to the anchor point of the item. source file Uncompiled version of a parametric definition or other data table. graphic Permanent association of items that you can store and place as a group but cannot manipulate as individual items. and width. The style types include: fill. pattern. A value of 0 degrees allows free rotation. symbology 1. and style associated with items in a particular filter. When you apply a style to a selected item. symbology provides graphical clarity to a drawing by differentiating among various items by their appearance. displaying items that you have not yet placed in the graphic model. line weight. line. the font used in a text box.Glossary slider Interface component of a dialog box that displays values along a range. specific energy Depth of flow plus velocity head. For example. The default Step Angle is 0 degrees.

used as a starting point or blueprint for a particular application so that the format does not have to be recreated each time it is used. a file used to create a drawing with a set of default parameters. a file used to create roles. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type.Glossary T table Collection of data for quick reference. U unit Group of parts of the schematic and individual worlds of a plant that together perform a given process function. data dictionaries or other database schemas. In SmartPlant Engineering Manager. use the concept of unit. In SmartPlant P&ID. alphanumeric information. tabular data Non-graphic. template A document or file having a preset format. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 433 . transaction Nongraphic record of any additions. either you can enter this data or the software determines the value. The identifying number of the unit is unique within the project and within the plant. user name Name that provides access to an account on the system. Same as username. Most companies. V validation program User program that verifies data integrity in the database. but not all. utility Program that provides a commonly used service. deletions. task Grouping of related design activities. values Data stored in a property. a template serves as an outline or blueprint for you to create a new drawing. and changes that you request during job posting activities. time stamping Process that prompts the software to generate a record when you change an property.

work area Individual parts of a single process function that. vertical Located at a right angle to the plane of a supporting surface. and the measured angle. work session All operations performed in the period between opening and closing a database partition of the task. also called Z scale or Z factor. when considered as a whole. vertical scale Scaling factor that exaggerates the vertical scale of graphics when you draw. A work session is not limited to worth in the drawing file. The format that you type for vertical angles is the occupied point. y. witness lines Dimensioning items that extend from the dimension points to the dimension line. 434 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . The visual contents of a window displaying an aspect of the application model. vertical angle Angle above or below a horizontal plane through the line of sight. the foresight point. W width Line thickness of a displayed item. vector A quantity that has both magnitude and direction. You can manipulate vectors geometrically. constitute a unit.Glossary variable Quantity that can assume any one of a set of values. view Defined area of vision on a screen or window. workflow Method of selecting processes and performing tasks. A coordinate triple (x. z) represents a vector. generally represented as a line. window A control in the software that is the physical outline that contains a view.

For example. working units can be defined in terms of feet and inches. SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 435 .Glossary working units Real-world units that you can group into the design plane.

395. 172. 12 recent drawings. 60 tabular views. 267. 247. 316. 131. 169. 242 adding buttons. 36 Aspen Zyqad importing. 95 items. 122 sizes. 28. 399. 212 arranging windows. 287 saving. 30 embedding. 280 lines. 265. 102. 297 multi-sided. 179 insulation specifications. 322 approved warnings. 281 Save As. 396 toolbars. 260. 317 area breaks claiming. 238 annotations labels. 270 automation item tag formats. 132. 105 accessing Help. 260. 121. 175. 173 reports. 210 placing. 269 using.Index Index AABBCC codes assigning. 173 tasks to drawings. 94. 343 shortcut buttons. 329 assemblies creating. 211 applying rules. 66. 277 shortcut buttons. 175 items. 286 explained. 94. 400 associating plant groups. 141 placing. 161 piping specifications. 80 catalog items. 313. 319 approving warnings. 159 altering segment. 131 filters. 189 alter segment. 80 author documents. 171. 96 pipe runs. 27 affixing labels. 119 bounding box 436 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 162 alternate symbology. 262. 267. 212 rectangular. 133. 125 autofilter Engineering Data Editor. 113 AutoCAD exporting. 261 item tags. 18 borders displaying. 64 options. 237 instruments. 70 commands. 80 stockpile items. 269 lines. 323. 95 filter tabs. 381 activating symbol toolbars. 261 piping specifications. 208 axes mirror. 158 Alter Segment routing lines. 138. 171. 140 anchor point rotating. 111 Web Client. 122 linking. 169 access control. 61 AutoFilter customizing. 161 menus. 242 backgrounds customizing. 60 autogapping activate. 285 assigning insulation specifications. 88 attaching commands. 76 actuators aligning. 280 objects. 67. 284. 169. 329 tasks. 172. 178. 184 aligning labels. 126 OLE objects. 182. 321. 241.

398. 80. 83. 69 bulk properties. 166 breaks area. 250 inserting objects. 76 catalog nodes. 78 catalog items cloning. 410 child SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 437 . 254. 82 custom catalogs. 198 Offset Distance property. 82 opening. 82 toolbars. 70. 248 lines. 325 unit of measure. 304 change groups. 74. 182. 36 case data. 134 cascading windows. 33 checking inconsistencies. 82 File menu. 114 update symbols. 412 CGM file format. 283 items. 282 list views. 79. 282 items. 90 Catalog Explorer add to stockpile. 78 navigating. 82 finding items. 74 displaying. 281. 72. 196. 188. 86. 66 displaying buttons. 90 brief properties pasting. 304 changing embedded objects. 54. 197 branches connecting. 66 shortcut buttons. 276. 67 browsing for catalogs. 238. 277 labels. 84. 157 linked objects. 273 cells graphic. 197 removing items. 72 deleting items. 83 report templates. 191 breaking lines. 78. 156.Index labels. 65. 202 placing labels. 319. 68. 90 process. 84. 84. 65. 348 select set properties. 345. 82 views. 72 overview. 81. 86 case data control. 156. 69. 399 view properties. 73 closing. 256 branching lines. 341. 216. 14 Navigation menu. 255 selecting. 258 relationship properties. 69 buttons. 396. 283 catalogs cells and graphics. 75 cloning. 212 labels. 282 table properties. 70 list view. 217. 141 placing items. 198 OPCs. 68. 338. 89 browsing for catalogs. 48. 283 pipe runs. 79. 215. 75 deleting nodes. 83 sources. 199 linking objects. 246 deleting items. 87. 197. 76 command buttons. 245 symbol properties. 368 pipe runs. 80 Catalog Explorer. 199 leader lines. 278 mirror items. 73 Catalog Manager Cut command. 94 calendar using. 80 View menu. 281. 54 tasks. 276 links. 165. 412 checking paths. 78 page setups. 412 symbols. 157 properties. 48. 197 brief properties. 82 catalog items. 187. 187. 397. 28. 162 break labels. 165. 77. 89 buttons adding. 88 bulk properties copying. 166 links. 124 change details. 68. 73 cloning items. 83.

207. 250. 390 validating properties. 406 consulting services. 289. 303 exclusive. 293 and deleting. 148 connected items. 315. 135. 309 options. 309 component handles. 306 Engineering Data Editor. 406 constraints databases. 254. 105. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 143 construction status. 304. 251 labels. 9 commodity codes adding. 32. 32. 19 setting. 216 stockpile items. 381 connectors deleting. 305 drawings. 109 to plant structures. 105. 352 continuation 438 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 207 opening partner. 21 Colors tab Options dialog box. 256 connecting items. 300 To Do List. 303 access. 280 pasting items. 300 to do list. 43. 206 placing. 289. 297 claim mode. 44. 147. 206 open partner drawing. 409 construction status placed items. 297 related items. 299 TEF. 156. 300. 293. 109 to TEF. 301. 308. 238. 410 consistency check PDS 2D propagation. 305. 17 commands buttons. 44. 76 drawings. 293. 147 Clipboard copying. 173 compare. 20 storing. 304. 316. 146 tool. 308 Compare and Refresh dialog. 95 comments on documentation. 18. 73 closing Catalog Explorer. 73 catalog items. 293 items. 253 Cut command. 167 composite formats. 297 invalid claims. 298 and replacing items. 306 example. 292. 308. 28 inserting. 188 piping. 292. 293.Index representations. 302. 172 changing. 32. 68. 293. 241. 301. 308. 124 P&IDs. 293 releasing claims. 246 Paste an Item. 296 lines. 166 pipe runs. 166 to databases. 43 gaps. 45. 310 comparing. 310 version. 293. 247 pasting. 251 moving. 118 code lists. 45. 289. 305. 293. 202 stockpile. 293. 289. 293 Compare and Refresh column headings. 43. 293 shared. 313. 297 area breaks. 247 cloning Catalog Explorer. 297 labels. 291. 295 multiple representations. 293 claiming. 204. 42. 299 clearing selections. 289. 149 tools. 154 claim modes. 289. 309 versions. 238 components inline. 9 contents of reports. 205 consistency checking. 82 customizing. 407 colors customizing. 244 rotating using handles. 291. 293. 341 compound filters. 255 lines. 293 status. 137 configuration PickQuick tool.

410 correlating items. 129 graphical operations. 321. 96 P&IDs. 350 and claiming. 340. 256 shortcut buttons. 174 list views. 92. 286 buttons. 122 drawings. 114 defaults construction status. 206 continuation drawings how to. 356. 17 setting. 138 formats. 137 custom catalogs. 409 Properties window. 308. 27. 91 cutting equipment components. 136. 352. 255. 18. 92. 120. 143 dates defining. 21 instrument loops. 30 environments. 331. 81. 189 mirrored items. 254 labels. 360 report items. 341. 346. 80 tables. 68 compound filters. 293 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 439 . 91 colors. 91. 92. 89 heat tracing. 240 pipe run values. 389 correlations removing. 216 inconsistencies. 84 customizing appearance. 354. 175 items. 93. 14 data files importing. 78. 250 OPCs. 77. 50. 246 Data Dictionary Manager customized properties. 64 toolbars. 207 copying bulk properties. 28. 96 Open dialog box. 324 database connecting to. 21. 21 compare options. 137. 119. 133. 9 customization Options dialog box. 28 catalog nodes. 212 assemblies. 26. 95 filter tabs. 273 inline component values. 247 files. 343. 90. 28. 83. 93. 208 menus. 217 error conditions. 105. 89 files. 91 Catalog Explorer. 131 filters. 402 defining brief properties. 335. 331. 43. 357 report template contents. 401. 88. 96 deferring tasks. 131. 72 customer support. 80. 354 report templates. 284. 130. 138. 353. 17 toolbars. 389 creating area breaks. 19. 59. 94. 82. 46 tasks. 53 deleting. 56. 396 toolbars. 245. 21 buttons. 92 custom catalogs. 91. 338. 352 table layouts. 102 filter tabs. 409 restoring. 95. 141 packages. 356. 351. 341 select sets. 337. 78 menus. 102. 127. 395. 254 copyrights software. 340. 213 report templates. 95 with macros. 387.Index drawings. 52. 35. 110 placement. 331 tabular views. 88. 27. 246. 135. 107. 164 report contents. 17 display properties. 309 display options. 245. 121. 134 decimal places. 89. 29. 102 drawing templates. 109 databases constraints. 357 reports. 90 bulk properties. 86. 253. 273 items. 331. 175 properties. 254. 322 using the select tool. 21. 13 correcting actions. 91. 71. 91 reports. 72 documents. 141 opening. 354. 93. 349. 83. 237 item tags. 334. 132. 344. 47.

30. 121 drawings comparing. 130 using filters. 30 leader lines. 17. 48 tables. 84. 64 distances offset. 367 templates. 9 documents retrieving. 254 drawing revision clouds. 78 diagonal mode. 28. 305. 66 catalog items. 305. 62. 106. 45. 11 print options. 333. 75 catalog nodes. 304. 110 symbol toolbars. 302. 111 440 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 365 borders. 30 tabular views. 130 overview. 90 Catalog Explorer. 382. 250 shortcut buttons. 87. 65. 17 stockpile. 69 document properties. 99. 251 lines. 263 tabular views. 35 opening. 64 filters. 15. 115 Engineering Data Editor. 130 displaying about SmartPlant P&ID. 21. 207. 207. 81 stockpile items. 251 correlations. 89 properties. 105. 197. 108. 32.Index assembly items. 15 Drawing Manager change drawing name. 314 labels. 104. 94. 363. 348 settings. 74. 147 Design window. 82 case data. 28. 284 catalog items. 207 creating. 14. 207. 57 tasks. 351 select sets. 246. 77 claim status. 303 claims. 248. 335 reports toolbar. 162 Digital Print Room driver. 80. 207. 251. 62 grids. 309 in use. 59. 259 OPCs. 90 buttons. 180 items. 86. 304. 86. 35 toolbars. 249. 371 filters. 309 continuation. 367 properties. 24 windows. 121. 30 nulls. 102. 100 OPCs. 251 inline components. 261 deselecting items. 30 different symbols. 386 dragging items. 42. 112. 102 Engineering Framework. 57 descriptions adding. 13 as printed. 250. 403 views. 34 new views. 115 documentation comments. 107. 30. 246. 30. 13 inconsistencies. 122 views. 402. 131 properties. 81. 112 recent. 308. 41 subnodes. 34 Details command. 250. 31 Help. 218. 110 printing. 41. 76 table views. 214 templates. 251 model orphan items. 29. 251 instruments. 85. 203 properties. 95 connectors. 26 using zoom. 190 notes. 22. 74 commands. 245. 35 new. 389 from model. 32 customizing. 361 Disable Flip Text labels. 350. 385. 102 history. 30 brief properties. 119. 89 reports. 198 document properties. 98. 63 status bar. 198 display filters. 23. 248 report templates. 26 displays customizing. 331. 301.

46 table views. 55. 282 filters. 282 table items. 401 existing drawings. 68 P&IDs. 399 embedding borders. 356. 47 views. 101 tasks. 375. 127. 389 creating properties. 129 errors checking. 381 correlating items. 54. 394 entering free text. 34. 316 conditions. 120 views. 397 opening drawings. 181. 43 editing items. 83 sources. 273 images. 402 using. 122 drawings. 44 shortcut menu. 390. 396. 15 display. 398 publishing. 43 removing views. 122 documents. 338. 127. 273 editing. 60 caption. 353. 217 labels. 152. 129 refreshing. 134. 181 linked objects. 379. 38 tabular views. 58 Engineering Framework accessing Web. 394 properties. 405 reporting. 50 table properties. 373. 392. 43. 220. 276. 41 table layouts. 319 Excel. 345 select set properties. 397. 43 defining. 276. 278 URLs. 350. 51. 282 hyperlinks. 403 modifying properties. 345. 40. 254 editing drawing templates. 125 templates. 397. 40 autofilter. 87. 275. 111 exiting Catalog Explorer. 400. 258 properties of pipe runs. 121. 46 tasks. 398 creating tasks. 118. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 35. 216. 41 editing. 83 report templates. 260. 237 insulation specifications. 35 driving labels. 214 embedded objects. 382. 34 displaying. 220. 381 adding tasks. 404 refreshing. 357 reports. 129 recreating errors. 117 SmartPlant P&ID. 87. 261 items. 305 saving. 349. 403. 48 copying. 277. 39 stockpiles. 396 deferring tasks. 329 executing macros. 34. 129 consistency checking. 97. 398. 401. 389 correlations. 263 Stockpile. 47 pasting. 408 placing. 152 groups. 378. 281. 276 links. 276 items. 396.Index recreating. 124. 221 relationship properties. 380 refresh. 282 pipe run properties. 376. 34. 387. 402 deleting tasks. 331 importing. 346. 371 zooming. 404 retrieving documents. 188 duplicating items. 396. 354. 249 error conditions. 38 filters. 348. 267. 391. 385 running a task. 131. 386 retrieving files. 153 erasing items. 337. 377. 395 assigning tasks. 45. 20. 400 To Do List. 273. 317. 127. 273 Engineering Data Editor. 84. 102. 118 exploring SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 441 . 399. 395. 57 selecting items. 400 Browser. 341. 119. 280 objects. 87 equipment components. 221 properties. 394.

15 definition. 373. 378. 340. 234 replacing. 47 Filter Manager Add Filter command. 379. 401. 70 catalogs. 64. 137 creating. 382. 385 running a task. 234. 24. 133. 230 new. 361 formats fixed. 46. 400 Browser. 396. 137. 391. 376. 395. 229. 60 filters autofilter. 21 Filter tab. 269 Gap Now. 258 reports. 172 relationships. 139 Properties. 270 lines.Index elsewhere. 385. 356 rules. 379. 377. 346 reports. 22 stockpile. 138. 399. 341 report templates. 283 manipulating. 397 opening drawings. 398 publishing. 394 freezing panes. 377. 228. 329 fabrication categories. 136. 64 finding catalog items. 69 documents to publish. 380 refresh. 132. 380 retrieving. 29 filtering. 373. 131 Design window. 231. 130 setting. 376. 397. 413 display. 371 zooming. 131 tabular views. 402 using. 104 publishing to TEF. 132 tables. 110. 52. 197 connectors. 281 stockpile items. 377. 136. 357 gapping AutoGap. 378. 54 tabular views. 140 finding items. 126 objects. 61 compound. 335 reports. 225. 394 properties. 396. 237 inconsistencies. 340. 403 modifying properties. 64 from and to data reports. 169 fields reports. 338. 375. 378. 191. 227. 404 refreshing. 389 creating properties. 69. 381 adding tasks. 395 assigning tasks. 352. 405 reporting. 69 exporting drawings. 354. 389 correlations. 51. 234. 138. 343. 376. 226. 130 drawings. 382. 68. 341 Foundation SmartPlant. 228. 235 fitting views. 136 properties. 400 To Do List. 25 fixed format. 29. 226. 237 customizing. 267. 131 Filter tab customize. 403. 402 deleting tasks. 386 Files tab Options dialog box. 373. 229. 340 flow arrows. 390. 225. 173 fabrication categories assigning. 131. 201 fluids code values. 131 displays. 379. 17 report templates. 387. 47. 269 442 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 404 Retrieve command. 380 drawing items. 60. 392. 377 checking paths. 131. 186. 394. 215 fonts printing. 194. 375. 226. 130 tab. 386 retrieving files. 138 Paste. 273 opening. 230. 375. 91 defining. 398 creating tasks. 385 retrieving documents. 381 correlating items. 381 Framework accessing Web. 139. 396 deferring tasks. 352 files. 135.

17. 325 stream data. 340 reports. 261 heat tracing inline instrument. 150 properties. 33 snapping. 30. 150 grouping equipment. 359. 317 inline components and validation. 247. 244 scale. 265. 322 inconsistency indicators. 31 styles. 32. 31 views. 12 programming. 17 generating item tags. 141 properties. 152 plants. 280 lines. 268 pumps. 262. 305 hyperlinks adding. 351. 323 pipe runs. 324 overview. 278 icons customizing. 324. 273 images. 13 support. 313 histories. 276 instruments into loops. 163 tools. 238. 273. 31 placing. 31. 316 correcting. 329 log. 241. 259 defining. 78 large. 216 displaying. 316 errors. 325. 319. 338. 94. 275. 179 items. 304. 12 World Wide Web. 360 heat tracing. 277. 331. 67. 175. 234 inconsistency indicators. 157. 161 objects. 333. 240. 267. 323. 315 resolving. 88 handles colors. 325 files. 276 inserting. 12 user's guides. 410 display. 238. 324 drawings. 270 using. 275. 95 documents. 270 General tab. 208 reports. 239 selecting items. 78 display. 151 spacing. 226. 244 mirror. 156 headers defining for reports. 178. 341 graphics cells. 276.Index manually. 278 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 443 . 313 overview. 248 vertex. 370 Help accessing. 328 items. 273 from reports. 18 hints consistency check. 177 height printing. 268 inconsistencies checking. 13 hiding toolbars. 20. 28 commands. 164. 78 displaying small. 30. 276 importing data. 265. 31 tabs. 412 grids densities. 335. 242 parametric. 238 rotate. 77 images embedding. 273 inserting. 144 using. 358. 321. 30 indices. 112 General tab Options dialog box. 329 using reports. 238. 408 groups equipment. 273 hyperlinks. 314 finding. 334. 175 inserting buttons. 324 from SmartSketch. 238. 31 displaying. 18 component. 268 SmartSketch files. 175 offline instruments. 26 highlights colors.

186. 198. 200 text display. 182. 199 flipped text. 195. 191. 387. 202 piping. 165. 161. 191. 198 title blocks. 182. 302 generating. 199 mirrorable. 211 properties. 194. 256 correlating. 303 connected. 338 saving. 201 descriptions. 188. 32. 126 layouts default. 197 item types. 197 copying. 190 placing. 190 landscape printing. 199 targeting. 260 Insulation Manager overview. 30 Installation Guide overview. 161 viewing items. 182. 291. 292. 54 leader lines connectors. 197 leader lines. 233 selecting. 289. 179. 301. 45. 199 displaying. 50 options. 370 layers AutoCAD. 323 importing. 267. 179. 194. 196 moving. 291. 389 deleting. 11 instruments inline. 261 specifications. 186 legal notices. 259. 191. 48 Page Setup. 53. 42 implied. 265 offline. 197 components. 258 offset distance. 186 OPCs. 126 MicroStation. 44. 199 property breaks. 412 driving. 47. 161 shortcut buttons. 273 vertices. 198 modifying. 208 items claiming. 67 URLs. 197 Catalog Manager. 156. 30 driven. 191. 141 invalid claims. 184. 292. 302. 329 Internet viewing drawings. 197 two-point placements.Index pipe runs. 369 report templates. 186. 32. 255. 389 replacing. 412 fitting text. 293 removing correlations. 125 PDS 2D. 196. 51. 188. 13 levels exporting. 201. 45. 338. 80 stockpile items. 301. 46 setting. 300. 197. 329 using Aspen Zyqad. 174 loop. 188. 254. 44 joining lines. 187 placements. 157. 232. 189 displaying. 164. 188 types. 181. 166 pipe runs. 329 with Aspen Zyqad. 186. 44. 196 rotatable. 300. 197 types of terminators. 303 item tags. 178. 262 insulation heat tracing. 180 loops. 156. 190. 22 tables. 182 placement. 200 updating. 174. 406 using filters. 177 properties. 198 flow arrows. 182. 199 aligning. 182. 341 reports. 197 terminator types. 166 labels. 188 placing. 340. 191. 182. 293. 208 validation. 175. 198 offset source. 186. 189 annotations. 302. 198 one-point placements. 413 libraries 444 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 262 revisions. 182. 188. 182. 178. 210 breaks. 125 exporting. 161. 184. 11 integration Aspen Zyqad. 175. 175. 124 intranet bypassing. 190 labels.

251 gapping. 54. 265 relationship properties. 220 selecting. 255. 328 mirror axes. 28 filter tabs. 360 Match all defining filters. 242 mirroring axes. 160. 238 leader lines. 341. 198. 166 routing. 276. 165 deleting. 102. 179. 345 select set properties. 95. 158. 272 linking assemblies. 65. 96 default. 226 loops instrument. 84. 13 line routing ribbon. 119. 241 items. 273 lines. 221 OPCs. 80 manipulating assemblies. 302. 281 editing. 166 updating. 52 Match All filters. 412 licenses notices. 174. 25 windows. 238. 351. 241 modeler displaying windows. 241. 238. 271 lines branching. 325 migrator importing. 283 changing. 292.Index cells. 93. 101 making buttons. 303 embedded objects. 218. 15 MicroStation exporting. 122 changing. 135 maximum units. 161. 15 models orphan items. 96 shortcuts. 219. 153 items. 282 filters. 281 links breaking. 175. 282 properties. 126 OLE objects. 202 pipe runs. 325 SmartSketch. 169 menus creating. 45. 284 borders. 281 Save As. 98. 145. 240. 282 table properties. 338. 242 handles. 52 Match Any filters. 54 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 445 . 68 inconsistencies. 125 migration rules. 216. 281 files. 258. 281 pipe runs. 282 list views. 100 modifying claimed items. 265 links. 265 stockpile. 407 views. 248. 178. 83 report templates. 157. 91 executing. 145. 162 breaking. 44. 78 locating catalog items. 83 sources. 281. 97. 159. 25 mapping attributes. 165. 156 weight and color. 91. 132 items. 99. 166 properties. 121. 287 equipment. 163 joining. 271. 254. 256 starting. 87. 180 macros adding. 92 customizing. 301. 207. 217. 92. 146. 242 items. 278. 159 update settings. 357. 96 restoring. 131 shortcut buttons. 156. 166 objects. 221 views. 272 line settings updating. 300. 78 lists select. 162 routing ribbon. 135 Match any defining filters. 240. 160. 77 tags. 190 lines.

222. 399 title blocks. 223. 46 user's guides. 265. 220. 223 stockpile items. 102. 69 tables. 203 storing. 202. 79 networks connecting. 169 defining. 186. 204 equipment. 132. 173 446 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 156. 195 OPCs deleting. 184. 14 rename. 222. 177 off-page connectors. 222. 207 opening partner OPC. 75 compound filters. 201 OLE files. 238. 34 nodes Catalog Explorer. 331 report templates. 46 tasks. 408 items. 255 creating. 190 lines. 251 matching OPC label. 153 null property value. 344 toolbars. 97. 186 labels. 397. 188. 156. 273 insert an object. 201 offset distance. 217. 216. 277 one-point placement. 104. 221 OPCs. 343. 206. 205 open partner drawing. 182 one-point placement. 206. 207. 198. 219. 256 new compound filters. 263. 110. 186. 154 naming catalog nodes. 138 report items. 12 macros. 204. 106. 20. 184. 190 leader lines. 35. 187. 109 recent drawings. 253 labels. 223 multiple drawings printing. 216. 216 window. 107. 222 moving partners. 264. 261 nozzles placing internally. 120 toolbars. 105. 12 filters. 136 report items. 367 multiple representations child and parent. 221 piping components. 184. 220. 206 opening Catalog Explorer. 12 Web Client. 51 templates. 394 files. 111. 172 notes displaying. 204. 343 tables. 268 moving. 189. 101 new drawings. 186 how to. 194 using reports. 197. 89 setting to display. 72 renaming. 20. 396. 126 filters. 265 to another drawing. 205. 42. 35 drawings. 218. 121 features. 30 properties. 167 select sets. 72 continuation drawings. 222 pipe runs. 108. 35. 27 views. 207 databases. 206. 86 offline instruments placing. 137 drawings. 27 Navigation Catalog Explorer. 254 selecting. 186 properties. 398. 109 drawing views. 105. 121 plant structures. 184 labels. 381 options codes. 104 Help. 353 report templates. 108. 201. 137 drawing views. 202 off-page connectors. 136. 204 properties. 205. 215. 75 nominal diameters assigning. 182 moving. 65 navigating. 105.Index tabular views. 198 source. 35 drawings. 111 symbol set. 204 storing partner. 173 defning. 206 placing.

147. 391 orientations drawings. 238 parametrics resizing. 277. 409 labels. 271 symbology changes. 149 selecting items. 121 Page Setup. 166 routing.Index colors. 162 breaking runs. 165 components. 25 parametric handles. 409 equipment groups. 273 PDS 2D cells. 333 symbology. 77. 146 placement. 171. 43 special. 272 overview. 17 placements construction status. 173 Placement tab Options dialog box. 246. 273 items. 284. 159. 141 design window. 17 Options Manager connectors. 331 P2C2 Web forum. 213 stockpile. 98 overview SmartPlant P&ID. 369 Page Setup. 17 Options dialog box. 280 properties. 363. 278. 253. 250 line settings. 409 setting. 369 printing. 141 database. 280 paths checking. 186 tolerances. 368 layouts. 313 solving inconsistencies. 42. 172. 272 update symbology. 268 joining. 413 PickQuick configuration tool. 167 inserting vertices. 171 using. 154 pasting bulk properties. 159. 370 orphan items deleting. 169. 184. 166 properties. 158. 247. 181 reports. 188 placing annotations. 19 two-point. 173 selecting. 167. 370 templates. 280 objects. 256 selecting runs. 412 comparing to SmartPlant. 255 PipeSpec assigning. 254. 89 files. 148 pipe runs inline components and validation. 130 labels. 62 panning views. 15 drawings. 408 errors. 211 area breaks. 256 specifications. 182. 239 parent representations. 265 page setups changing. 169 piping branches. 181 one-point. 165. 122 panes freezing. 66 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 447 . 11 removing items. 406 construction status. 410 using filters. 246 default units. 160 runs. 369 printing. 271 organizing tasks. 161 joining. 182. 215. 102 filters. 166 selecting. 283 linking files. 88. 175 placing items. 114 deleting items. 10 overviews creating a drawing. 13 packages creating. 202 Cut command. 365. 212 assemblies. 287 catalog items. 162. 156. 172. 175 item tag. 18 construction status. 245 report templates.

186. 150 labels. 300. 289.Index component labels. 364. 30. 402 precision units. 302. 299 break labels. 175. 265 plant structures opening. 173 property. 195 connectors. 84. 146. 172. 88 PMC assigning. 84 adding descriptions. 188. 363. 175 instruments. 299. 263. 182. 363 scale. 48. 115. 365. 293. 114 pressure maximum. 194 plant reports. 259 and claiming. 116 drawings. 77 inline instruments. 337 portrait printing. 291. 361. 154 offline instruments. 175 internal nozzles. 201. 298. 162. 84. 184. 141 files. 221 piping components. 187. 297. 296. 87 displaying alphabetically. 17 propagation comparing. 363. 43. 112. 368 range. 169 printable user's guides. 361. 90 display. 114. 194 heat tracing. 153 items. 322 customizing. 333 plant item groups examples. 303 claiming items. 370 files. 363. 361. 169 points center. 367 drawings. 301. 97. 91 importing. 88. 88. 167 revision clouds. 195 OPCs. 44. 105. 109 plants groups. 368 fonts. 86 documents. 258 explained. 300 enabling. 321. 89. 367 documents. 366. 48. 248 labels. 370 positioning assemblies. 361 to a file. 295. 144 portable reports. 182. 162. 112 editing. 367 origin. 89 copying. 361 multiple drawings. 211 lines. 84. 113. 329 macros. 363. 88. 233. 264 title blocks. 361. 169 programming customization. 114 filters. 410 properties. 367. 90 bulk. 12 printing copies. 149. 85. 406 PDS 2D. 202. 264 items on a grid. 288 statuses. 367 time. 90 displaying. 370 settings. 66 equipment. 237 formatted. 86. 144 end. 294. 175 in stockpile. 158. 153 items. 66. 367 process case data assigning. 204 packages. 158. 196 brief. 86 displaying categorially. 87. 32. 401. 232. 152. 177 OPCs. 28. 33. 141 Page Setup. 204 equipment. 214 stockpile items. 84. 288 overview. 213 pipe runs. 363 selected areas. 367 setting options. 369 page setups. 201 postponing tasks. 112. 292. 177 instruments with heat tracing. 171 using. 363 overview. 42. 288 to do list. 141. 87 448 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 215. 66. 84. 284 catalog items. 131. 153 flow arrows. 368. 45. 144. 221 multiple representations. 101 projects. 300 prompts status bar.

300. 83 releasing claims. 159. 331. 389 inline components. 220. 319 instruments. 76 catalog nodes. 333 importing items. 344. 405 versions. 354. 345 editing items. 89 proxy server. 303 removing assembly items. 28. 167 printers. 83 report templates. 310 views. 358 including select lists. 371 with SmartPlant Foundation. 80 catalog items. 118 reapplying rules. 357 defining layouts. 58 To Do List. 68. 376. 248 report templates. 377. 343. 351 displaying. 35. 232. 284 buttons. 249. 368 relationship. 356 defining contents. 373. 375. 340. 51. 396. 245. 165. 240 refresh Compare and Refresh dialog. 371 relationships using. 350 shortcut buttons. 305 drawings. 231. 352 creating. 373. 293 items. 354 deleting. 380 to TEF. 333 creating. 58 refreshing. 268 lengths. 180 items. 375. 76 SmartPlant P&ID. 74. 166. 350. 305 tabular views. 250. 350 table. 225. 251 OPCs. 403. 337 defining items.Index grids. 237 mode. 159. 380 queries Engineering Data Editor. 261 nulls. 377. 373. 246. 203 pasting. 74 commands. 380 files. 262 labels. 75 drawings. 40 quitting Catalog Explorer. 232 replacing and claiming. 233. 31 inconsistencies. 75. 221 piping components. 335. 375. 354 options. 100. 165. 151 Properties window. 379. 14. 338. 398. 127. 102 Replace Mode catalog items. 129 reflecting items. 81 stockpile items. 175. 337. 94. 358 spacings. 75 catalog nodes. 198. 215. 45. 44. 306 example. 404 reports changing templates. 233 report templates contents. 88. 248. 340 headers. 358 reporting contents. 229. 89 OPCs. 68. 399 validating. 299 views. 305 registering projects. 166. 235. 333 to do list. 43 pipe runs. 259. 354 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 449 . 341 creating templates. 331 editing. 221 notes. 403 views. 321 recreating drawings. 341 contents. 302. 230. 376. 378. 378. 350 editing. 402. 228. 95 correlations. 57 renaming catalog items. 379. 68. 28. 310 To Do List. 346 formats. 301. 42 tasks. 379. 46. 354. 404 version. 251 instruments. 43 releasing claims. 292. 315. 141 publishing documents. 199 lines. 90 tasks. 341 defining template layouts. 201. 99. 378. 334. 341 deleting templates. 234. 98. 29. 335. 397. 346. 376. 345 composite. 377.

335 modifying. 265 items. 220. 352 source templates. 360 types. 37 tabular views. 262 ribbons line routing. 218 piping. 340. 348. 370 parametrics. 159. 157. 118 settings. 228 segment alter. 348. 337. 244 routing lines. 22 retrieving documents. 154 multiple. 284. 352. 130. 341. 353 template options. 56 templates. 28 views. 369. 239 searching for drawing items. 357. 313 filters. 385. 354. 216. 199. 221 pipe runs. 346. 238 rotating handles. 315. 321. 240. 214 links. 160. 358 template properties. 162. 352 filters. 154 parent. 352 find directory. 44. 225. 360 toolbars. 356 layouts. 220. 325 reapplying. 11 rules inconsistencies. 359. 341. 340. 160. 343 options. 96 toolbars. 251 resetting toolbars. 386 from TEF. 248 connected items. 146 rotate handles. 55 scale handles. 340 template items. 400 saving assemblies. 130 overview. 282 report templates. 386 files. 337 sort orders. 343. 358 fields. 148. 350. 117. 319. 385. 126 P&IDs. 385. 345 sources. 286 drawings. 238 scaling drawing items. 157. 345 naming templates. 359 tabular. 255. 118. 322 running macros. 154 required items. 156. 243 select tool. 147. 256 450 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 359 importing items. 343 headers. 351. 321. 156. 101 tasks. 22. 338. 158. 338 lengths. 352. 356. 239 parametrics. 161 rotation. 343 new. 244 items. 227. 125 views. 42. 217. 124. 42. 42. 28 resizing drawings. 340. 338. 21 fixed formats. 214 revisions text. 124. 239 resolving inconsistencies. 242. 157 select sets. 359 overview. 352. 344. 351. 157. 341 template formats.Index editing templates. 161. 282 revision clouds. 410 restoring menus. 237 for items. 220. 221 Rule Manager consistency checking. 254. 162. 87 revising drawings. 285. 346. 382. 317. 144 selecting all. 125. 241 move. 341 formats. 157 insert. 350 templates. 354. 20 handles. 386 reviewing properties. 32 migration. 217. 141 portable. 349. 145. 382. 102. 226. 239 embedded objects. 345. 156. 221 mirror. 382. 344 spacings. 159. 343 representations child. 160. 37. 322. 243.

86. 256 inserted items. 264 removing items. 41 filters. 90 inconsistencies. 254. 151 solving inconsistencies. 256 sets. 255. 53 sources offset. 410 sorting report items. 407 filters. 371 SmartPlant Foundation interfacing with. 145. 215. 407 macros. 141 pipe runs. 281. 265 placing items. 18 servers open site server. 77 Engineering Data Editor. 333. 30 items. 255. 43. 63 shortcuts buttons. 17 stockpile claiming items. 328 snapping grids. 158. 271. 11 SmartSketch migration. 277. 81. 62. 121. 237 inline components. 109 Open Site Server. 20 stockpiles adding items. 179. 42. 32. 112 setting options. 44. 148. 302 specifications insulation. 144. 263. 222. 202 overview. 254 selection criteria. 367 saving. 248 deleting items. 256 properties. 130 importing. 223. 159 P&IDs. 248. 254.Index entries. 370 SmartPlant Engineering Manager using. 256 tool. 65 menus. 299 setting partner locations. 67 Aspen Zyqad. 66. 86. 112 properties. 81 case data. 250 displayed items. 198. 77 connectors. 80. 97. 91 Catalog Explorer. 22 tabular views. 256 lists. 293. 146. 15. 109 Open Site Server. 246 deleted items. 10 Rule Manager. 11 Insulation Manager. 11 Options Manager. 141 packages. 335 selections colors. 282 symbols. 283. 122. 67 adding to. 248. 223 spreadsheets adding items. 105 settings labels. 254. 255. 325 SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager. 46 drawings. 255. 201 Cut items. 369. 265 OPCs. 248. 344 symbol file. 82. 319. 278. 147. 201 report templates. 255. 255. 190 sites open server. 265. 90 buttons. 158. 261 splitting drawings. 114 for a drawing. 146. 287 SP_ID. 317. 272 printing. 43. 105 sizing drawings. 256 lines. 314 leader lines. 116 status construction. 267. 84. 190 lines. 329 starting lines. 245 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 451 . 86. 371 SmartPlant Migrator importing. 65. 145. 11 overview. 79. 101 networks. 264. 218. 159 statistics current document. 260. 178. 356 tables. 409 status bar prompts. 381 using. 83. 222. 254. 44 runs. 329 moving items. 254. 329 importing. 254. 325. 17 showing brief properties. 131.

245. 262. 62 updating views. 277. 392. 392. 387 modifying properties. 398. 396. 378 refresh. 399 opening drawings. 397. 397. 58 view displays. 396 deferring tasks. 272 symbols displaying. 399. 71. 292. 204. 394. 403. 258 filters. 391. 140 claims. 400. 41 storing partner OPCs. 405 removing. 76 symbology alternate. 138 tabular customizing views. 394 types. 46 reporting. 404. 395. 400 To Do List. 271. 54. 381 adding tasks. 69 sources. 44. 389 creating properties. 50. 57. 387. 48. 61 format reports. 381 correlating items. 394 properties. 46. 55. 400 creating. 43. 38 layouts. 111 windows. 90 tabs customizing. 58. 278. 397 opening drawings. 329 summaries current document. 402. 62. 396 assigning to drawings. 60. 377. 395. 396. 46. 36 symbol sources. 57 displaying views. 12 switching drawings. 338 freezing panes. 112 setting options. 391. 20. 397. 60. 382. 47 tabular views editing. 47 table views. 386 retrieving files. 47. 293. 398 creating tasks. 404 retrieving documents. 116 support Help. 45 modifying. 208 XML. 333 saving. 400. 403 reporting. 32. 303 updating. 398 publishing. 35. 301 accessing Web. 401. 248 validation. 399 refreshing. 375. 41. 287 toolbars. 385 running a task. 395 assigning tasks. 390. 405 reporting. 52. 389 correlations. 404 refreshing. 301. 281 toolbars. 403. 373. 38 editing items. 51 properties. 14 viewing. 263 tools. 76 tables bold items. 402 using. 394 452 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 390 updating. 46. 34. 12 World Wide Web. 333 view. 404 running. 46 view layouts. 46. 402 executing. 396. 396. 59. 15. 401. 54 new. 399. 405 zooming. 38. 45 tags required. 62 filters. 113 for a drawing. 265 tasks adding. 38 items. 63 view filters. 246. 56 stockpiles. 69. 394 properties. 376. 63 Tabular Editor filters. 64 deleting. 9 TEF. 292. 371 zooming. 54 italic items. 53. 401 To Do List. 35. 390. 401 modifying. 38 editing properties. 396 deferring. 400 Browser. 35. 398. 404. 395. 111 views. 402 ing items. 63 views.Index reporting. 40. 289. 205 stream data importing. 46 view settings. 395 technical support. 47. 39.

398 creating tasks. 370 terminators types of. 402 removing tasks. 76 symbology. 191 title blocks labels. 197 placing. 28. 92. 13 versions compare. 350 saving. 175 values dates. 91. 146 reports. 12 utility connectors. 394. 65 two-point placement. 134 short. 28 displaying. 184. 392 how to. 272 tabular views. 122 included sizes. 398. 399 assigning tasks. 200 testing databases. 310 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide 453 . 357 to do list tasks. 267. 17. 254 tree views. 21 Select Tool. 92 customizing. 169 version numbers. 130. 395 assign drawing. 345. 26 project specific. 119. 76 To Do List. 204 validation item tags. 36 title blocks. 28 creating. 352. 340. 272 links. 95 default. 120 creating for drawing. 188. 404 running a task. 338. 404. 394 modifying properties. 390 updating drawings. 112 precision. 353. 121. 285 changes. 400 updating. 83. 21 gapping. 405 zooming. 329 label settings. 403 dialog box. 369. 169 templates creating. 270 General tab. 348. 349. 402 reporting. 216 assemblies. 271. 346. 329 symbol toolbars. 102 drawings. 71 tools Customize. 404 remove a task. 71. 114 To Do List. 344. 217 units for a drawing. 105 user's guides printable. 390 To Do List adding tasks. 202. 395 tolerances placement. 27. 122. 208 piperun and inline components. 119 reports. 396 deferring items. 20. 58 to do list. 93. 27. 396. 19 pointer. 397 opening. 343. 71 Properties window. 19 toolbars adding buttons. 125 sizes. 194 to and from data reports. 394 properties. 359. 17 PickQuick. 351. 341. 190 line settings. 400 creating properties. 96 customizing. 354. 391. 26. 403. 94.Index temperature maximum. 360 symbol. 121. 402 deleted tasks. 281 properties. 143 tiling windows. 392 user specific. 401 deferring tasks. 195 undoing actions. 84 reports. 214 items. 391 opening drawings. 182 two-point placement labels. 399 refresh. 271. 405 user access. 187. 397.

36 displaying. 25 previous. 32 lists. 12 width printing. 35 tabular. 333. 258 warnings approve. 367 properties. 90. 23. 370 Web forum. 36 Catalog Explorer. 13 Web Client accessing. 85. 89. 24 using zooming. 25 grids. 13 links to. 39 switching. 370 windows arranging. 22 saving. 310 refreshing. 47. 22 table layouts. 151 restoring. 23 in. 32 consistency checking. 131. 319 watermarks Page Setup. 111 tabular. 102 list. 381 What's New for this release. 29. 14. 88. 36 cascading. 30 grids. 54. 57 Design. 369 printing. 265 zooming areas. 33 claims. 259 support. 83 switching. 77 defining filters. 325 World Wide Web forum. 78 changing properties. 36 overview. 84. 394. 309 refresh. 303 deleting. 52 Design view. 308. 53 tables. 35 drawings. 34 displaying. 36 views arranging. 39. 35. 48. 329 454 SmartPlant P&ID User’s Guide . 161 inserting.Index comparing. 24 tasks. 115 report templates. 35 General tab. 78 manipulating. 14. 305 vertices. 15. 17. 24. 22 printing. 141 panning. 51. 26. 25 properties. 304. 395 Zyqad importing. 22. 317. 314 leader lines. 22 Engineering Data Editor. 77. 36 panning. 28. 161 viewing about SmartPlant P&ID. 258 Engineering Data Editor. 66 catalog items. 15 drawing views. 115 drawing. 124 XML tags. 313 resolving inconsistencies. 23 windows. 46. 34. 22. 350 reports. 41. 335 settings. 36 wizards migration. 35 document properties. 190 properties. 31 inconsistencies. 34 fitting. 150 inconsistencies. 237 properties of documents. 23 out. 15 drawing. 22. 35 using zoom. 305. 37 stockpile. 15. 55 settings. 12 viewing drawings. 367. 34 drawings. 13 Catalog Explorer.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->